PSYCHOLOGY & SOCIOLOGY - McGraw-Hill Books

www.blackboard.com / www.webct.comcourse management systemsCourse Management Systems like Blackboardand WebCT offer you another way to integratedigital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGraw-Hill Online Learning Center content is formatted tosave you hours of computer inputting.How instructors use itLoad McGraw-Hill content into yourplatform and you will have a fully populatedcourse online. You can then customize thecontent to match your syllabus. You willalso be able to assign specifi c exercises,quizzes, or readings to your students.Grades are posetd automatically to let youknow how students are doing as a whole,or individually. Built-in communicationallows you to conduct live chats, overseebulletin board topics, and e-mail studentswho might need more help than others.How students use itStudents can visit your online course viathe Internet to check the coursework youhave assigned. The platform will record thestudents’ progress through your course,which will enable you to see where theyare studying most. Self-grading quizzesalso indicate exactly where studentsneed further review. The platform’scommunicaiton system encouragesstudent collaboration with features suchas live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletinboards, or traditional e-mail.

IntroducingPrepCenterfrom McGraw-HillPrepCenter is McGraw-Hill’s unique libraryof teaching assets that puts the power in yourhands. On one easy to navigate screen you cansearch an entire package of learning material.PrepCenter puts the power in your hands.Choose to browse our complete library of digital assets and classroom activities by chapter,concept, or media type.Are you looking for something–anything–interesting to liven up the next lecture? Are youlooking for an exercise on segmentation? Are you looking for graphics or video?Choose what YOU want to do:Do you want to see if there are additional cases for chapter 2? Do you want to preview thevideo clip on new product introduction? Do you want to download add the classroom activityon ethics or save it in your PrepFolder?Create your own organization…With PrepCenter you can create your own set of PrepFolders organized however you want them--by date, topic, class–it’s up to you. Simply drag and drop the assets into your folder and save themthere for a future lecture. PrepCenter allows you to create and name as many Folders as you want,when you want.In your own time…Perhaps you would like tospend a few days in the summer creating yourtemplates for your principles of marketing classin the fall. Start the process, save your lectures,and revisit before the start of school. Or if youget assigned your course at the last minute, youcan create your presentations on the fly. Withone password and one website you can buildyour classroom presentations when-ever, whereeverand how-ever you want!Ask for a demonstration today!Now available for Business and Psychology selected titles!

PSYCH 2.0 Online Experience Guide : Web siteWith companion printed guidebook – Online Experience GuideISBN: 978-0-07-727588-4PSYCH 2.0 is a collection of online-basedconcept reinforcements, such as interactivitiesand videos for Introduction to Psychologycourses.It is organized by learning concept, so it can beused with any Intro Psych text.It is perfect for any professor who thinks theircourse and/or students would benefit fromalternative presentations of key Intro Psychconcepts.Tamara A. RahhalMatthew SchulkindKEY FEATURES AND BENEFITS Easily portable into existing course management systems Perfect for all instructors:• Hybrid course instructors looking for a turnkey solution,• Online instructors looking for supplemental assignments,homework, etc.• Traditional instructors looking for reinforcement of conceptscovered in lecture

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHTABLE OF CONTENTPSYCHOLOGYIntroductory Psychology .......................................................................................5Introductory Psychology ........................................................................................................... 7Introductory Psychology – Readers .................................................................................................12Developmental Psychology ................................................................................15Adulthood and Aging .............................................................................................................. 33Adulthood and Aging – Readers ............................................................................................. 34Adolescence – Reader / Cases .............................................................................................. 32Adolescence – Texts .............................................................................................................. 30Child Development – Chronological ....................................................................................... 23Child Development – Readers / Cases .................................................................................. 27Child Development – Topical .................................................................................................. 25Child Guidance ....................................................................................................................... 29Developmental Psychopathology ........................................................................................... 36Gender Role Development ..................................................................................................... 37Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ................................................................... 17Human Development / Lifespan – Readers ........................................................................... 20Human Development / Lifespan – Topical .............................................................................. 20Educational Psychology .....................................................................................39Child, Family & Society – Readers ......................................................................................... 47Death and Dying ..................................................................................................................... 48Educational Psychology .........................................................................................................41Educational Psychology – Readers ........................................................................................ 44Infants & Toddlers ................................................................................................................... 47Social and Personality Psychology.....................................................................51Advanced Social Psychology ................................................................................................. 57Attitudes and Behavior ........................................................................................................... 55Health Psychology .................................................................................................................. 61Intimacy .................................................................................................................................. 58Motivation and Emotion .......................................................................................................... 62Personality .............................................................................................................................. 56Psychology of Prejudice ......................................................................................................... 61Psychology of Women and Gender ........................................................................................ 58Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader ........................................................................ 60Social Psychology – Texts ......................................................................................................53Social Psychology – Readers ................................................................................................. 541

TABLE OF CONTENTClinical Psychology.............................................................................................63Abnormal Psychology ............................................................................................................. 65Abnormal Psychology – Readers ........................................................................................... 66Adjustment – Readers ............................................................................................................ 67Counseling ............................................................................................................................. 68Developmental Psychopathology ........................................................................................... 71Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ............................................................................................... 68Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers .............................................................................. 69Introduction to Clinical Psychology ......................................................................................... 67Experimental Psychology ...................................................................................73Cognitive Psychology ............................................................................................................. 79Perception .............................................................................................................................. 80Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology ............................................................................. 80Research Methods ................................................................................................................. 75Statistics ................................................................................................................................. 78SPSS/SAS .............................................................................................................................. 78Tests and Measurements ....................................................................................................... 79Applied Psychology ............................................................................................83Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior ................................................................... 85Sports Psychology .................................................................................................................. 85Psychology History & Systems ...........................................................................87History and Systems .............................................................................................................. 89Human Sexuality ................................................................................................91Human Sexuality .................................................................................................................... 93Human Sexuality – Readers ................................................................................................... 95SOCIOLOGYSociology ............................................................................................................97Comparative Societies ......................................................................................................... 160Criminology – Readers ......................................................................................................... 151Drugs & Society .................................................................................................................... 147Drugs & Society – Readers .................................................................................................. 149Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers ........................................................................ 126Introductory Sociology .......................................................................................................... 101Introductory Sociology – Readers ........................................................................................ 105Juvenile Delinquency ........................................................................................................... 147Marriage & the Family .......................................................................................................... 113Marriage & the Family – Readers ......................................................................................... 115Medical Sociology – Readers ............................................................................................... 125Political Sociology ................................................................................................................ 1332

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHINTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGYIntroductory Psychology .......................................................................................7Introductory Psychology – Readers ........................................................................... 125

NEW TITLESINTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PagePsychology: Making Connections Feist 978-0-07-353183-0 7Psychology And Your Life Feldman 978-0-07-337702-5 72009Annual Editions: Psychology 09/10, 40e Buskist 978-0-07-351639-4 12Annual Editions: Psychology 08/09, 2009 Update, 39e Duffy 978-0-07-339779-5 13Essentials of Understanding Psychology, 8e Feldman 978-0-07-337020-0 8Understanding Psychology, 9E Feldman 978-0-07-337019-4 9Psychology: An Introduction, 10e Lahey 978-0-07-353198-4 10Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior, 4e Passer 978-0-07-338276-0 116

Introductory to PsychologyIntroductory PsychologyNEWPSYCHOLOGY AND YOUR LIFERobert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst2010 / Softcover / 448 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337702-5Available: January 2009This text also provides instructors with a fully-integrated supplementspackage to help instructors objectively gauge their students’ masteryof psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamicclass experiences—whether in the classroom or online. All ancillarymaterials are organized by the measurable learning outcomes of eachmodule within the text—there is no more wondering whether the textin use will meet the accreditation guidelines for schools! Emphasizingpractical application, Psychology and Your Life offers examples andperspectives from the healthcare industry (including Allied Health),technology, criminal justice, legal, and business, among others toprepare students to readily prepare and apply psychology throughouttheir lives and careers.Chapter 9: Personality and Individual DifferencesModule 29: Psychodynamic Approaches to PersonalityModule 30: Trait, Learning, Biological and Evolutionary, andHumanistic Approaches to PersonalityModule 31: Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes UsDistinctiveModule 32: Intelligence?Chapter 10: Psychological DisordersModule 33: Normal Versus Abnormal: Making a DistinctionModule 34: The Major Psychological DisordersModule 35: Psychological Disorders in PerspectiveChapter 11: Treatment of Psychological DisordersModule 36: Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, andCognitive Approaches to TreatmentModule 37: Psychotherapy: Humanistic and Group Approaches toTreatmentModule 38: Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches toTreatmentChapter 12: Social PsychologyModule 39: Attitudes and Social CognitionModule 40: Social Influence and GroupsModule 41: Prejudice and DiscriminationModule 42: Positive and Negative Social BehaviorModule 43: Stress and CopingCONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction to PsychologyModule 1: Psychologists at WorkModule 2: A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and theFutureModule 3: Research in PsychologyModule 4: The Ethics of ResearchChapter 2: Neuroscience and BehaviorModule 5: Neurons: The Basic Elements of BehaviorModule 6: The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:Communicating Within the BodyModule 7: The BrainChapter 3: Sensation and PerceptionModule 8: Sensing the World Around UsModule 9: Vision: Shedding Light on the EyeModule 10: Hearing and the Other SensesModule 11: Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of theWorldChapter 4: States of ConsciousnessModule 12: Sleep and DreamsModule 13: Hypnosis and MeditationModule 14: Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of ConsciousnessChapter 5: LearningModule 15: Classical ConditioningModule 16: Operant ConditioningModule 17: Cognitive Approaches to LearningChapter 6: Thinking: Memory, Cognition, and LanguageModule 18: The Foundations of MemoryModule 19: Recall and ForgettingModule 20: Thinking, Reasoning, and Problem SolvingModule 21: LanguageChapter 7: Motivation and EmotionModule 22: Explaining MotivationModule 23: Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and BeDaringModule 24: Understanding Emotional ExperiencesChapter 8: DevelopmentModule 25: Nature and Nurture, and Prenatal DevelopmentModule 26: Infancy and ChildhoodModule 27: Adolescence: Becoming an AdultModule 28: AdulthoodNEW2010 / Hardcover / 768 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353183-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128533-9 [IE]Available: January 2009http://www.mhhe.com/feist1eInternational EditionPSYCHOLOGY: MAKINGCONNECTIONSGregory J Feist, San Jose State UniversityErika Rosenberg, University of California DavisConnect with science. Connect with students. Connect with Feistand Rosenberg’s Psychology. In Psychology: Making Connections,Greg Feist and Erika Rosenberg provide the tools for studentsto make meaningful connections with the material encompassedin Introductory Psychology while still presenting psychology as ascienti c endeavor. With its focus on connections, Feist helps yourstudents to understand both the discipline and concepts of psychologyas well as psychology’s relevance to their lives. Feist provides you withthe science you are seeking while bringing it alive for your studentsin an accessible way. By challenging students to make connectionsbetween what they are reading and learning about in class and theworld around them outside the classroom, Psychology: MakingConnections fosters students’ critical thinking skills. At the same time,the authors consistently reinforce the idea that science is a processand not just a collection of resulting outcomes to be memorized. Indoing so, they bring to life the names and experiments on the pageand vividly illustrate the human element in the scienti c method.CONTENTSPrefaceForeword by Paul Ekman1 Introduction to Psychology2 Conducting Psychological Research7

Introductory to Psychology3 Biological Foundations4 Sensation and Perception5 The Developing Human6 Consciousness7 Memory8 Learning9 Language and Thought10 Intelligence, Problem-Solving, and Creativity11 Motivation12 Emotion13 Stress, Coping, and Health14 Personality and the Uniqueness of the Individual15 Social Behavior16 Psychological Disorders17 Treatment of Psychological DisordersGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexNEWInternational EditionESSENTIALS OFUNDERSTANDINGPSYCHOLOGY8th EditionRobert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst2009 / Softcover / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337020-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128534-6 [IE]Available: October 2008Students First. Bob Feldman’s Essentials of UnderstandingPsychology guides students through Introductory Psychologyconcepts in an accessible manner, bringing comprehension of difcultmaterial into the grasp of all students — because when studentsunderstand psychology, they learn psychology. The thoroughly revisedEighth Edition integrates a variety of elements that foster students’understanding of psychology and its impact on their everydaylives, including a new Neuroscience and Life feature, alerts to keytopics, and study skills for speci c concepts. This text also providesinstructors with a fully integrated supplements package to objectivelygauge their students’ mastery of psychology’s key principles andconcepts and to create dynamic lectures.NEW TO THIS EDITION Neuroscience In Your Life. This new feature, which appearsin each chapter, emphasizes the importance of neurosciencentificresearch within the various subfields of the discipline and instudents’ lives. Compelling brain scans, with both caption and textualexplanation, illustrate significant neuroscientific findings that areincreasingly influencing the field of psychology. Study Alerts. Throughout the text, marginal notes point outespecially important and difficult concepts and topics. These StudyAlerts offer suggestions for learning the material effectively and forstudying for tests. Updated Research. The new edition incorporates over 1000 newcitations, most from the year 2000 or later. This includes expandedcoverage of neuroscience and behavior, genetic foundations oflanguage, traumatic memory, autism, and new treatment approachesto psychological disorders. Psych 2.0. An innovative combination of both print and onlinecomponents, the Psych 2.0 web site and accompanying guidebookcombine the best of a study guide with the best of online interactivity.The Psych 2.0 Online Experience Guide, written by Tammy Rahhalof the University of Massachusetts Amherst and Matthew Schulkindof Amherst College, provides a synopsis, pre-activity TIPS, and postactivityquestions for each activity. The activities themselves offerexperiential, observational, and visual learning opportunities in overninety key concepts in introductory psychology. Constructed as anenhanced course cartridge, Psych 2.0 can be easily added to anysyllabus or online course, all at an affordable price.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction to PsychologyModule 1 Psychologists at WorkModule 2 A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the FutureModule 3 Psychology’s Key Issues and ControversiesModule 4 Research ChallengesChapter 2 Neuroscience and BehaviorModule 5 Neurons: The Basic Elements of BehaviorModule 6 The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:Communicating Within the BodyModule 7 The BrainChapter 3 Sensation and PerceptionModule 8 Sensing the World Around UsModule 9 Vision: Shedding Light on the EyeModule 10 Hearing and the Other SensesModule 11 Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of the WorldChapter 4 States of ConsciousnessModule 12 Sleep and DreamsModule 13 Hypnosis and MeditationModule 14 Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of ConsciousnessChapter 5 LearningModule 15 Classical ConditioningModule 16 Operant ConditioningModule 17 Cognitive Approaches to LearningChapter 6 MemoryModule 18 The Foundations of MemoryModule 19 Recalling Long-Term MemoriesModule 20 Forgetting: When Memory FailsChapter 7 Thinking, Language, and IntelligenceModule 21 Thinking and ReasoningModule 22 LanguageModule 23 IntelligenceChapter 8 Motivation and EmotionModule 24 Explaining MotivationModule 25 Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be DaringModule 26 Understanding Emotional ExperiencesChapter 9 DevelopmentModule 27 Nature and Nurture and Prenatal DevelopmentModule 28 Infancy and ChildhoodModule 29 Adolescence: Becoming an AdultModule 30 AdulthoodChapter 10 PersonalityModule 31 Psychodynamic Approaches to PersonalityModule 32 Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and HumanisticApproaches to PersonalityModule 33 Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes UsDistinctiveChapter 11 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-BeingModule 34 Stress and CopingModule 35 Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-BeingModule 36 Promoting Health and WellnessChapter 12 Psychological DisordersModule 37 Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the DistinctionModule 38 The Major Psychological DisordersModule 39 Psychological Disorders in Perspective8

Introductory to PsychologyChapter 13 Treatment of Psychological DisordersModule 40 Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and CognitiveApproaches to TreatmentModule 41 Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and GroupApproaches to TreatmentModule 42 Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to TreatmentChapter 14 Social PsychologyModule 43 Attitudes and Social CognitionModule 44 Social InfluenceModule 45 Prejudice and DiscriminationModule 46 Positive and Negative Social BehaviorGlossary G-1References R-1Credits C-1Name Index I-1Subject Index I-15NEWInternational EditionUNDERSTANDINGPSYCHOLOGY9th EditionRobert S Feldman, University of Mass-Amherst2009 / Hardcover / 784 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337019-4 (No Selling Rights)ISBN: 978-0-07-128535-3 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/feldmanup9eStudents First. Bob Feldman’s Understanding Psychology guidesstudents through Introductory Psychology concepts in an accessiblemanner, bringing comprehension of dif cult material into the grasp ofall students — because when students understand psychology, theylearn psychology. The thoroughly revised Ninth Edition integrates avariety of elements that foster students’ understanding of psychologyand its impact on their everyday lives, including a new NeuroscienceIn Your Life feature, alerts to key topics, and study skills for speci cconcepts. This text also provides instructors with a fully integratedsupplements package to objectively gauge their students’ masteryof psychology’s key principles and concepts and to create dynamiclectures.NEW TO THIS EDITION Neuroscience In Your Life. This new feature, which appearsin each chapter, emphasizes the importance of neurosciencentificresearch within the various subfields of the discipline and instudents’ lives. Compelling brain scans, with both caption and textualexplanation, illustrate significant neuroscientific findings that areincreasingly influencing the field of psychology. Study Alerts. Throughout the text, marginal notes point outespecially important and difficult concepts and topics. These StudyAlerts offer suggestions for learning the material effectively and forstudying for tests. Updated Research. The new edition incorporates over 1000 newcitations, most from the year 2000 or later. This includes expandedcoverage of neuroscience and behavior, genetic foundations oflanguage, traumatic memory, autism, and new treatment approachesto psychological disorders. Psych 2.0. An innovative combination of both print and onlinecomponents, the Psych 2.0 web site and accompanying guidebookcombine the best of a study guide with the best of online interactivity.The Psych 2.0 Online Experience Guide, written by Tammy Rahhalof the University of Massachusetts Amherst and Matthew Schulkindof Amherst College, provides a synopsis, pre-activity TIPS, and postactivityquestions for each activity. The activities themselves offerexperiential, observational, and visual learning opportunities in overninety key concepts in introductory psychology. Constructed as anenhanced course cartridge, Psych 2.0 can be easily added to anysyllabus or online course, all at an affordable price.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction to PsychologyModule 1 Psychologists at WorkModule 2 A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and theFutureModule 3 Psychology’s Key Issues and ControversiesChapter 2 Psychological ResearchModule 4 The Scientific MethodModule 5 Conducting Psychological ResearchModule 6 Critical Research IssuesChapter 3 Neuroscience and BehaviorModule 7 Neurons: The Basic Elements of BehaviorModule 8 The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:Communicating Within the BodyModule 9 The BrainChapter 4 Sensation and PerceptionModule 10 Sensing the World Around UsModule 11 Vision: Shedding Light on the EyeModule 12 Hearing and the Other SensesModule 13 Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View of theWorldChapter 5 States of ConsciousnessModule 14 Sleep and DreamsModule 15 Hypnosis and MeditationModule 16 Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of ConsciousnessChapter 6 LearningModule 17 Classical ConditioningModule 18 Operant ConditioningModule 19 Cognitive Approaches to LearningChapter 7 MemoryModule 20 The Foundations of MemoryModule 21 Recalling Long-Term MemoriesModule 22 Forgetting: When Memory FailsChapter 8 Cognition and LanguageModule 23 Thinking and ReasoningModule 24 Problem SolvingModule 25 LanguageChapter 9 IntelligenceModule 26 What Is Intelligence?Module 27 Variations in Intellectual AbilityModule 28 Group Differences in Intelligence: Genetic andEnvironmental DeterminantsChapter 10 Motivation and EmotionModule 29 Explaining MotivationModule 30 Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and BeDaringModule 31 Understanding Emotional ExperiencesChapter 11 Sexuality and GenderModule 32 Gender and SexModule 33 Understanding Human Sexual Response: The Facts ofLifeModule 34 The Diversity of Sexual BehaviorChapter 12 DevelopmentModule 35 Nature and Nurture: The Enduring DevelopmentalIssue/Module 36 Prenatal Development: Conception to BirthModule 37 Infancy and Childhood9

Introductory to PsychologyModule 38 Adolescence: Becoming an AdultModule 39 AdulthoodChapter 13 PersonalityModule 40 Psychodynamic Approaches to PersonalityModule 41 Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and HumanisticApproaches to PersonalityModule 42 Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes UsDistinctiveChapter 14 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-BeingModule 43 Stress and CopingModule 44 Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-BeingModule 45 Promoting Health and WellnessChapter 15 Psychological DisordersModule 46 Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the DistinctionModule 47 The Major Psychological DisordersModule 48 Psychological Disorders in PerspectiveChapter 16 Treatment of Psychological DisordersModule 49Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and CognitiveApproaches to TreatmentModule 50 Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and GroupApproaches to TreatmentModule 51iomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to TreatmentChapter 17 Social PsychologyModule 52 Attitudes and Social CognitionModule 53 Social InfluenceModule 54 Prejudice and DiscriminationModule 55 Positive and Negative Social BehaviorAppendix Going by the Numbers: Statistics in Psychology A-1Module 56 Descriptive Statistics A-3Module 57 Measures of Variability A-7Module 58 Using Statistics to Answer Questions: Inferential Statisticsand Correlation A-11Glossary G-1References R-1Credits C-1Name Index I-1Subject Index I-15NEW2009 / Softcover / 752 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353198-4ISBN: 978-0-07-128000-6 [IE]Available: July 2008http://www.mhhe.com/lahey10eInternational EditionPSYCHOLOGY: ANINTRODUCTION10th EditionBenjamin B Lahey, University of ChicagoA contemporary take on a time tested classic. Students will masterthe central concepts of psychology with the new 10th edition ofPsychology from Benjamin Lahey. A new chapter on the Interplayof Nature and Nurture highlights the 10th edition’s new organizationand streamlined content . Lahey weaves scholarship based onempirical research throughout the text, ensuring an accurate portraitof contemporary psychology. The text’s student-friendly writing, newchapter openers, and fresh applications make the material morerelevant to students than ever before, and the proven learning systemensures that all students will grasp the concepts presented in thebook. Lahey’s hallmark emphasis on diversity and culture remainsintegrated throughout the text, making this the text for a well roundedintroduction to all areas of psychology.NEW TO THIS EDITIONNew chapter, Chapter 4: Interplay of Nature and Nurture. Updated research throughout. Newly incorporated researchreflects groundbreaking work on many key topics especially inthe Biological Foundations of Behavior and Social Psychologychapters. Dynamic PPTs--the latest addition to our instructor toolkit formaking professors stars in the classroom. In response to facultycomments on campus, in reviews, and at symposia as well asfeedback from observations of Intro classrooms, the DynamicPowerPoints go beyond the standard book-specific fare. We haveraised the bar with more than 80 of these concept-based PowerPointdecks available to adopters of any of our Intro books.CONTENTSPart 1: Introduction And FoundationsChapter 1: Introduction to PsychologyChapter 2: Research Methods in PsychologyChapter 3: Biological Foundations in BehaviorChapter 4: The Interplay of Nature and NurturePart 2: AwarenessChapter 5: Sensation and PerceptionChapter 6: States of ConsciousnessPart 3: Learning And CognitionChapter 7: Basic Principles of LearningChapter 8: MemoryChapter 9: Cognition, Language, and IntelligencePart 4: Developmental PsychologyChapter 10: Developmental PsychologyPart 5: The SelfChapter 11: Motivation and EmotionChapter 12: Personality Theories and Assessment10

Introductory to PsychologyPart 6: Health and AdjustmentChapter 13: Stress and HealthChapter 14: Abnormal BehaviorChapter 15: TherapiesPart 7: Social ContextChapter 16: Social PsychologyChapter 17: Psychology Applied to Business and other ProfessionsChapter 12 Development over the Life SpanChapter 13 PersonalityChapter 14 Adjusting to Life: Stress, Coping, and HealthChapter 15 Psychological DisordersChapter 16 Treatment of Psychological DisordersChapter 17 Social Thinking and Behavior Appendix: Statistics inPsychology A-1NEWInternational EditionPSYCHOLOGY: THESCIENCE OF MIND ANDBEHAVIOR4th EditionMichael W. Passer, University of WashingtonRonald E. Smith, University of Washington2009 / 800 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338276-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128329-8 [IE]Available: October 2007Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior imparts students witha scienti c understanding of the eld of psychology while showingthem the impact on their day-to-day existence. A simple conceptualframework within the text emphasizes relations between biological,psychological, and environmental levels of analysis and portrays thefocus of modern psychology. Together with Research Close-Ups ineach chapter and Beneath the Surface discussions and What Do YouThink? questions, the text challenges students to think critically aboutpsychology as a science and its impact on their lives.NEW TO THIS EDITION Chapter 3: Biological Foundations of Behavior has beenexpanded to two chapters, Chapter 3: Genes, Environment, andBehavior; and Chapter 4: The Brain and Behavior. Chapter 11: Development has been reorganized so that theinfancy-early childhood portion, when changes are rapid, is coveredchronologically, and the later life sections are covered thematically. Increased Emphasis on the Scientific Method. Chapter 2 hasbeen revised to clarify and increase student engagement with thisimportant content area, and includes a new, in-depth feature usingthe Scientific Method. Experimental Design Diagrams in conjunction with theResearch Close-Ups in each chapter reinforce the emphasis in thebook on helping students to understand research. These diagramsexplore the methodology used in the experiment and why.CONTENTSChapter 1 The Science of PsychologyChapter 2 Studying Behavior ScientificallyChapter 3 Genes, Environment, and BehaviorChapter 4 The Brain and BehaviorChapter 5 Sensation and PerceptionChapter 6 States of ConsciousnessChapter 7 Learning and Adaptation: The Role of ExperienceChapter 8 MemoryChapter 9 Language and ThinkingChapter 10 IntelligenceChapter 11 Motivation and EmotionInternational EditionTHE SCIENCE OF PSYCHOLOGYAN APPRECIATIVE VIEWLaura King, University of Missouri--Columbia2008 / 864 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353188-5ISBN: 978-0-07-128403-5 [IE]Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/king1Why Things Go Right. The Science of Psychology: An AppreciativeView by Laura King (University of Missouri at Columbia) is the rsttext to bring a truly appreciative view of psychology—as a scienceand for exploring behavior—to introductory students. It is built aroundthe idea that students must study the discipline of psychology as awhole, that the sub-disciplines are intricately connected, and thathuman behavior is best understood by exploring its functioning statein addition to its potential dysfunctions. For example, imagine thatyou have been asked to create a science of “watchology.” You havetwo watches that both have had the unfortunate “trauma” of being leftin the pocket of someone’s jeans through the washer and dryer. Onewatch has suffered the worst possible fate—it no longer tells time. Theother has emerged from the traumatic event still ticking. Which watchwould you use to develop your new science of watchology? Clearly,the working watch will help you understand watches better than thebroken one. What does watchology have to do with psychology? Quitesimply, in psychology as in watchology, it makes sense to start withwhat works: to gain a general understanding of human behavior andthen apply that knowledge to those who have emerged from life’sexperiences in dysfunction.CONTENTSChapter 1 What Is Psychology? Defining PsychologyChapter 2 Psychology’s Scientific MethodsChapter 3 Biological Foundations of BehaviorChapter 4 Human DevelopmentChapter 5 Sensation and PerceptionChapter 6 States of ConsciousnessChapter 7 LearningChapter 8 MemoryChapter 9 Thinking, Language, and IntelligenceChapter 10 Motivation and EmotionChapter 11 PersonalityChapter 12 Social PsychologyChapter 13 Industrial and Organizational PsychologyChapter 14 Psychological DisordersChapter 15 TherapiesChapter 16 Health Psychology11

Introductory to PsychologyInternational EditionPSYCHOLOGY WITH IN-PSYCH PLUSSTUDENT CD-ROM AND POWERWEBUpdated 7th EditionJohn W. Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2005 / Hardcover with CD-ROM / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-298073-8 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-111394-6 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/santrockp7uCONTENTSChapter 1: What Is Psychology?Chapter 2: Psychology’s Scientific MethodsChapter 3: Biological Foundations of BehaviorChapter 4: Human DevelopmentChapter 5: Sensation and PerceptionChapter 6: States of ConsciousnessChapter 7: LearningChapter 8: MemoryChapter 9: Thinking and LanguageChapter 10: IntelligenceChapter 11: Motivation and EmotionChapter 12: PersonalityChapter 13: Psychological DisordersChapter 14: TherapiesChapter 15: Stress, Coping, and HealthChapter 16: Social PsychologyGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexInternational EditionIntroductory Psychology –ReadersNEWANNUAL EDITIONS:PSYCHOLOGY 09/1040th EditionWilliam Buskist, Auburn University2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351639-4Available: January 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516392.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.ESSENTIALS OF PSYCHOLOGY WITHMAKING THE GRADE CD-ROMBenjamin B. Lahey, University of Chicago2002 / Softcover / 471 pagesISBN: 978-07-248762-6ISBN: 978-0-07-112120-0 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/laheye1CONTENTSCh 1 - What is Psychology?Ch 2 - Biological Foundations of BehaviorCh 3 - Sensation and PerceptionCh 4 - States of ConsciousnessCh 5 - Basic Principles of LearningCh 6 - MemoryCh 7 - Cognition, Language, and IntelligenceCh 8 - Developmental PsychologyCh 9 - Motivation and EmotionCh 10 - GenderCh 11 - Personality Theories and AssessmentCh 12 - Stress and HealthCh 13 - Abnormal BehaviorCh 14 - TherapiesCh 15 - Social PsychologyAppendix: Measurement, Research Design, and Statistics12

Introductory to PsychologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS:PSYCHOLOGY 08/092009 Update, 39th EditionKaren G Duffy, State University College-Geneseo2009 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339779-5Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397792.mhtmlThis 2009 UPDATE, Thirty-Ninth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:PSYCHOLOGY provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; and an onlineinstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM (ISBN 9780073301907) is offeredas a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles aresupported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.23. Ambition: Why Some People Are Most Likely to Succeed24. Eating into the Nation’s Obesity Epidemic,Unit 7. Development25. A Learning MachineNew! 26. Growing Up OnlineNew! 27. Why Newborns Cause Acrimony and Alimony28. Ageless Aging: The Next Era of Retirement29. Blessed Are Those Who Mourn—and Those Who ComfortThemUnit 8. Personality Processes30. Culture and the Development of Self-Knowledge31. Frisky, but More Risky32. The Testing of AmericaUnit 9. Social Processes33. Bad Apples or Bad Barrels?34. Young and Restless,35. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See You36. We’re Wired to ConnectUnit 10. Psychological Disorders37. Inside a Mass Murdererer’s MindNew! 38. Treating War’s Toll on the Mind39. Soldier Support40. We Love to be Scared on HalloweenUnit 11. Psychological Treatments41. Psychiatry: A Branch of the Law42. The Quandary Over Mental Illness43. Computer- and Internet-Based Psychotherapy InterventionsNEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Psychology_0809_2009_Update_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions:Psychology 08/09 (2009 Update), 39/e, with the correspondingchapters in three of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Psychologytextbooks by Feldman and Passer/Smith.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Science of Psychology1. Why Study Psychology?2. Does Psychology Make a Significant Difference in Our Lives?3. The 10 Commandments of Helping Students Distinguish Sciencefrom Pseudoscience in Psychology4. How to Spot Bias in ResearchUnit 2. Biological Bases of Behavior5. The Amazing Brain6. Genetic Influence on Human Psychological TraitsNew! 7. From Discovery to Translation8. The Structure of the Human BrainUnit 3. Perceptual Processes9. Sensational Tune-Ups10. Extreme States11. A Matter of Taste12. What Dreams Are Made OfUnit 4. Learning and Remembering13. Teaching for UnderstandingNew! 14. What Studies of Actors and Acting Can Tell Us About Memoryand Cognitive Functioning15. Memory Flexibility16. Theory of Multiple IntelligencesUnit 5. Cognitive Processes17. Shouldn’t There Be a Word...?18. What Was I Thinking?19. The Culture-Cognition ConnectionUnit 6. Emotion and Motivation20. The Structure of Emotion,21. Feeling Smart: The Science of Emotional Intelligence22. Unconscious Emotion13

Introductory to PsychologyANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONAL GROWTHAND BEHAVIOR 07/0826TH EDITIONKaren G Duffy, State University of Coll-Geneseo2008 / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339731-3Available: January 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007339 7318.mhtmlThis Twenty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONALGROWTH AND BEHAVIOR 07/08 provides convenient, inexpensiveaccess to current articles selected from the best of the public press.Organizational features include: an annotated listing of selected WorldWide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; ageneral introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index;and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USINGANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practicalguide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by ourstudent website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Becoming a Person: Foundations1. Carl Rogers’ Life and Work: An Assessment on the 100thAnniversary of His Birth2. Mysteries of the Mind3. Skepticism of Caricatures: B.F. Skinner Turns 1004. The “Big Five” and You: How Personality Traits Affect BehaviorUnit 2. Determinants of Behavior: Motivation, Environment, andPhysiology5. What Makes You Who You Are6. The Blank Slate, Steven Pinker7. Genetic Influence on Human Psychological Traits8. Nature vs. Nurture: Two Brothers With Schizophrenia9. The Amazing Brain: Is Neuroscience the Key to What Makes UsHuman?10. His Brain, Her Brain11. Cultural Psychology: Studying the Exotic Other12. Just Do It13. Stand and DeliverUnit 3. Problems Influencing Personal Growth14. The Biology of Aging15. and Now, the Hard Part: That Sweet Little Thing Is About toCommandeer Your Life16. Childhood Is for Children17. Kaleidoscope of Parenting Cultures18. What American Schools Can Learn from Hogwarts School ofWitchcraft and Wizardry19. What Makes Teens Tick20. Staving Off Middle-Age Spread Requires Portion Control andPlenty of Exercise21. Midlife Crisis? Bring It On!22. The Borders of HealingUnit 4. Relating to Others23. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See You24. What’s Your Emotional IQ?25. Nurturing Empathy26. What Does That Mean?27. Deception Detection28. Calling It Off29. Want to Stay Married? Move to Massachusetts30. Forgiveness: Who Does It and How Do They Do It?Unit 5. The Individual and Society31. The Emperor’s New Woes32. Suspicious Minds33. 50th Anniversary: Brown v. Board of Education34. The Social Net35. Work-life: Organizations in Denial36. How to Get Out Alive37. The Collateral Psychological Damage of WarUnit 6. Enhancing Human Adjustment: Learning to CopeEffectively38. Are We Becoming a Nation of Depressives?39. Dear Reader: Get a Life40. The 10 Rules of Change41. Drugs vs. Talk TherapyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONPSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES15th EditionBrent Slife, Brigham Young University2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351510-6Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/073515 108.mhtmlThis Fifteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUESpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our studentwebsite, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 Research IssuesIssue 1. Should Animal Research in Psychology Be Eliminated?Issue 2. Are Traditional Scientific Methods Sufficient to ProvideEvidence for Psychological PracticeIssue 3. Classic Dialogue: Was Stanley Milgram’s Study of ObedienceUnethical?Unit 2 Biological IssuesIssue 4. Are Humans Naturally Violent?Issue 5. Do Women and Men Communicate Differently?Issue 6. Do Brain Deficiencies Determine Learning Disabilities?Unit 3 Human DevelopmentIssue 7. Does the Environment Influence Human Development Morethan Genes?Issue 8. Does the Divorce of Parents Harm Their Children?Issue 9. Does Research Show That Homosexual Parenting Has NoNegative Effects?Unit 4 Cognitive ProcessesIssue 10. Are Human Activities Determined?Issue 11. Is the Theory of Multiple Intelligences Valid?Unit 5 Mental HealthIssue 12. Does ADHD Exist?Issue 13. Does Taking Antidepressants Lead to Suicide?Issue 14. Does Low Self-Esteem Produce Anti-Social Behavior?Unit 6 Psychological TreatmentsIssue 15. Should Psychologists Be Able to Prescribe Medicine?Issue 16. Is Treating Homosexuality Ethical?Unit 7 Social PsychologyIssue 17. Do Video Games Lead to Violence?Issue 18. Can Sex Be Addictive?14

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHDEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGYAdulthood and Aging ..........................................................................................33Adulthood and Aging – Readers .........................................................................34Adolescence – Reader / Cases ..........................................................................32Adolescence – Texts ...........................................................................................30Child Development – Chronological ...................................................................23Child Development – Readers / Cases ..............................................................27Child Development – Topical ..............................................................................25Child Guidance ...................................................................................................29Developmental Psychopathology .......................................................................36Gender Role Development .................................................................................37Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ...............................................17Human Development / Lifespan – Readers........................................................20Human Development / Lifespan – Topical ..........................................................2015

NEW TITLESDEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PageAnnual Editions: Aging 09/10, 22e Cox 978-0-07-812773-1 34Annual Editions: Dying, Dealth, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e Dickinson 978-0-07-812767-0 34Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update), 38e Freiberg 978-0-07-812777-9 202009Human Development, 9e Candell 978-0-07-337042-2 17Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21e Cox 978-0-07-339760-3 35Human Development Across the Lifespan, 7e Dacey 978-0-07-338265-4 17Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 08/09, 10e Dickinson 978-0-07-339771-9 35Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10, 37e Freiberg 978-0-07-351636-3 21Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Lifespan Development, 2e Guest 978-0-07-351528-1 22Adult Development and Aging, 6e Hoyer 978-0-07-312854-2 33Annual Editions: Child Growth and Development 09/10, 16e Junn 978-0-07-351635-6 28Human Development, 11e Papalia 978-0-07-337016-3 18Child Psychology: A Contemporary View Point, 7e Parke 978-0-07-338268-5 25Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Adolescence, 2e Rue 978-0-07-351536-6 32A Topical Approach to Lifespan Development, 4e Santrock 978-0-07-338264-7 20Child Development: An Introduction, 12e Santrock 978-0-07-337063-7 26Life-Span Development, 12e Santrock 978-0-07-337021-7 18Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 4e White 978-0-07-351529-8 3816

Developmental PsychologyHuman Development /Lifespan – ChronologicalNEWInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionHUMAN DEVELOPMENTACROSS THE LIFESPAN7th EditionJohn S Dacey and John Travers of Boston CollegeHUMAN DEVELOPMENT9th EditionThomas L Candell and Corinne HainesCrandell of Broome Community CollegeJames W Vander Zanden, Ohio State University2009 / Softcover / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338265-4ISBN: 978-0-07-128398-4 [IE]Available: April 2008http://www.mhhe.com/dacey72009 / Softcover / 768 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337042-2ISBN: 978-0-07-128530-8 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/crandell9eThis long-trusted text features an interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, andcontextual perspective on development. Applications to psychology,health care, social work, education, and family dynamics make this aperfect book for classes with a mixed population of majors. Continuingthe hallmark diversity coverage of the prior eight editions, Crandellet al once again do an incomparable job examining populations atrisk and explaining how they experience development and why theirexperience is different. With more than 1200 new references, the 9thedition has been updated throughout to re ect the latest informationavailable in human development.CONTENTSChapter 1 IntroductionChapter 2 Theories of DevelopmentChapter 3 Reproduction, Heredity, and Prenatal DevelopmentChapter 4 Birth and Physical DevelopmentChapter 5 Infancy : Cognitive and Language DevelopmentChapter 6 Infancy : The Development of Emotional and Social BondsChapter 7 Early Childhood: Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 8 Early Childhood: Emotional and Social DevelopmentChapter 9 Middle Childhood: Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 10 Middle Childhood: Emotional and Social DevelopmentChapter 11 Adolescence: Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 12 Adolescence: Emotional and Social DevelopmentChapter 13 Early Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 14 Early Adulthood: Emotional and Social DevelopmentChapter 15 Middle Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 16 Middle Adulthood : Emotional and Social DevelopmentChapter 17 Late Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 18 Late Adulthood: Emotional and Social DevelopmentChapter 19 Dying and DeathAll of the lifespan without all of the bells and whistles. Thischronologically-organized text is less expensive and briefer thanmost Lifespan texts. Its numerous examples drawn from education,nursing, and psychology make the content relevant to students froma variety of majors and backgrounds, while a highly praised studyguide integrated into the text promotes and reinforces conceptualunderstanding.NEW TO THIS EDITION Typically, more than $20 less expensive than other comprehensiveLifespan texts.CONTENTSPart 1 IntroductionChapter 1 An Example of Development Through The LifespanChapter 2 The Psychoanalytic TraditionPart 2 BeginningsChapter 3 The Fertilization ProcessChapter 4 The Prenatal WorldPart 3 InfancyChapter 5 Physical Development In InfancyChapter 6 The Meaning of RelationshipsPart 4 Early ChildhoodChapter 7 Physical and Motor DevelopmentChapter 8 The Family in DevelopmentPart 5 Middle ChildhoodChapter 9 Physical DevelopmentChapter 10 The Changing Sense of SelfPart 6 AdolescenceChapter 11 Physical and Cognitive Development in AdolescenceChapter 12 Psychosocial Development in AdolescencePart 7 Early AdulthoodChapter 13 Physical and Cognitive Development in EarlyAdulthoodChapter 14 Psychosocial Development in Early AdulthoodPart 8 Middle AdulthoodChapter 15 Physical and Cognitive Development in MiddleAdulthoodChapter 16 Psychosocial Development in Middle AdulthoodPart 9 Late AdulthoodChapter 17 Physical and Cognitive Development in Late AdulthoodChapter 18 Psychosocial Development in Late AdulthoodChapter 19 Dying and Spirituality17

Developmental PsychologyNEW2009 / Hardcover / 832 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337016-3ISBN: 978-0-07-128074-7 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/papaliah11International EditionHUMAN DEVELOPMENT11th EditionDiane E PapaliaSally Wendkos OldsRuth Duskin FeldmanThe 11th edition of this classic best-seller retains the extensive andintegrated cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the provenGuidepost-Checkpoint learning system, and the balance betweenresearch and real-life applications that have made this text a long timefavorite of students and faculty. In the warmly-written and engagingstyle that is their hallmark, Papalia, Olds, and Feldman once againpaint an engaging chronological portrayal of development throughthe lifespan. This new edition features enhanced treatment of braindevelopment and evolutionary psychology research as well asnew Research in Action features highlighting interesting and timelytopics.NEW TO THIS EDITION “Research in Action” features provide an in-depth examinationof research topics briefly mentioned in the text. For example, Chapter6 explores “The Austism Epidemic.” Expanded coverage of brain development. Various studies areincluded throughout the text that shed light on the role of the brain incognition and emotions. Enhanced emphasis on evolutionary theory in childdevelopment. Streamlined approach. The 11th edition is nearly 100 pagesshorter than the 10th edition making it more manageable for use ina single term. “Did You Know?” sections introduce each chapter in a new andinnovative way by highlighting interesting and enlightening findingsmentioned in the chapter.CONTENTSPart 1 About Human DevelopmentChapter 1: The Study of Human DevelopmentChapter 2: Theory and ResearchPart 2 BeginningsChapter 3: Forming a New LifeChapter 4: Birth and Physical Development During the First ThreeYearsChapter 5: Cognitive Development during the First Three YearsChapter 6: Psychosocial Development during the First Three YearsPart 3 Early ChildhoodChapter Seven: Physical and Cognitive Development in EarlyChildhoodChapter 8: Psychosocial Development in Early ChildhoodPart 4 Middle ChildhoodChapter 9: Physical and Cognitive Development in MiddleChildhoodChapter 10: Psychosocial Development in Middle ChildhoodPart 5 AdolescenceChapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in AdolescenceChapter 12: Psychosocial Development in AdolescencePart 6 Young AdulthoodChapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Emerging andYoung AdulthoodChapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Emerging and YoungAdulthoodPart 7 Middle AdulthoodChapter 15: Physical and Cognitive Development in MiddleAdulthoodChapter 16: Psychosocial Development in Middle AdulthoodPart 8 Late AdulthoodChapter 17: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late AdulthoodChapter 18: Psychosocial Development in Late AdulthoodPart 9 The End of LifeChapter 19: Dealing with Death and BereavementNEWInternational EditionLIFE-SPAN DEVELOPMENT12th EditionJohn W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2009 / Softcover / 832 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337021-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128083-9 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/santrockld12Driven by learning goals, previous editions of this text have beenwidely adopted for their accurate, complete, and up-to-date coverage.While maintaining these hallmarks, this revision includes increasedcoverage of adulthood and aging, a new “Interlude” feature onapplications, and updated research with more 21st-century citationsthan ever before.NEW TO THIS EDITION Culture and Diversity. The Santrock tradition of emphasizingculture and diversity continues in this edition. Sensitive coverage ofculture and diversity appears in every chapter and is highlighted inDiversity in Life-Span Development interludes. Expanded and updated coverage of adult development andaging. Particularly close attention has been given to revamping thisoften overlooked area in human development. Changes includeupdated material on obesity in emerging and early adulthood, newfindings on stress in the workplace, and expanded coverage ofmenopause.CONTENTSPrefaceSection One--The Life-Span Developmental PerspectiveChapter 1. IntroductionAppendix .Careers in Life-Span DevelopmentSection Two--BeginningChapter 2. Biological BeginningsChapter 3. Prenatal Development and BirthSection Three--InfancyChapter 4. Physical Development in InfancyChapter 5. Cognitive Development in InfancyChapter 6. Socioemotional Development in InfancySection Four--Early ChildhoodChapter 7. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early ChildhoodChapter 8. Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood18

Developmental PsychologySection Five--Middle and Late ChildhoodChapter 9. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and LateChildhoodChapter 10. Socioemotional Development in Middle and LateChildhoodSection Six--AdolescenceChapter 11. Physical and Cognitive Development in AdolescenceChapter 12. Socioemotional Development in AdolescenceSection Seven--Early AdulthoodChapter 13. Physical and Cognitive Development in EarlyChildhoodChapter 14. Socioemotional Development in Early ChildhoodSection Eight--Middle AdulthoodChapter 15. Physical and Cognitive Development in MiddleAdulthoodChapter 16. Socioemotional Development in Middle AdulthoodSection Nine--Late AdulthoodChapter 17. Physical Development in Late AdulthoodChapter 18. Cognitive Development in Late AdulthoodChapter 19. Socioemotional Development in Late AdulthoodSection Ten--EndingsChapter 20. Death, Dying and GrievingInternational EditionESSENTIALS OF LIFE-SPAN DEVELOPMENTJohn W Santrock2008 / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340551-3ISBN: 978-0-07-128344-1 [IE]Available: August 2007What’s the single, most often expressed issue in the Life-SpanDevelopment course? Covering a lifetime of material. Instructorsfrom across the country are clamoring for a streamlined text capturingthe core concepts of life-span development. Essentials of Life-SpanDevelopment was carefully designed and constructed to deliver thesecore concepts, along with a strong applications focus re ecting thebroad range of interests and backgrounds of students taking thiscourse. and as always, with John Santrock’s texts, the latest researchin the eld is incorporated throughout.CONTENTSChapter 1: IntroductionThe Life-span PerspectiveThe Nature of DevelopmentTheories of DevelopmentResearch in Life-span DevelopmentChapter 2: Biological BeginningsThe Evolutionary PerspectiveGenetic Foundations of DevelopmentHeredity and Environment Interaction: The Nature-nurture DebatePrenatal DevelopmentChapter 3: Physical and Cognitive Development in InfancyMotor DevelopmentSensory and Perceptual DevelopmentCognitive DevelopmentLanguage DevelopmentChapter 4: Socioemotional Development in InfancyEmotional and Personality Development AttachmentSocial ContextsChapter 5: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early ChildhoodPhysical ChangesCognitive ChangesLanguage DevelopmentEarly Childhood EducationChapter 6: Socioemotional Development in Early ChildhoodEmotional and Personality DevelopmentFamiliesRelations, Play, and TelevisionChapter 7: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle andLate ChildhoodPhysical Changes and HealthChildren with DisabilitiesCognitive ChangesLanguage DevelopmentChapter 8: Socioemotional Development in Middle and LateChildhoodEmotional and Personality DevelopmentFamiliesPeersFriendsSchoolsChapter 9: Physical and Cognitive Development in AdolescenceThe Nature of AdolescencePhysical ChangesIssues in Adolescent HealthAdolescent CognitionSchoolsChapter 10: Socioemotional Development in AdolescenceThe Self and Emotional DevelopmentFamiliesPeersCulture and Adolescent DevelopmentAdolescent ProblemsChapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in EarlyAdulthoodThe Transition from Adolescence to AdulthoodPhysical DevelopmentSexualityCognitive DevelopmentCareers and WorkChapter 12: Socioemotional Development in Early AdulthoodStability and Change from Childhood to AdulthoodAttraction, Love, and Close RelationshipsAdult Life StylesMarriage and the FamilyGender, Relationships, and Self DevelopmentChapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in MiddleAdulthoodThe Nature of Middle AdulthoodPhysical DevelopmentCognitive DevelopmentCareers, Work, and LeisureReligion and Meaning in LifeChapter 14: Socioemotional Development in Middle AdulthoodPersonality Theories and DevelopmentStability and ChangeClose RelationshipsChapter 15: Physical and Cognitive Development in LateAdulthoodLongevity, Biological Aging, and Physical DevelopmentHealthCognitive FunctioningWork and RetirementMental HealthChapter 16: Socioemotional Development in Late AdulthoodTheories of Socioemotional DevelopmentPersonality and SocietyFamilies and Social RelationshipsEthnicity, Gender, and CultureChapter 17: Death and GrievingDefining Death and Life/Death IssuesDeath and Sociohistorical, Cultural ContextsFacing One’s Own DeathCoping with the Death of Someone Else19

Developmental PsychologyHuman Development /Lifespan – TopicalNEWSection 5: Social Contexts of DevelopmentChapter 14: Families, Lifestyles, and ParentingChapter 15: Peers and the Sociocultural WorldChapter 16: Schools, Achievement, and WorkSection 6: EndingsChapter 17: Death and Grieving Appendix: Careers in Life-SpanDevelopment Glossary References Credits Name Index SubjectIndexA TOPICAL APPROACH TOLIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT4th EditionJohn W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2009 / 832 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338264-7Available: December 2007John Santrock’s A Topical Approach to Life-Span Development textcontinues with the themes of research, applications, and contexts thathe is famous for. Students and instructors alike love it for its pedagogyand accessible writing. Building on these strengths, the fourth editionfeatures more current research, more applications including newCareers in Life-Span Development pro les, and a new Visual AssetsDatabase for Instructors.NEW TO THIS EDITION Research and Content. This 4th edition is truly a twenty-firstcentury presentation of the ¿eld of life-span development with morethan 1,500 citations from 2005 to 2008 alone, as well as classicreferences from the twentieth century. To ensure this currencyand accuracy across all the stages of the life-span, a panel ofleading experts in many different areas of life-span developmentprovide detailed evaluations and recommendations in their areasof expertise. Applications and Context. Applications are woven throughoutthe book and emphasized in Applications in Life-Span Developmentinterludes and NEW Careers in Life-Span Development profiles ineach chapter. New and Improved Visual Assets Database! VAD, McGraw-Hill’s online database of video & audio clips, photographs, andillustrations for instructors now features improved asset quality, alldownloadable to any location you choose.Human Development /Lifespan – ReadersNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMANDEVELOPMENT 09/10 (2010 UPDATE)38th EditionKaren L Freiberg, University of Maryland-Baltimore County2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812777-9Available: February 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127777.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.CONTENTSSection 1: The Life-Span PerspectiveChapter 1: IntroductionSection 2: Biological Processes, Physical Development, andHealthChapter 2: Biological BeginningsChapter 3: Physical Development and Biological AgingChapter 4: HealthChapter 5: Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual DevelopmentSection 3: Cognitive Processes and DevelopmentChapter 6: Cogntive developmental approachesChapter 7: Information ProcessingChapter 8: IntelligenceChapter 9: Language DevelopmentSection 4: Socioemotional Processes and DevelopmentsChapter 10: Emotional DevelopmentChapter 11: The Self, Identity, and PersonalityChapter 12: Gender and SexualityChapter 13: Moral Development, Values and Religion20

Developmental PsychologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMANDEVELOPMENT 09/1037th EditionKaren L Freiberg, University of Maryland-Baltimore County2009 / Softcover / 192 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351636-3Available: July 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516368.mhtmlANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 09/10, Thirty-SeventhEdition provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articlesselected from the best of the public press. Organizational featuresinclude: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anannotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; briefoverviews for each section; a topical index; and an online Instructor’sResource Guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONSIN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors.ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website,www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_HumanDevelopment_0910.pdf This convenient guide matches the Units in Annual Editions:Human Development 09/10 with the corresponding Chapters in threeof our best-selling McGraw-Hill Human Development textbooks bySantrock and Dacey et al.Unit 4: Development During Childhood: Family and CulturePart A. Family19. You and Your Quirky Kid20. The Blank Slate21. Parents Behaving Badly22. Where Personality Goes Awry\Part B. Culture23. Brown v. Board: A Dream Deferred24. Girls Gone Bad?25. Disrespecting ChildhoodUnit 5: Development During Adolescence and Young AdulthoodPart A. Adolescence26. Parents or Pop Culture? Children’s Heroes and Role Models27. A Peaceful Adolescence28. Homeroom Zombies29. Jail Time Is Learning TimePart B. Young Adulthood30. How Spirit Blooms31. The Battle for Your Brain32. Getting Back on TrackUnit 6: Development During Middle and Late AdulthoodPart A. Middle Adulthood33. Emotions and the Brain: Laughter34. The Fine Art of Letting Go35. The Myth of the Midlife CrisisPart B. Late Adulthood36. Second Time Around37. Secrets of the Centenarians38. Lost and Found39. Life After Death40. Navigating Practical Dilemmas in Terminal CareCONTENTSUnit 1: Genetic and Prenatal Influences on DevelopmentPart A. Genetic Influences1. The Identity Dance2. The Power to Divide3. What Makes Us Different?Part B. Prenatal Influences4. The Mystery of Fetal Life: Secrets of the Womb5. The Smallest Patients6. The Hunt for Golden Eggs: Young Women Donating Eggs7. Not Always ‘the Happiest Time’Unit 2: Development During Infancy and Early ChildhoodPart A. Infancy8. HHS Toned Down Breast-Feeding Ads9. Reading Your Baby’s Mind10. 20 Ways to Boost Your Baby’s Brain PowerPart B. Early Childhood11. Long-Term Studies of Preschool: Lasting Benefits Far OutweighCosts12. Accountability Comes to Preschool13. Raising a Moral ChildUnit 3: Development During Childhood: Cognition and SchoolingPart A. Cognition14. A Time and a Place for Authentic Learning15. Why We Need “The Year of Languages”Part B. Schooling16. The New First Grade: Too Much Too Soon?17. Ten Big Effects of the No Child Left Behind Act on PublicSchools18. The Power of Teaching Students Using Strengths21

Developmental PsychologyNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN LIFESPANDEVELOPMENT2nd EditionAndrew Guest, University of PortlandUnit 6 Middle AdulthoodIssue 15. Is the Institution of Marriage at Risk?Issue 16. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parentsfor Children?Issue 17. Is Religion a Pure Good in Facilitating Well-Being duringAdulthood?Unit 7 Later AdulthoodIssue 18. Can We Universally Define “Successful Aging”?Issue 19. Are Brain Exercises Unhelpful in Preventing CognitiveDecline in Old Age?Issue 20. Should the Terminally Ill Be Able to Have Physicians HelpThem Die?2009 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351528-1Available: February 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 280/mhtmlThis Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INLIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT presents current controversial issuesin a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest anddevelop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framedwith an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. Aninstructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume.USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellentinstructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating thiseffective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES readerfeatures an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites andis supported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Lifespan_Development_2e_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Lifespan Development, 2/e with the corresponding chapters in twoof our best-selling McGraw-Hill Lifespan Development textbooks bySantrock.CONTENTSUnit 1 General Issues in the Study Of Lifespan DevelopmentIssue 1. Does the Cultural Environment Influence LifespanDevelopment More than Our Genes?Issue 2. Are Peers More Important than Parents during the Processof Development?Issue 3. Do Significant Innate Differences Influence the CareerSuccess of Males and Females?Unit 2 Prenatal Development and InfancyIssue 4. Does Prenatal Exposure to Drugs Such as Cocaine Create“Crack Babies” with Special Developmental Concerns?Issue 5. Is There a “Myth of the First Three Years”?Issue 6. Are There Good Reasons to Allow Infants to ConsumeElectronic Media, Such as Television?Unit 3 Early Childhood and Middle ChildhoodIssue 7. Is Advertising Responsible for Childhood Obesity?Issue 8. Does Emphasizing Academic Skills Help At-Risk PreschoolChildren?Issue 9. Is Attention Deficit Disorder (ADD/ADHD) a LegitimateMedical Condition That Affects Childhood Behavior?Unit 4 AdolescenceIssue 10. Are Efforts to Improve Self-Esteem Misguided?Issue 11. Should Contemporary Adolescents Be Engaged in MoreStructured Activities?Issue 12. Does Violent Media Cause Teenage Aggression?Unit 5 Youth and Early AdulthoodIssue 13. Are Contemporary Young Adults More Selfish than PreviousGenerations?Issue 14. Are College Graduates Unprepared for Adulthood and theWorld of Work?CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES: HUMANDEVELOPMENT3rd EditionRhett Diessner, Lewis Clark State College2008 / 352 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337968-5Available: April 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 689.mhtmlThis reader provides over 40 selections of enduring intellectualvalue--classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--thathave shaped the study of human development and our contemporaryunderstanding of it.CONTENTSChapter 1 The Grand TheoriesSelection 1 SIGMUND FREUD, from “The Development of the SexualFunction,” An Outline of PsychoanalysisSelection 2 JEAN PIAGET, from “The Genetic Approach to thePsychology of Thought,” The Journal of Educational PsychologySelection 3 ERIK ERIKSON, from “Eight Stages of Man,” Childhoodand SocietyNew! Selection 4 LÊ XUÂN HY AND JANE LOEVINGER, from “The Conceptof Ego Development,” Measuring Ego DevelopmentSelection 5 LAWRENCE KOHLBERG, from “The Child as a MoralPhilosopher,” Psychology TodaySelection 6 CAROL GILLIGAN, from “Woman’s Place in Man’s LifeCycle,” In a Different Voice: Psychological Theory and Women’sDevelopmentSelection 7 HOWARD GARDNER AND JOSEPH WALTERS, from “A RoundedVersion,” Multiple Intelligences: The Theory in PracticeNew! Selection 8 MARTIN E. P. SELIGMAN AND MIHALY CSIKSZENTMIHALYI,from “Positive Psychology: An Introduction,” American PsychologistSelection 9 WILLIAM WORDSWORTH, from “Ode: Intimations ofImmortality from Recollections of Early Childhood,” The Works ofWilliam WordsworthChapter 2 Non-Western ClassicsSelection 10 KEN WILBER, from “The Spectrum of Development,”Transformations of Consciousness: Conventional and ContemplativePerspectives on DevelopmentSelection 11 BAHÁ¿U¿LLÁH, from The Seven Valleys and the FourValleysSelection 12 CONFUCIUS, from “The Great Learning,” A Source Bookin Chinese PhilosophyNew! Selection 13 NA’IM AKBAR, from “The Evolution of HumanPsychology for African Americans,” Black PsychologyChapter 3 Genes and Environmental InfluenceSelection 14 ANNE ANASTASI, from “Heredity, Environment, and theQuestion ‘How?’,” Psychological ReviewSelection 15 ALEXANDER THOMAS, STELLA CHESS, AND HERBERT G. BIRCH,from “The Origin of Personality,” Scientific AmericanChapter 4 Development in InfancySelection 16 JEAN PIAGET, from The Origins of Intelligence inChildren22

Developmental PsychologySelection 17 MARY D. SALTER AINSWORTH, from “Infant-MotherAttachment,” American PsychologistChapter 5 Development in Early ChildhoodSelection 18 JEAN PIAGET, BÄRBEL INHELDER, AND EDITH MAYER, fromThe Co-ordination of PerspectivesSelection 19 L. S. VYGOTSKY, from The Genetic Roots of Thoughtand SpeechSelection 20 MILDRED B. PARTEN, from “Social Participation AmongPre-school Children,” Journal of Abnormal and Social PsychologySelection 21 ALBERT BANDURA, DOROTHEA ROSS, AND SHEILA A. ROSS,from “Imitation of Film-Mediated Aggressive Models,” Journal ofAbnormal and Social PsychologySelection 22 DIANA BAUMRIND, from “Child Care Practices AntecedingThree Patterns of Preschool Behavior,” Genetic PsychologyMonographsChapter 6 Cognitive DevelopmentSelection 23 B.F. SKINNER, from “Verbal Behavior,” AboutBehaviorismSelection 24 NOAM CHOMSKY, from “A Review of B.F. Skinner’s VerbalBehavior,” LanguageNew! Selection 25 JEAN PIAGET, from Conservation of ContinuousQuantitiesChapter 7 Social & Personality DevelopmentSelection 26 ROBERT L. SELMAN AND ANNE P. SELMAN, from “Children’sIdeas About Friendship: A New Theory,” Psychology TodaySelection 27 JEAN PIAGET, from The Moral Judgment of the ChildSelection 28 BEATRICE BLYTH WHITING AND CAROLYN POPE EDWARDS,from “A Cross-Cultural Analysis of Sex Differences in the Behaviorof Children Aged Three Through Eleven,” Journal of SocialPsychologyChapter 8 Physical and Cognitive DevelopmentSelection 29 MARY COVER JONES, from “Psychological Correlates ofSomatic Development,” Developmental PsychologyNew! Selection 30 JEAN PIAGET, from “The Mental Development ofthe Child,” in Jean Piaget’s Six Psychological Studies, trans. AnitaTenzerNew! Selection 31 WILLIAM G. PERRY, JR., from Forms of Intellectualand Ethical Development in the College YearsChapter 9 Social and Personality DevelopmentSelection 32 JAMES E. MARCIA, from “Development and Validation ofEgo-Identity Status,” Journal of Personality and Social PsychologySelection 33 MICHAEL L. PENN AND DEBRA J. WITKIN, from “PathognomicVersus Developmentally Appropriate Self-Focus During Adolescence:Theoretical Concerns and Clinical Implications,” PsychotherapyChapter 10 Cognitive DevelopmentSelection 34 MARY FIELD BELENKY ET AL., from Subjective Knowledge:The Quest for SelfSelection 35 JOHN L. HORN AND RAYMOND B. CATTELL, from “AgeDifferences in Primary Mental Ability Factors,” Journals ofGerontologyNew! Selection 36 ELENA MUSTAKOVA-POSSARDT, from “CriticalConsciousness: An Alternative Pathway for Positive Personal andSocial Development,” Journal of Adult DevelopmentChapter 11 Social and Personality DevelopmentSelection 37 DANIEL J. LEVINSON, from “A Conception of AdultDevelopment,” American PsychologistSelection 38 ABRAHAM H. MASLOW, from “Self-Actualizing People: AStudy of Psychological Health,” Motivation and PersonalitySelection 39 ROGER GOULD, from “Adult Life Stages: Growth TowardSelf-Tolerance,” Psychology TodayNew! Selection 40 WILLIAM A. BARRY, S. J., from “Christian MaturityThrough Ignatian Spirituality,” Human DevelopmentChapter 12 Development During the Elder YearsSelection 41 PAUL B. BALTES AND K. WARNER SCHAIE, from “Aging andIQ: The Myth of the Twilight Years,” Psychology TodaySelection 42 JAMES W. FOWLER, from Stages of Faith: The Psychologyof Human Development and the Quest for MeaningSelection 43 ERIK ERIKSON, from “Reflections on the Last Stage—andthe First,” Psychoanalytic Study of the ChildSelection 44 ELISABETH KÜBLER-ROSS, from On Death and DyingChild Development– ChronologicalInternational EditionA CHILD’S WORLD11th EditionDiane E PapaliaRuth Duskin Feldman2008 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353197-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128327-4 [IE]Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaacwllThis fully-revised eleventh edition continues to provide the extensivecross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the innovative pedagogicallearning system, and the balance between research and real-lifeapplications that have made A Child’s World a favorite of studentsand professors alike. In the warmly-written and engaging stylethat has become their hallmark, Diane Papalia and Ruth Feldmancontinue to provide a chronological view of child development; the newedition expands the coverage of cultural and historical in uences ondevelopment, highlights the latest research in cognitive neuroscienceand evolutionary theory, and features a new and improved VisualAssets Database for instructors.CONTENTSChapter 1: Studying A Child’s WorldChapter 2: A Child’s World: How We Discover ItChapter 3: Forming a New Life: Conception, Heredity, and EnvironmentChapter 4: Pregnancy and Prenatal DevelopmentChapter 5: Birth and the Newborn BabyChapter 6: Physical Development and Health During the First ThreeYearsChapter 7: Cognitive Development during the First Three YearsChapter 8: Psychosocial Development during the First Three YearsChapter 9: Physical Development and Health in Early ChildhoodChapter 10: Cognitive Development in Early ChildhoodChapter 11: Psychosocial Development in Early ChildhoodChapter 12: Physical Development and Health in Middle ChildhoodChapter 13: Cognitive Development in Middle ChildhoodChapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Middle ChildhoodChapter 15: Physical Development and Health in AdolescenceChapter 16: Cognitive Development in AdolescenceChapter 17: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence23

Developmental PsychologyInternational EditionCHILD DEVELOPMENTCharlotte Patterson, University of VA-Charlottesville2008 / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-234795-1ISBN: 978-0-07-110170-7 [IE]Available: November 2007Bringing the research to life through stories. What promptedVirginia Apgar to develop what became the Apgar Test? Who knewthat Eleanor Gibson’s famous “visual cliff” experiment was inspired byher own toddler’s experience at the Grand Canyon? These stories helpstudents appreciate the relevance of theory, and help them internalizeand learn the often research-intensive material.CONTENTSBeginnings1 Introduction to Child Development2 Heredity, Environment, and Prenatal Development3 Birth and the Newborn InfantInfancy and the Toddler Years4 Physical Development and Health During Infancy and the ToddlerYears5 Cognitive and Language Development During Infancy and theToddler Years6 Social and Emotional Development During Infancy and the ToddlerYearsEarly Childhood7 Physical Development and Health During Early Childhood8 Cognitive Development During Early Childhood9 Social and Emotional Development During Early ChildhoodMiddle Childhood10 Physical Development and Health During Middle Childhood11 Cognitive Development During Middle Childhood12 Social and Emotional Development During Middle ChildhoodAdolescence13 Physical Development and Health During Adolescence14 Cognitive Development During Adolescence15 Social and Emotional Development During AdolescenceINFANCY & CHILDHOODCharlotte J Patterson, University of VA-Charlottesville2008 / Softcover / 592 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-335589-4Available: January 2008http://www.mhhe.com/pattersonic1eInfancy and Childhood, brings the research to life through stories.What prompted researcher Virginia Apgar to develop what becamethe Apgar Test on newborns? Who knew that psychologist EleanorGibson’ famous “visual cliff” experiment was inspired by her owntoddler’s experience of hesitation in approaching the edge of theGrand Canyon? These stories help students appreciate the relevanceof theory, helping them internalize research-intensive material.Through integrating such stories, this text blends scienti c rigor withaccessibility. This text covers child development from infancy throughpre-adolescence.CONTENTSBeginnings1 Introduction to Child Development2 Heredity, Environment, and Prenatal Development3 Birth and the Newborn InfantInfancy and the Toddler Years4 Physical Development and Health During Infancy and the ToddlerYears5 Cognitive and Language Development During Infancy and theToddler Years6 Social and Emotional Development During Infancy and the ToddlerYearsEarly Childhood7 Physical Growth and Health During Early Childhood8 Cognitive Development During Early Childhood9 Social and Emotional Development During Early ChildhoodMiddle Childhood10 Physical Growth and Health in Middle ChildhoodGrowth of the Body11 Cognitive Development During Middle Childhood12 Social and Emotional Development During Middle Childhood24

Developmental PsychologyInternational EditionCHILDREN10th EditionJohn W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2008 / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338260-9ISBN: 978-0-07-128343-4 [IE]Available: November 2007John Santrock’s Children engages students and prepares them tointeract with children in a variety of contexts. John Santrock’s LearningSystem pedagogy provides proven study tools that, together withan accessible presentation and many applications, foster a clearunderstanding of the content. The tenth edition features extensivenew coverage of brain development, a reduced number of chapters,full integration of the latest research in the eld, and a new VisualAssets Database for instructors.CONTENTSPrefaceSection 1 The Nature of Children’s DevelopmentChapter1 IntroductionChapter 2 The Science of Child DevelopmentSection 2 BeginningsChapter 3 Biological BeginningsChapter 4 Prenatal DevelopmentChapter 5 BirthSection 3 InfancyChapter 6 Physical Development in InfancyChapter 7 Cognitive Development in InfancyChapter 8 Socioemotional Development in InfancySection 4 Early ChildhoodChapter 9 Physical Development in Early ChildhoodChapter 10 Cognitive Development in Early ChildhoodChapter 11 Socioemotional Development in Early ChildhoodSection 5 Middle and Late ChildhoodChapter 12 Physical Development in Middle and Late ChildhoodChapter 13 Cognitive Development in Middle and Late ChildhoodChapter 14 Socioemotional Development in Middle and LateChildhoodSection 6 AdolescenceChapter 15 Physical Development in AdolescenceChapter 16 Cognitive Development in AdolescenceChapter 17 Socioemotional Development in AdolescenceChild Development –TopicalNEWInternational EditionCHILD PSYCHOLOGY:A CONTEMPORARY VIEWPOINT7th EditionRoss D Parke and Mary Gauvain of Universityof California-Riverside2009 / Hardcover / 720 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338268-5ISBN: 978-0-07-128328-1 [IE]Available: June 2008http://www.mhhe.com/parke7eThis classic text once again provides a compelling topically-organizedintroduction to child development. Parke et al incorporate multipleperspectives in exploring the processes of child development.With recurring pedagogical features to ensure students see theinterrelatedness of chapters and concepts and the chronologicaldevelopment of children, the authors have also taken care to furthertheir student-friendly presentation by shortening the text in thisedition. This has been accomplished without cutting the book’s highlyregardedchild psychopathology chapter.NEW TO THIS EDITION Diversity fully integrated throughout the book. Content ondiversity issues that was previously included primarily in boxeshas now been incoporated into the main body of the text to furtheremphasize its integral importance. Streamlined content. Redundant content has been removed andthe wording streamlined to reduce the text’s length.CONTENTSChapter 1 Child Development: Themes, Theories, and MethodsChapter 2: Heredity and the EnvironmentChapter 3: Prenatal Development and BirthChapter 4: Infancy: Sensation, Perception, and LearningChapter 5: The Child’s Growth: Brain, Body, Motor Skills, and SexualMaturationChapter 6: Emotional Development and AttachmentChapter 7: Language and CommunicationChapter 8: Cognitive Development: Piaget and VygotskyChapter 9: Cognitive Development: The Information-ProcessingApproachChapter 10: Intelligence and AchievementChapter 11: The FamilyChapter 12: Expanding the Social World: Peers and FriendsChapter 13: Gender Roles and Gender DifferencesChapter 14: Morality, Altruism, and AggressionChapter 15: Developmental Psychopathology25

Developmental PsychologyNEWInternational EditionCHILD DEVELOPMENT: AN INTRODUCTION12th EditionJohn W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2009 / Hardcover / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337063-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128081-5 [IE]Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/santrockcd12eThorough. Accurate. Reliable. Engaging. These are just a few ofthe words used by adopters and reviewers of John Santrock’sChild Development. Child Development is widely considered themost accurate and up-to-date topically-organized text in the eld.Used by hundreds of thousands of students over eleven editions,its learning goals-driven learning system provides a clear roadmapto student understanding of the content. The fully revised twelfthedition reinforces the highly contemporary tone and focus by featuringhundreds of new citations.NEW TO THIS EDITION Culture and Diversity. The Santrock tradition of emphasizingculture and diversity continues in this edition. Coverage of cultureand diversity appears in every chapter where it is relevant and alsoin a separate chapter (Chapter 17). In addition, new Diversity inChildren’s Development interludes are featured in each chapter ofthe 12th edition. Coverage of career opportunities in child development. Careersin Child Development inserts in each chapter profile an individualwhose career relates to the chapter’s content. The Careers Appendixafter chapter 1 describes a number of careers in education/research,clinical/counseling, medical/nursing/physical, and family/relationshipscategories. Numerous web links provide students with opportunitiesto read about these careers in greater depth.CHILD AND ADOLESCENT DEVELOPMENTFOR EDUCATORS3rd EditionJudith Meece, University of NC-Chapel HillDenise H Daniels, California Polytechnic State University2008 / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352576-1Available: May 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meece3eTopically-arranged and teacher-focused, Child and AdolescentDevelopment for Educators is a richly contextual research-basedfoundation in the science of development that is ideal for futureteachers. Attending to the development of school-aged children andyouth, the brevity of the text and the diversity of in-text activities giveteacher educators ample opportunity to assign observations and otherschool-based projects.CONTENTSList of FeaturesPrefaceChapter 1: Studying Child and Adolescent DevelopmentChapter 2: Physical DevelopmentChapter 3: Cognitive Development: Piaget’s and Vygotsky’s TheoriesChapter 4: Cognitive Development: Information Processing andIntelligence TheoriesChapter 5: Language and Literacy DevelopmentChapter 6: Self-Concept, Identity, and MotivationChapter 7: Peer Relations and Moral DevelopmentChapter 8: The Family: Partners in EducationChapter 9: Supporting the Development of Children and Youth inSchoolGlossaryReferencesText CreditsName IndexSubject IndexCONTENTSPrefaceSection One--The Nature of Child DevelopmentChapter 1. IntroductionAppendix. Careers in Child DevelopmentSection Two--Biological Processes, Physical Development, andPerceptual DevelopmentChapter 2. Biological BeginningsChapter 3. Prenatal Development and BirthChapter 4. Physical Development and HealthChapter 5. Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual DevelopmentSection Three--Cognitive and LanguageChapter 6. Cognitive Developmental ApproachesChapter 7. Information ProcessingChapter 8. IntelligenceChapter 9. Language DevelopmentSection Four--Socioemotional DevelopmentChapter 10. Emotional DevelopmentChapter 11. The Self and IdentityChapter 12. GenderChapter 13. Moral DevelopmentSection Five--Social Context of DevelopmentChapter 14. FamiliesChapter 15. PeersChapter 16. Schools and AchievementChapter 17. Culture and Diversity26

Developmental PsychologyInternational EditionCHILD DEVELOPMENT: A TOPICALAPPROACH AND MAKING THE GRADE CDROMDiane E. Papalia, Professional Writer, Sally Wendkos Olds, ProfessionalWriter and Ruth Duskin Feldman, Professional Writer2003ISBN: 978-0-07-282941-9 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-112419-5 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliat1CONTENTSPart I: About Child DevelopmentChapter 1: The Study of Child DevelopmentChapter 2: Theory and ResearchPart II: Foundations of DevelopmentChapter 3: Forming a New Life; Conception, Heredity andEnvironmentChapter 4: Prenatal Development and BirthChapter 5: Physical DevelopmentPart III: Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 6: Language DevelopmentChapter 7: Intelligence and CreativityChapter 8: Theories of Cognitive Development: Piaget and VygotskyChapter 9: Learning, Information Processing, and Academic SkillsPart IV: Psychosocial DevelopmentChapter 10: Emotional DevelopmentChapter 11: The FamilyChapter 12: Self, Gender and Identity DevelopmentChapter 13: Moral DevelopmentChapter 14: Peers, Schooling, and MediaEpilogueChild Development –Readers / CasesUNDERSTANDING CHILDREN: ANINTERVIEW AND OBSERVATION GUIDEFOR EDUCATORS2nd EditionDenise H Daniels, California Polytechnic State UniversityLorrie Beaumont, Northern Illinois UniversityCarol Doolin, Northern Illinos University2008 / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337857-2Available: July 2007This hands-on guide for interviewing and observing children ineducational settings is a supplement for child developmentcourses taken by elementary and middle school education majors.It includes a rationale for interviewing and observing children as away to understand their behavior, learning, and development andmakes connections to the work of major developmental theorists andeducational researchers. It provides practical tips for incorporatingobservations and interviews of children into teachers’ busy schedulesand discusses the analysis of observational data and its uses forguiding educational practices (e.g., instruction, cooperative grouping,and parent conferences). The guide’s organization follows the topicalorganization of most child development textbooks.CONTENTSList of StrategiesPrefaceChapter 1: An Introduction to Understanding ChildrenChapter 2: Interviewer/Observer Roles, Ethical Responsibilities, andTechniquesChapter 3: Physical DevelopmentChapter 4: Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 5: Socioemotional Development and Motivation in theClassroomChapter 6: Integrating Observations and Interviews: Child ProfilesChapter SummaryAppendix A. Sample Parent Information LetterAppendix B. Sample Parent Consent FormAppendix C. Record Forms27

Developmental PsychologyCASES IN CHILD AND ADOLESCENTDEVELOPMENT FOR TEACHERSNancy Defrates-Densch, Northern Illinois University2008 / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352585-3Available: May 2007Containing more than 40 cases, with subjects ranging from preschoolto high school students, Case Studies in Child and AdolescentDevelopment for Teachers brings developmental issues to life. Thereality-based cases address a variety of developmental issues, givingteachers and future teachers the opportunity to think critically aboutthe way development inuences the educational environment and tore ect on their own classroom practice.CONTENTSCases in Child and Adolescent Development for TeachersCase 1: The AccidentCase 2: RecessCase 3: Please Don’t Pick Me!Case 4: I Can’t Go Back to SchoolCase 5: SocksCase 6: Late BloomerCase 7: Body ImageCase 8: PlottingCase 9: Symbolism?Case 10: SongsCase 11: ChantingCase 12: What on Earth?Case 13: ChallengeCase 14: I Can Read!Case 15: Mine!Case 16: TragedyCase 17: DepressedCase 18: Who am I Now?Case 19: PantsCase 20: (Almost) All Grown Up, Now Where Do I Go?Case 21: Dolls and SoldiersCase 22: Hallway HorseplayCase 23: CommunicationCase 24: You’re Gonna Get in TroubleCase 25: I TOLD You...Case 26: Rules and ConsequencesCase 27: Morality or Health?Case 28: Parental InvolvementCase 29: DivorceCase 30: The TargetCase 31: Sit with Us--Or ElseCase 32: RejectionCase 33: The BoyCase 34: What Did I Do?Case 35: Because He Loves MeCase 36: Locker Room BravadoCase 37: I Said “No!Case 38: She Wanted ToCase 39: Around the WorldCase 40: Boys’ SchoolCase 41: The Only OneNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: CHILDGROWTH ANDDEVELOPMENT 09/1016th EditionEllen N Junn, California State University-FullertonChris J Boyatis, Bucknell University2009 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351635-6Available: September 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351635x.mhtmlThis SIXTEENTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: CHILDGROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT provides convenient, inexpensiveaccess to current articles selected from the best of the public press.Organizational features include: an annotated listing of selectedWorld Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide;a general introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topicalindex; and an online instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as apractical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1: Conception to Birth1. New Calculator Factors Chances for Very Premature Infants2. Success at LastUnit 2: Cognition, Language, and LearningPart A. Early Cognition and Physical Development3. Infants’ Differential Processing of Female and Male Faces 4. TheOther-Race Effect Develops during Infancy5. Brain Research and Early Childhood Development6. Culture and Language in the Emergence of AutobiographicalMemory7. Gender Bende8. It’s Fun, but Does It Make You Smarter?9. Language and Children’s Understanding of Mental States 10.Children’s Biased Evaluations of Lucky versus Unlucky People andTheir Social GroupsPart B. Learning in School11. The Secret to Raising Smart Kids12. Parental School Involvement and Children’s AcademicAchievement13. When Should a Kid Start Kindergarten?Unit 3: Social and Emotional DevelopmentPart A. The Child’s Feelings: Emotional Development14. A Neurobiological Perspective on Early Human Deprivation15. Children’s Capacity to Develop ResiliencyPart B. Entry into the Social World: Peers, Play, and Popularity16. Cooperation and Communication in the 2nd Year of Life17. Understanding Popularity in the Peer System18. Children’s Social and Moral Reasoning about Exclusion19. Gender and Group Process20. A “Multitude” of Solitude21. Girls Just Want to Be Mean22. A Profile of Bullying at SchoolUnit 4: Parenting and Family IssuesUnit Overview23. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents24. Evidence of Infants’ Internal Working Models of Attachment25. Physical Discipline and Children’s Adjustment26. Children of Alcoholics27. Siblings’ Direct and Indirect Contributions to Child Development28

Developmental Psychology28. Spanking Children: Evidence and Issues29. Adoption Is a Successful Natural Intervention Enhancing AdoptedChildren’s IQ and School PerformanceUnit 5: Cultural and Societal InfluencesPart A. Social and Cultural Issues30. Goodbye to Girlhood31. The Developmental Costs of High Self-Esteem for AntisocialChildren32. How Many Fathers Are Best for a Child?33. Childhood for Sale34. The Baby DeficitPart B. Special Challenges35. How to Win the Weight Battle36. The Impact of Trafficking on Children37. Childhood’s End38. What Autistic Girls Are Made Of39. Three Reasons Not to Believe in an Autism Epidemic40. Getting Back to the Great Outdoors41. What Causes Specific Language Impairment in Children?TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INCHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY7th EditionDiana S Del Campo, New Mexico State University-Las CrucesRobert L Del Campo, New Mexico State University-Las Cruces2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351513-7Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhchl.com/text-data/catalog/007351 5132.mhtmlFrom McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series (formerly knownas McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this Seventh Edition of TAKING SIDES:CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY presents current controversial issuesin a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest anddevelop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framedwith an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. Aninstructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume.USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellentinstructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating thiseffective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES readerfeatures an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites andis supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 InfancyIssue 1. Is Institutional Child Care Beneficial to Children?Issue 2. Does Maternal Employment Have Negative Effects onChildren’s Development?Issue 3. Should Scientists Be Allowed to Clone Children?Issue 4. Do Federal Laws Make Transracial Adoptions MoreCommonplace?Unit 2 Early ChildhoodIssue 5. Is Spanking Detrimental to Children?Issue 6. Are Fathers Really Necessary?Issue 7. Does Divorce Create Long-Term Negative Effects forChildren?Issue 8. Is Viewing Television Violence Harmful for Children?Unit 3 Middle ChildhoodIssue 9. Does Marriage Improve Living Standards for Children?Issue 10. Are Stepfamilies Inherently Problematic for Children?Issue 11. Is Television Viewing Responsible for the Rise in ChildhoodObesity?Issue 12. Do Bilingual Education Programs Help Non-English-Speaking Children Succeed?Issue 13. Is Gay Adoption and Foster Parenting Healthy forChildren?Issue 14. Should the HPV Vaccination Be Mandatory for Girls inLater Childhood?Unit 4 AdolescenceIssue 15. Should Children Who Are at Risk for Abuse Remain withTheir Families?Issue 16. Is Abstinence-Only Sex Education the Best Way to TeachAbout Sex?Issue 17. Is the Internet a Safe Place for Teens to Explore?Child GuidanceGUIDING YOUR CHILDREN4th EditionEleanor Reynolds2008 / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-288093-9Available: September 2006Drawing on the author’s 25 years in early childhood education,Guiding Young Children: A Problem-Solving Approach introducesfuture childcare providers and preschool teachers to a childcenteredphilosophy of education and care. The problem-solvingapproach encourages “kids to do what kids do” as they learn to takeresponsibility for their words and actions. Through real-life examples,sample dialogues, and numerous photographs and posters, theproblem-solving approach is explained, stressing environment rst,then progressing to listening skills, negotiating, con ict resolution,and setting limits.CONTENTSPreface1. The Program and the Philosophy: An Overview2. Setting Up the Problem-Solving Environment3. Supervising Young Children4. Listening for Feelings5. Negotiation6. Setting Limits7. Affirmations8. Problem Solving for Problem Behavior9. The Problem-Solving Approach to Curriculum10. Working with Parents and Peers29

Developmental PsychologyAdolescence – TextsInternational EditionCHILD AND ADOLESCENT DEVELOPMENTFOR EDUCATORS3rd EditionJudith Meece, University of NC – Chapel HillDenise H Daniels, California Polytechnic State University2008 / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352576-1Available: May 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meeceTopically-arranged and teacher-focused, Child and AdolescentDevelopment for Educators is a richly contextual research-basedfoundation in the science of development that is ideal for futureteachers. Attending to the development of school-aged children andyouth, the brevity of the text and the diversity of in-text activities giveteacher educators ample opportunity to assign observations and otherschool-based projects.CONTENTSChapter 1: Studying Children’s DevelopmentChapter 2: Physical DevelopmentChapter 3: Cognitive Development: Piaget’s and Vygotsky’sTheoriesChapter 4: Cognitive Development: Information Processing andIntelligence TheoriesChapter 5: Language and Literacy DevelopmentChapter 6: Self-Concept, Identity, and MotivationChapter 7: Peer Relations and Moral DevelopmentChapter 8: The Family--Partners in EducationChapter 9: Supporting Child and Adolescent Development inSchoolADOLESCENCE12th EditionJohn W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2008 / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338261-6ISBN: 978-0-07-128342-7 [IE]Available: December 2007More students learn from John Santrock’s Adolescence than fromany other text in this eld. Students and instructors rely on the carefulbalance of accurate, current research and applications to the real livesof adolescents. This new 12th edition features expanded coverageof emerging adulthood, increased coverage of brain development,integrated and expanded coverage of health and wellness, and a newand improved Visual Assets Database for instructors.CONTENTSChapter 1: IntroductionChapter 2 The Science of Adolescent DevelopmentChapter 3 Puberty and Biological FoundationsChapter 4 Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 5 The Self, Identity, Emotions, and PersonalityChapter 6 GenderChapter 7: SexualityChapter 8 Moral Development, Values, and ReligionChapter 9: FamiliesChapter 10: PeersChapter 11: SchoolsChapter 12: Achievement, Work, and CareersChapter 13: CultureChapter 14: Adolescent ProblemsChapter 15: Health, Stress, and Coping30

Developmental PsychologyInternational EditionInternational EditionADOLESCENCE8th EditionLaurence Steinberg, Temple University-Philadelphia2008 / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340548-3ISBN: 978-0-07-110172-1 [IE]Available: June 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/steinberg8Adolescence, 8th edition by Laurence Steinberg has been thoroughlyupdated to reflect current findings in the field of adolescentdevelopment. In this edition, the author continues to utilize the effectivecombination of a friendly writing style, thorough research and acontextual approach that emphasizes adolescence in contemporarysociety. The text’s careful organization ensures maximum teaching exibility that allows the chapters to work together or be coveredin sequence or stand alone. Ethnicity and minority issues arethoroughly discussed in a way that enables students to see how theadolescent experience is shaped by class and culture. The strongpedagogical framework helps students organize and integratematerial. Adolescence, 8th edition, is based on solid research andtheory, yet it has a distinctively “real world” feel that emphasizes thereality of being an adolescent in today’s society.CONTENTSPrefaceIntroduction: The Study of Adolescent DevelopmentPart I: The Fundamental Changes of AdolescenceChapter 1 Biological TransitionsChapter 2 Cognitive TransitionsChapter 3 Social TransitionsPart II: The Contexts of AdolescenceChapter 4 FamiliesChapter 5 Peer GroupsChapter 6 SchoolsChapter 7 Work, Leisure, and Mass MediaPart III: Psychosocial Development During AdolescenceChapter 8 IdentityChapter 9 AutonomyChapter 10 IntimacyChapter 11 SexualityChapter 12 AchievementChapter 13 Psychosocial Problems In AdolescenceGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexADOLESCENCE: CONTINUITY, CHANGE,AND DIVERSITY6th EditionNancy Cobb, California State University--Los Angeles2007 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-319472-1ISBN: 978-0-07-110640-5 [IE]Available: June 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cobb6Nancy Cobb’s Adolescence, recognized as one of the leading textsin the eld, provides an up-to-date and thorough review of currentresearch and theory. Praised for its clear and engaging writing style,this highly acclaimed text is distinguished by its excellent coverageof gender, ethnicity, and identity, and for its treatment of differencesbetween early and late adolescence. Research Focus Boxes in eachchapter provide comprehensive coverage of developmental researchmethods. Additionally, In More Depth boxes on topics of specialinterest to students extend the coverage of each chapter.CONTENTSChapter 1 Defining Adolescents: Who Are They?Chapter 2 Theoretical Foundations of Adolescent DevelopmentChapter 3 The Biological and Physical Changes of AdolescenceChapter 4 The Cognitive and Intellectual Changes of AdolescenceChapter 5 Defining the Self: Identity and IntimacyChapter 6 The Sexual Self: Close Relationships in AdolescenceChapter 7 Adolescents in the Family: Changing Roles andRelationshipsChapter 8 Adolescents and Their FriendsChapter 9 Adolescents in the SchoolsChapter 10 Work, Careers, and College: New Decisions, New Waysof ThinkingChapter 11 Facing the Future: Values in TransitionChapter 12 The Problems of YouthChapter 13 Positive Development in Adolescence: Meeting theChallenges and Making It WorkChapter 14 Studying Adolescence: Research Methods and Issues31

Developmental PsychologyAdolescence –Reader / CasesNEWCASES IN CHILD AND ADOLESCENTDEVELOPMENT FOR TEACHERSNancy Defrates-Densch, Northern Illinois University2008 / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352585-3Available: June 2007Containing more than 40 cases, with subjects ranging from preschoolto high school students, Case Studies in Child and AdolescentDevelopment for Teachers brings developmental issues to life. Thereality-based cases address a variety of developmental issues, givingteachers and future teachers the opportunity to think critically aboutthe way development in uences the educational environment and tore ect on their own classroom practice.CONTENTSCases in Child and Adolescent Development for TeachersCase 1: The AccidentCase 2: RecessCase 3: Please Don’t Pick Me!Case 4: I Can’t Go Back to SchoolCase 5: SocksCase 6: Late BloomerCase 7: Body ImageCase 8: PlottingCase 9: Symbolism?Case 10: SongsCase 11: ChantingCase 12: What on Earth?Case 13: ChallengeCase 14: I Can Read!Case 15: Mine!Case 16: TragedyCase 17: DepressedCase 18: Who am I Now?Case 19: PantsCase 20: (Almost) All Grown Up, Now Where Do I Go?Case 21: Dolls and SoldiersCase 22: Hallway HorseplayCase 23: CommunicationCase 24: You’re Gonna Get in TroubleCase 25: I TOLD You...Case 26: Rules and ConsequencesCase 27: Morality or Health?Case 28: Parental InvolvementCase 29: DivorceCase 30: The TargetCase 31: Sit with Us--Or ElseCase 32: RejectionCase 33: The BoyCase 34: What Did I Do?Case 35: Because He Loves MeCase 36: Locker Room BravadoCase 37: I Said “No!Case 38: She Wanted ToCase 39: Around the WorldCase 40: Boys’ SchoolCase 41: The Only OneTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN ADOLESCENCE2nd EditionBJ Rue and Maureen Drysdale of St. Jerome’sUniversity/University of Waterloo2009 / Softcover / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351536-6Available: October 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515361.mhtmlThis Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: ADOLESCENCE presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designed tostimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Eachissue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issueintroduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES INTHE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach inthe classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotatedlisting of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a bookwebsite. Visit www.mhcls.com.CONTENTSPart 1 Adolescent HealthIssue 1. Should Adolescents Be Taking Selective Serotonin ReuptakeInhibitors (SSRIs) for Depression?Issue 2. Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Drink Alcohol?Issue 3. Should Parental Consent Be Required for AdolescentsSeeking Abortions?Issue 4. Do Boys Worry About an Ideal Body Image as Much asGirls Do?Issue 5. Should the Human Papillomavirus (HPV) Vaccine beMandatory for Early Adolescent Girls?Issue 6.Is the Use of Nicotine Replacement Therapy (NRT)an Appropriate Cessation Aid for Adolescents Wishing to QuitSmoking?Part 2 Sex and SexualityIssue 7. Does Engaging in Early Sexual Activity Cause DepressiveSymptoms in Adolescents?Issue 8. Is There Cause for Concern About an “Oral Sex Crisis” forTeens?Issue 9. Is Comprehensive Sex Education for Adolescents Too Liberal?Issue 10. Does a Traditional or “Strong” Double Standard with Respectto Sexual Behavior Exist Among Adolescents?Issue 11. Is Female Sexual Orientation More Fluid than Male SexualOrientation During Adolescence?Part 3 RelationshipsIssue 12. Does Divorce or Disruption in Family Structure DuringAdolescence Have a Detrimental Effect on Development?Issue 13. Does Dating Impede Developmental Adjustment forAdolescents?Issue 14. Do Online Friendships Hinder Adolescent Well-Being?Part 4 Problem BehaviorsIssue 15. Should Adolescents Who Commit Serious Offenses BeTried and Convicted as Adults?Issue 16. Are Girls Bigger Bullies Than Boys?Part 5 MediaIssue 17. Does Sex on TV Negatively Impact Adolescent Sexuality?Issue 18. Do Video Games Impede Adolescent CognitiveDevelopment?Issue 19. Are Social Networking Sites (SNSs), such as Facebook, aCause for Concern Among Adolescents?32

Developmental PsychologyANNUAL EDITIONS: ADOLESCENTPSYCHOLOGY6th EditionFred Stickle, Western Kentucky University2008 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339758-0Available: September 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 58X.mhtmlThis Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: ADOLESCENTPSYCHOLOGY provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906 is offered as apractical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Perspective on AdolescenceNew! 1. A Peaceful AdolescenceNew! 2. Youth Participation3. The Future of AdolescenceNew! 4. Youth Engaged for ActionUnit 2. Puberty, Physical Development, and Health5. Why Do Kids Eat Healthful Food?New! 6. Prescription for DisasterNew! 7. Youth Smoking Prevention: What Works?Unit 3. Cognitive Development and EducationNew! 8. Documenting Learning with Digital PortfoliosNew! 9. Help Us Make the 9th Grade TransitionNew! 10. Stories from Tween ClassroomsNew! 11. My Year as a High School StudentNew! 12. The Dropout Problem: Losing GroundNew! 13. Let Seniors Lead14. Studies Reveal Strengths, Weaknesses15. The New Cheating EpidemicNew! 16. Leading Adolescents to Mastery17. Healthier StudentsUnit 4. Identify Social-Emotional Development18. Fostering Social-Emotional Learning in the Classroom19. The Consequences of Insufficient Sleep for Adolescents20. Body Image: How Do You See Yourself?New! 21. Adolescent Stress,New! 22. ADHD and the SUD in AdolescentsNew! 23. Coping with Stress24. A Mother’s StoryUnit 5. Family RelationshipsNew! 25. Traumatic Stress in Adolescents Anticipating ParentalDeathNew! 26. Parental Illness and Adolescent Development27. A Nation of Wimps28. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent BehaviorNew! 29. Impact of Family Recovery on Pre-Teens andAdolescentsNew! 30. After IncarcerationNew! 31. When a Parent Starts Dating Again32. Learning to ChillUnit 6. Peers and Contemporary Culture33. Risky Business: Exploring Adolescent Risk-Taking Behavior34. The Overdominance of ComputersNew! 35. Teaching Kids to Kil36. Alcohol Use Among Adolescents37. Terrorism, the Media, and Distress in YouthUnit 7. Teenage Sexuality38. The Sexual Revolution Hits Junior High39. The Cuddle Puddle of Stuyvesant High School40. Give Students the Knowledge to Make Wise Choices AboutSex41. The Perils of Playing House,Nancy WartikUnit 8. Problems Behaviors and InterventionNew! 42. School Bullying: Who, Why, and What to Do43. Bullying at School Among Older Adolescents44. Prevention of Domestic Violence during Adolescence45. Adolescents Who Self-InjureAdulthood and AgingNEWInternational Edition2009 / Hardcover / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312854-2ISBN: 978-0-07-110673-3 [IE]Available: July 2008Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hoyer6ADULT DEVELOPMENT ANDAGING6th EditionWilliam J. Hoyer, Syracuse University andPaul A. Roodin, State University of NY-OswegoAdult Development and Aging offers professors and students aclear, comprehensive and current account of the salient issues andconcerns that dominate the eld of adult development. Hoyer andRoodin employ an interdisciplinary, process oriented perspective toshow students the past, present, and future of our understandingand research in adult development. In this thoroughly-revised newedition, Hoyer and Roodin continue to provide cutting edge materialin an accessible manner for undergraduates. With a new theme ofdevelopmental bioculturalism running throughout, the authors alsopresent the most balanced and comprehensive coverage of biological,health, cognitive, and social areas.NEW TO THIS EDITION Strengthened emphasis on cultural, international, and contextual/cohort matters, and racial/ethnic sensitivity. Cultural/diversity themesare infused throughout the text, and the full chapter on the topic hasbeen entirely re-written for this edition. New theme of developmental bio-culturalism. Development andaging are described as being co-determined by the interplay betweenbio-genetic and cultural/environmental influences. Thorough revision includes increased and redesigned visualmaterial.CONTENTS1 Adult Development And Aging: An Introduction2 Cultural And Ethnic Diversity3 Physiological And Sensory Processes4 Coping And Adaptation5 Mental Health Interventions6 Physical Health And Aging7 Memory, Attention, And Learning8 Intelligence And Creativity9 Cognition, Wisdom, And Expertise10 Personality33

Developmental Psychology11 Relationships12 Work, Leisure, And Retirement13 Approaching DeathAppendix Developmental Research MethodsAdulthood and Aging –ReadersInternational EditionNEWADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING3rd EditionDiane Papalia and Harvey Sterns of University of Akron and RuthFeldman and Cameron Camp of Myers Research Institute2007 / Hardcover / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-293788-6ISBN: 978-0-07-111287-1 [IE]Available: June 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaad3This text delivers the most current research ndings in the eldclearly and concisely, using a topical organization, in a writing stylethat students and instructors have praised. This edition providesa balanced, positive perspective on adult development and aging,enhanced by strong multicultural and diversity coverage.CONTENTSPart I: Exploring the World of Adulthood1 Adult Development and Aging in a Changing World2 Metatheoretical Perspectives and Research MethodsPart II: The Worlds of Body and Mind3 Longevity and Physiological Aging4 Health and Body Systems5 Memory6 Intelligence and Creativity7 Mature Thought, Wisdom and Moral IntelligencePart III: The Social World8 Education, Work, Leisure, And Retirement9 Intimate Relationships and Lifestyles10 Mature Kinship Ties and Living ArrangementsPart IV: The World Within11 Personality Development12 Mental Health, Coping and Adjustment to Aging13 Dealing with Death and BereavementANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 09/1022nd EditionHarold Cox, Indiana State University-Terre Haute2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812773-1Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127734.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.[Details unavailable at press time]NEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEALTH, ANDBEREAVEMENT 09/1011th EditionGeorge E Dickinson, College of CharlestonMichael R Leming, Saint Olaf College2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812767-0Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtml34Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.

Developmental PsychologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING08/0921st EditionHarold Cox, Indiana State University—Terre Haute2009 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339760-3Available: March 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 601.mhtmlfThis Twenty-First Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING providesconvenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected from thebest of the public press. Organizational features include: an annotatedlisting of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table ofcontents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM,ISBN 0073301906, is offered as a practical guide for instructors.ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website,www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Aging_0809_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches units in Annual Editions: Aging08/09 with corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Aging textbooks by Quadagno.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Phenomenon of Aging1. Elderly Americans2. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population3. Living Longer4. Puzzle of the Century5. Will You Live to Be 100? (as seen in Modern Maturity, Nov/Dec1999)New! 6. Can We Slow Aging?Unit 2. The Quality of Later LifeNew! 7. Stop Smoking and Benefits Come QuicklyNew! 8. Lifetime Achievements9. Women’s Sexuality As They Age10. We Can Control How We AgeUnit 3. Societal Attitudes Toward Old Age11. Society Fears the Aging ProcessNew! 12. A Healthy Mind, a Longer Life13. Single Women14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its Threatto Business VitalityUnit 4. Problems and Potentials of Aging15. Primary Care for Elderly PeopleNew! 16. Trust and Betrayal in the Golden Years17. The Disappearing Mind18. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of Older Womenand Their Relationship With Health OutcomesUnit 5. Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma?19. How to Survive the First YearNew! 20. Color Me Confident21. Old. Smart. Productive22. The Broken Promise23. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of OlderAmericansUnit 6. The Experience of DyingNew! 24. To Live, or Not to Live25. The Grieving Process26. Start the Conversation27. Mind Frames Towards Dying and Factors Motivating TheirAdoption by Terminally Ill EldersUnit 7. Living Environment in Later Life28. (Not) the Same Old StoryNew! 29. Finding a Good HomeNew! 30. The Salience of Social Relationships for Resident Well-Being in Assisted Living31. Declaration of IndependentsUnit 8. Social Policies, Programs, and Services for OlderAmericansNew! 32. The Corporate Beneficiaries of the Medicare Drug Benefit33. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years ofReform34. Universalism Without the Targeting: Privatizing the Old-AgeWelfare State35. Coverage For All36. Riding Into the SunsetNew! 37. Paying for It38. As Good As It GetsNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING,DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT 08/0910th EditionGeorge E Dickinson, College of CharlestonMichael R Leming, Saint Olaf College2009 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339771-9Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 717.mhtmlThis Tenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906, is offered as apractical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Issues in Dying and Death1. Finding Better Ways to DieNew! 2. Organ Transplantation in a Globalised WorldNew! 3. Into the OblivionNew! 4. Moving Toward Peace,5. Technology and Death PolicyNew! 6. A Survey of End-of-Life Care in Care HomesNew! 7. How Much Is More Life Worth?,8. The Unsettled Question of Brain Death9. Studying the Black Death35

Developmental PsychologyUnit 2. Dying and Death Across the Life CycleNew! 10. Editorial: On Behalf of ChildrenNew! 11. Knowledge of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome PreventionStrategies in a Multicultural, Disadvantaged CommunityNew! 12. And Then the Dog DiedNew! 13. To Live with No RegretsNew! 14. “Cast Me Not Off in Old Age”15. Trends in Causes of Death Among the ElderlyUnit 3. The Dying Process16. Palliative Care17. Placing Religion and Spirituality in End-of-Life Care18. Spirituality and Religion in the “Art of Dying”,New! 19. Death in the Nursing HomeNew! 20. Dying on the StreetsNew! 21. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns Toward Dying in PrisonUnit 4. Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide22. Death and the Law23. Doctor, I Want to Die. Will You Help Me?24. Competent Care for the Dying Instead of Physician-Assisted Suicide25. Colleen’s Choice26. Ethics and Life’s Ending27. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame28. Life Everlasting29. Who Will Speak for You When You Can’t?30. The Contemporary American Funeral31. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects32. The Arlington Ladies33. Face to Face With Death34. Six Feet Under35. The Grieving Process36. Disenfranchised Grief37. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief38. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning39. Those Left Behind40. Till Death Do Us Part41. Counseling With Children in Contemporary Society42. Discussing Tragedy With Your Child43. Life Is Like the SeasonsDevelopmentalPsychopathologyInternational EditionCHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGYJeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University—Ithaca2008 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340550-6ISBN: 978-0-07-126354-2 [IE]Available: October 2007All students who will one day work with children or their families cangain a basic foundation for understanding child psychopathologyfrom this text. Students who seek careers in the mental health,physical health, or social work elds will nd extensive informationon childhood disorders, their prevention, and their treatment. All willgain an appreciation for the many facets of this growing eld, and ofthe need to base interventions on research and on a humane attitudetoward each child and family.CONTENTSChapter 1 IntroductionChapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical IssuesChapter 3 Basic Psychological TheoriesChapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral GeneticsChapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment DisordersChapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant DisorderChapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity DisorderChapter 8 Bipolar DisorderChapter 9 Depressive DisordersChapter 10 Anxiety DisordersChapter 11 Mental RetardationChapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental DisordersChapter 13 Childhood-onset SchizophreniaChapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and OtherTrauma36

Developmental PsychologyInternational EditionDEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOPATHOLOGY5th EditionCharles Wenar, Ohio State University and Patricia Kerig, James MadisonUniversity2006 / Hardcover / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-282019-5ISBN: 978-0-07-121520-6 [IE]CONTENTS1: The Developmental Psychopathology Approach2: Normal Development3: The Bridge to the Psychopathologies4: Infancy: The Developmental Consequences of Mental Retardation5: Infancy: Disorders in the Autistic Spectrum6: Infancy through Preschool Attachment Disorders, OppositionalDefiant Disorder, and Enuresis7: The Preschool Period: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder andLearning Disabilities8: Middle Childhood: The Anxiety Disorders9: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Mood Disorders and Suicide10: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Conduct Disorder and theDevelopment of Antisocial Behavior11: Severe Deviation in Late Childhood and Adolescence:Schizophrenia12: Psychopathologies of the Adolescent Transmission: EatingDisorders and Substance Abuse13: The Developmental Consequences of Brain Injury and ChronicIllness14: Risks in the Family Context: Child Maltreatment and DomesticViolence15: Late Adolescence to Early Adulthood: Emergent PersonalityDisorders16: Psychological Assessment17: Intervention and PreventionGender RoleDevelopmentSEX & GENDER6th EditionHilary M Lips, Radford University2008 / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340553-7Available: July 2007This is a comprehensive introduction to sex and gender theories,research, and issues, focusing on social psychological and feministperspectives. The book examines the similarities and differencesbetween women and men, discusses where that knowledge comesfrom, and explains how that knowledge may itself be shaped andlimited by cultural perceptions. This new edition has been thoroughlyrevised with up-to-date research citations for all chapters and morecurrent examples.CONTENTSPart I: Myths, Theories, and ResearchChapter 1 Masculinity and Femininity: Myths and StereotypesChapter 2 Theoretical Perspectives on Sex and GenderChapter 3 Researching Sex and Gender: Exploring the Whys andHowsPart II: Behavior & Experience: Female—Male Similiarities andDifferencesChapter 4 Worlds Apart? Gender Differences in Social Behavior andExperienceChapter 5 Biology and Environment: The Process of BecomingFemale or MaleChapter 6 Perceptual and Cognitive Abilities: Gender Similaritiesand DifferencesChapter 7 Sexual Lives and OrientationsChapter 8 Hormonal and Reproductive ConnectionsChapter 9 Mental and Physical Health: Stress, Change, andAdaptationsPart III: Sex And Gender In Social RelationshipsChapter 10 Sex and Gender and Childhood: Constructing GenderChapter 11 Family and Friends: Attachment, Intimacy, and PowerChapter 12 Economic and Political Life: Power, Status, andAchievementChapter 13 Issues in the WorkplaceChapter 14 Justice, Equity, and Social ChangeEpilogueThe Ties That Bind: The Future of Sex and GenderGlossaryReferencesAuthor Index I–1 Subject Index I–15 Credits C–137

Developmental PsychologyNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN GENDER4th EditionJacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro2009 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351529-8Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtmlIssue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being?Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society?Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of WorkIssue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) ImproveWomen’s Lives?Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in theWorkplace?Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due toSocietal Obstacles?Unit 6 Gender And Sexuality: Double Standards?Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong?Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messageto Teens?Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional GenderConstraints?This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students tocontroversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent thearguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators,reect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their livelinessand substance and because of their value in a debate framework.Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally andpolitically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKINGSIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts,presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and publicdiscourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills byanalyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments.The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what isgender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover thatwhat might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is somuch more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only)accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have beenprovided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teachingsuggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teachinghints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion aroundthe themes raised by the clashing essays.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Gender_4e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Gender, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Hyde/DeLamater and Lips.CONTENTSUnit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving TargetIssue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny?Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate?Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and SciencesHave a Biological Basis?Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of DifferenceIssue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different?Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and MenInnately Determined?Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responsesto Stress Gender-Based?Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and MenIssue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender?Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levelsof Violence Against Intimate Partners?Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender inChildhoodIssue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry?Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parentsfor Children?38

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHEDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGYChild, Family & Society – Readers .....................................................................47Death and Dying .................................................................................................48Educational Psychology .....................................................................................41Educational Psychology – Readers ....................................................................44Infants & Toddlers ...............................................................................................4739

NEW TITLESEDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PageAnnual Editions: Educational Psychology 09/10, 24e Cauley 978-0-07-351640-0 44Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e Dickinson 978-0-07-812767-0 482009EdPsych: Modules Bohlin 978-0-07-337850-3 41Annual Editions: Educational Psychology, 23e Cauley 978-0-07-339769-6 45The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, 8e DeSpelder 978-0-07-340546-9 48Educational Psychology, 4e Santrock 978-0-07-337858-9 4140

Educational PsychologyEducational PsychologyNEWCluster 8: Classroom AssessmentModule 26: Assessing Student LearningModule 27: Test Construction and UseModule 28: Performance AssessmentCluster 9: Standardized TestingModule 29: Standardized Tests and ScoresModule 30: Issues in Standardized Testing2009 / Softcover / 688 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337850-3Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/bohlin1eEdPSYCH: MODULESLisa Bohlin, Purdue University-West LafayetteCheryl Cisero Durwin, Southern Conn StateUniversityMarla Reese-Weber, Illinois State UniversityEd Psych Modules… For ALL your students. Ed Psych Modulesspeaks to all students regardless of their intended age stagespecialization. With four case studies – early childhood, elementary,middle school, and secondary -- for each cluster of modules, yourstudents effectively connect theory and practice using these realisticcases. Written to be used in any order, these modules and clustersgive you maximum exibility in organizing your course. The authorshave also limited the use of boxes and other sidebars in orderto ensure students identify and understand the core concepts ofeducational psychology.CONTENTSModule 1: Today’s Diverse ClassroomsCluster 1: Personal DevelopmentModule 2: Contexts of DevelopmentModule 3: Social DevelopmentModule 4: Emotional DevelopmentCluster 2: The Developing LearnerModule 6: The Brain and DevelopmentModule 7: Cognitive DevelopmentModule 8: Language DevelopmentCluster 3: Learning TheoriesModule 9: Traditional Behavioral TheoriesModule 10: Social Cognitive TheoryModule 11: Information ProcessingCluster 4: Cognitive ProcessesModule 12: MetacognitionModule 13: Transfer of Skills and KnowledgeModule 14: Critical Thinking and Problem SolvingCluster 5: MotivationModule 15: Behavioral TheoryModule 16: Cognitive TheoriesModule 17: Self TheoriesCluster 6: Classroom Management And InstructionModule 18: Creating a Productive Learning EnvironmentModule 19: Understanding and Managing Student BehaviorModule 20: Planning for InstructionModule 21: Grouping PracticesCluster 7: Learner DifferencesModule 22: IntelligenceModule 23: Giftedness and CreativityModule 24: Cognitive DisabilitiesModule 25: Emotional, Social and Behavioral DisabilitiesNEWInternational EditionEDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY4th EditionJohn W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas2009 / Softcover / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337858-9ISBN: 978-0-07-128082-2 [IE]Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/santedu4eJohn Santrock’s Educational Psychology is a well-crafted text thatemphasizes the application of theory to classroom practice. With richlyevocative classroom vignettes provided by practicing teachers, aswell as the most case studies - three per chapter - of any Introductorytext, Santrock’s Educational Psychology helps students think criticallyabout the research basis for best practices. Additionally, Santrock’shallmark Learning System organizes the content into manageablechunks to support retention and mastery, and makes it much morelikely that students will have an engaging and successful courseexperience.CONTENTSPrefaceChapter 1 Educational Psychology: A Tool for Effective TeachingChapter 2 Cognitive and Language DevelopmentChapter 3 Social Contexts and Socioemotional DevelopmentChapter 4 Individual VarationsChapter 5 Sociocultural DiversityChapter 6 Learners Who Are ExceptionalChapter 7 Behavioral and Social Cognitive ApproachesChapter 8 The Information-Processing ApproachChapter 9 Complex Cognitive ProcessesChapter 10 Social Constructivist ApproachesChapter 11 Learning and Cognition in the Content AreasChapter 12 Planning, Instruction, and TechnologyChapter 13 Motivation, Teaching, and LearningChapter 14 Managing the ClassroomChapter 15 Standardized Tests and TeachingChapter 16 Classroom Assessment and Grading41

Educational PsychologyENHANCING COGNITIVE FUNTIONSAPPLICATIONS ACROSS CONTEXTSOon-Seng Tan and Alice Seok-Hoon Seng2005 (May 2005) / 320 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-124765-8[An Asian Publication]Cognitive functioning is a new and important advancement in cognitivepsychology and cognitive science. Cognitive functions are a centralfocus in the dynamic and mediational approach to assessment andintervention. An understanding of cognitive functions is the key to thedesign of effective cognitive intervention and enrichment programs.This book focuses on the mind of the learner, particularly on the natureand characteristics of cognitive functioning. It covers innovative andeffective approaches to the enhancement of learning potential andcognitive functioning of children and adolescents. The approachesare grounded in theories pertaining to cognitive functions, cognitivemodi ability, and dynamic assessment. Written in clear language, thebook illustrates the nature of cognitive functioning and the applicationof certain cognitive programs and interventions across contexts.The nature of cognitive functioning today is of interest not only tocognitive psychologists but also to those working in the multipledisciplines of neuroscience, cognitive systems, and human factorsdesign. Cognitive enrichment programs and assessment scales suchas LPAD-B, FIE-B, ACFS, MindLadder, Building Blocks of Learning,and MIDAS and their applications in different environments arehighlighted in the book and examples of good practice and a varietyof mediational and dynamic assessment tools discussed. Educationalpractitioners working closely with children, counselors, parents, andcaregivers will nd the book a valuable reference.CONTENTS1. Toward a Theory of Enhancing Cognitive Functions2. An Integrative Approach to Knowledge Construction Functions(KCF)3. Improving Cognitive Functions for Secondary School Students4. The Application of Cognitive Functions Scale: A DynamicAssessment Procedure for Young Children5. The Feuerstein Programs for Early Assessment and Intervention:The LPAD-B and the FIE-B6. Early Detection: Blessing or Curse7. Mediation and Assessment of a Young and Low-functioning Child:An Initial Session8. Building Blocks of Learning: Dynamic Assessment and CognitiveMediation with Children9. Cognitive Interventions for Memory Deficits10. Enhancing Cognitive Functions via a Multiple IntelligencesAssessment11. Sensory and Cognitive Development in AdulthoodTO EMPOWER, BE EMPOWEREDYeap Lay Leng, Myint Swe Khine, Lim Lee Hean andLow Guat Tin2005 (May 2005) / 264 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-124649-1[An Asian Publication]“To empower, be empowered” are processes that enable individualsto take on greater responsibility and authority in decision making.The individuals’ potential to make decisions can be maximized withinan environment that nurtures them through education, training,professional development, commitment, facilitation, resources,mutual trust and emotional support. In the educational context, “Toempower, be empowered” is to provide a “self-surpassing classroom”,that is, a classroom environment with “self-surpassing teachers” whoengage their students in purposeful activities and direct them to beresponsible for their own learning. To Empower, Be Empowered issuitable and applicable for all those who are in people management.The 14 chapters in the book are interrelated topics, written from thedifferent perspectives of empowerment.CONTENTSAbout the AuthorsIntroduction: Stepping Up EmpowermentChapter 1: Empowering the LearnerChapter 2: Understanding Learning Styles to Empower LearningChapter 3: Learning Styles and Educational IssuesChapter 4: Empowerment through Cognitive Profi lingChapter 5: Cognitive Matching to Empower LearningChapter 6: Implications of Learning Styles in Empowering LearningChapter 7: Empowering Learning with Cognitive OrganizersChapter 8: Empowering through Motivation: The TheoryChapter 9: Empowering through Motivation: The PracticeChapter 10: Empowering through MentoringChapter 11: Empowering through CoachingChapter 12: Reframe to Empower LearningChapter 13: Empowering the Teacher: First, Learn More ThyselfChapter 14: Initiatives to Empowerment in a ‘Learning Nation’ReferencesIndex42

Educational PsychologyTHINKING ABOUT THINKING WHATEDUCATORS NEED TO KNOWJessie Ee, Agnes Chang and Oon-Seng Tan2004 / 352 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-123507-5[An Asian Publication]The new millennium calls for a breakthrough in the way we learn andthink. How can we enhance the exibility of the mind so that the spirit ofinnovation and enterprise can ourish and ow in those we nurture andteach? What do we know about the important roles played by attitudes,dispositions, intellectual habits, and motivation in the developmentof thinking? This book captures the latest research and applicationsin these elds with contributions by some of the most renownedresearchers and practitioners intimately involved in research andpedagogy in self-regulated learning and metacognition.CONTENTSPart 1: Theory and Research, and their ImplicationsChapter 1: Pursuing Academic Self regulation: A 20-year MethodologicalQuestChapter 2: Teaching to Facilitate Self regulated LearningChapter 3: Principles of Self-regulated Learning for TeachersChapter 4: Thinking for Yourself and Thinking Together: TheCommunity of Inquiry as a Pedagogy for Self regulated LearningChapter 5: Metacognitive Theory and Classroom PracticesChapter 6: Teachers’ Understanding and Practice of Strategy-basedInstruction and Classroom Goal Orientations for Students’ Selfregulation:Findings across CulturesChapter 7: Motivation, Strategies, and Achievement: A Comparisonof Teachers and Students in High, Average, and Low AchievingClassesPart 2: Practice and ApplicationsChapter 8: Reflective Practice and Self regulation: Walking the Talkthrough Problem-based Learning in Teacher EducationChapter 9: Choosing the Right Teacher: When Self-regulation CanHinder LearningChapter 10: Talk Your Walk: Issues in Instruction of Self-regulatorySecond Language ReadingChapter 11: Self-regulated Learning in ScienceChapter 12: Fostering Students’ Self regulation Skills in MathematicalProblem-solvingChapter 13: Helping Students to Become Strategic Learners: TheRoles of Assessment, Teachers, Instruction, and StudentsChapter 14: Self-regulation for Adolescents with Attention DeficitHyperactivity DisorderCOUNSELLING IN SCHOOLSTHEORIES, PROCESSES AND TECHNIQUESEsther Tan2004 (December 2004) / 280 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-123366-8[An Asian Publication]This book is intended to be a comprehensive guide and usefulresource for teachers, counsellors, parents and educators whobelieve in a holistic education for the young. The nurturing of theemotional, psychological, moral, physical, artistic and spiritual wellbeingof the young is just as important as challenging their mindsand maximizing their intellectual potentials. The scope of the book iscomprehensive and encompassing, covering a wide range of topics,including developmental group guidance, career guidance andcareer counselling, group dynamics and group counselling, individualcounselling, and intervention strategies in working with children,youth and parents. There are also opportunities to learn about thedevelopment and management of guidance and counselling servicesin schools and how to conduct school-based research in guidanceand counselling to enhance practice.CONTENTSForewordPrefaceChapter 1: Developmental Group Guidance in the ClassroomChapter 2: Working with ChildrenChapter 3: Working with YouthChapter 4: Working with ParentsChapter 5: Career Guidance and Career Counselling in SchoolsChapter 6: Group CounsellingChapter 7: Multidimensional Metatheoretical Counselling ModelChapter 8: An Ecological Multimodal Approach to CounsellingChapter 9: Managing Guidance and Counselling in SchoolsChapter 10: Research in Guidance and CounsellingAbout the ContributorsIndex43

Educational PsychologyEducational Psychology –ReadersNEWUNDERSTANDING CHILDREN: ANINTERVIEW AND OBSERVATION GUIDEFOR EDUCATORS2ND EDITIONDenise H Daniels, California Polytechnic State UniversityLorrie Beaumont, Northern Illinois UniversityCarol Doolin, Northern Illinos University2008 / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337857-2Available: July 2007This hands-on guide for interviewing and observing children ineducational settings is a supplement for child developmentcourses taken by elementary and middle school education majors.It includes a rationale for interviewing and observing children as away to understand their behavior, learning, and development andmakes connections to the work of major developmental theorists andeducational researchers. It provides practical tips for incorporatingobservations and interviews of children into teachers’ busy schedulesand discusses the analysis of observational data and its uses forguiding educational practices (e.g., instruction, cooperative grouping,and parent conferences). The guide’s organization follows the topicalorganization of most child development textbooks.CONTENTSList of StrategiesPrefaceChapter 1: An Introduction to Understanding ChildrenChapter 2: Interviewer/Observer Roles, Ethical Responsibilities, andTechniquesChapter 3: Physical DevelopmentChapter 4: Cognitive DevelopmentChapter 5: Socioemotional Development and Motivation in theClassroomChapter 6: Integrating Observations and Interviews: Child ProfilesChapter SummaryAppendix A. Sample Parent Information LetterAppendix B. Sample Parent Consent FormAppendix C. Record FormsANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONALPSYCHOLOGY 09/1024th EditionKathleen M Cauley and Gina Pannozzo of Virginia CommonwealthUniversity2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351640-0Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516406.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.44

Educational PsychologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS:EDUCATIONALPSYCHOLOGY23rd EditionKathleen M Cauley and Gina Pannozzo ofVirginia Commonwealth University2009 / Softcover / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339769-6Available: February 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397695.mhtmlANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 08/09, 23/eprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_EducationalPsychology_%2023e_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches units in Annual Editions:Educational Psychology, 23/e with corresponding chapters in oneof our best-selling McGraw-Hill Educational Psychology textbooksby Santrock.New! 21. Critical Thinking22. Constructing Learning: Using Technology to Support Teachingfor Understanding23. Creating a Culture for LearningPart B. Instructional StrategiesNew! 24. Teaching for Deep Learning25. The Changing Classroom: Challenges for Teachers26. Improve Your Verbal Questioning27. Designing Learning Through Learning to DesignNew! 28. Using Engagement Strategies to Facilitate Children’sLearning and SuccessUnit 5. Motivation and Classroom ManagementPart A. Motivation29. Convincing Students They Can Learn to Read30. Why We Can’t Always Get What We WantNew! 31. How to Produce a High-Achieving Child32. “If Only They Would Do Their Homework,”Part B. Classroom ManagementNew! 33. The Perils and Promises of Praise34. When Children Make RulesNew! 35. Strategies for Effective Classroom Management in theSecondary SettingNew! 36. “No! I Won’t!,”37. Bullying: Effective Strategies for Its PreventionUnit 6. AssessmentNew! 38. IOSIE: A Method for Analyzing Student BehavioralProblemsNew! 39. MismatchNew! 40. Assessment Through the Student’s Eyes41. Grades as Valid Measures of Academic Achievement of ClassroomLearning42. Seven Practices for Effective Learning43. Meeting the Challenge of High-Stakes Testing While RemainingChild-CenteredCONTENTSUnit 1. Perspectives on Teaching1. A Learner’s Bill of RightsNew! 2. Letters to a Young Teacher3. Memories from the ‘Other,’New! 4. The Skill Set5. A National Tragedy: Helping Children CopeUnit 2. DevelopmentPart A. Childhood6. Mind and Body7. Understanding FamiliesNew! 8. The Curriculum SuperhighwayPart B. Adolescence9. The Role of the Generations in Identity FormationNew! 10. Risk Taking in AdolescenceUnit 3. Individual Differences Among LeadersPart A. Exceptional Learning Needs11. Extending Inclusive Opportunities12. Thinking Positively13. Technology to Help Struggling StudentsPart B. Gifted and Talented14. Recognizing Gifted Students15. Raising Expectations for the GiftedPart C. Cultural Diversity16. Challenging Deficit Thinking17. The Culturally Responsive Teacher18. Boys and Girls Together19. Learning and GenderUnit 4. Learning and InstructionPart A. Learning and Cognition20. Differentiating for Tweens45

Educational PsychologyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INEDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY5th EditionLeonard Abbeduto, University of Wisconsin MadisonFrank Symons, University of Minnesota2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351521-2Available: September 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 213.mhtmlThis Fifth Edition of TAKING SIDES: EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGYpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our studentwebsite, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 Meeting the Diverse Needs of a Diverse ClassroomIssue 1. Are Single-Gender Classes Necessary to Ensure EqualEducational Opportunities for Boys and Girls?Issue 2. Should Struggling Students Be Retained?Issue 3. Should English Immersion Replace Bilingual Education?Issue 4. Is Full Inclusion Always the Best Option for Students withDisabilities?Issue 5. Can Schools Close the Achievement Gap Between Studentsfrom DifferentIssue 6. Should Schools Try to Increase Students’ Self-Esteem?Issue 7. Should Moral Education Be Part of the School Curriculum?Unit 2 Theories of Learning and Their Implications for EducationalPracticeIssue 8. Should Schools Adopt a Constructivist Approach toEducation?Issue 9. Does Reinforcement Facilitate Learning?Issue 10. Can Howard Gardner’s Theory of Multiple IntelligencesTransform Educational Practice?Issue 11. Will a Push for Standards and Accountability Lead to MoreMotivated Students?Issue 12. Do Recent Discoveries About the Brain and Its DevelopmentHave Implications for Classroom Practice?Unit 3 Effective Teaching and the Evaluation of LearningIssue 13. Is the Whole Language Approach to Reading Effective?Issue 14. Is Greater Parental Involvement at School AlwaysBeneficial?Issue 15. Should Schools Embrace Computers and Technology?Issue 16. Should Schools Decrease Class Size to Improve StudentOutcomes?Issue 17. Can a Zero-Tolerance Policy Lead to Safe Schools?Issue 18. Should U.S. Schools Be Evaluated Against Schools inOther Coutries?THE PRAXIS SERIES OFFICIAL GUIDEEducational Testing Service2008 / Softcover / 577 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-149423-6Available: September 2007[A Professional Reference Title]If you’re looking for the best, most trustworthy guide to the exams inThe Praxis Series, you’ve found it. This of cial Praxis guide comesstraight from ETS--the people who actually make the tests. It willshow you exactly what to expect -- whether you’re taking the PPST tobegin your teaching career, the PLT to demonstrate your professionalexpertise, or a Praxis II Subject Test to prove your knowledge ofa speci c K-12 teaching topic. Only ETS can give you real Praxisquestions for practice, show you exactly what you’ll see on screen onthe computerized exams, and tell you the test-maker’s own strategiesfor success. That’s why this guide is your indispensable source foreverything you need to know about The Praxis Series.CONTENTSHow to Use This BookPart I. Getting StartedChapter 1. Introducing the PraxisChapter 2. Praxis Practical MattersChapter 3. General Strategies for Test-TakersPart II. Preparing For The PpstChapter 4. All About the PPSTChapter 5. PPST ReadingChapter 6. PPST MathematicsChapter 7. PPST Writing: The Multiple-Choice SectionChapter 8. PPST Writing: The EssayPart III. Six Real Ppsts For PracticeChapter 9. PPST: Reading Test 1Chapter 10. PPST: Reading Test 2Chapter 11. PPST: Mathematics Test 1Chapter 12. PPST: Mathematics Test 2Chapter 13. PPST: Writing Test 1Chapter 14. PPST: Writing Test 2Part IV. Principles Of Learning And Teaching (Plt)Chapter 15. All About the PLT TestsChapter 16. Real PLT Questions for PracticePart V. Praxis II: Elementary EducationChapter 17. Elementary Education: Curriculum, Instruction, andAssessmentChapter 18. Elementary Education: Content KnowledgeChapter 19. Elementary Education: Content Area ExercisesPart VI. Praxis II: Subject AssessmentsChapter 20. All About the Subject AssessmentsChapter 21. Reading, English, Language ArtsChapter 22. Social Studies, Math, ScienceChapter 23. Other SubjectsAppendix A: State-by-State Certification Testing RequirementsAppendix B: For More Information46

Educational PsychologyInfants & ToddlersChild, Family & Society –ReadersDIVERSITY IN EARLY CARE ANDEDUCATION HONORING DIFFERENCES5th EditionJanet Gonzalez-Mena, Napa Valley College2008 / 192 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352586-0Available: Februrary 2007Diversity in Early Care and Education (formerly MulticulturalIssues In Child Care) explores the rich diversity encountered inprograms and environments for children ages birth to 8, includingthose serving children with special needs. The emphasis is on thepractical and immediate concerns of the early childhood professionaland family service worker, though all information has strong theoreticalsupport.CONTENTS1 Perceiving and Responding to Differences2 Communicating Across Cultures3 Working with Diversity Issues4 A Framework for Understanding Differences5 Attachment and Separation6 Differing Perspectives on Learning through Play7 Socialization, Guidance, and DisciplineTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INCHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY7th EditionDiana S Del Campo and Robert L Del Campo of New Mexico StateUniversity-Las Cruces2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351513-7Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 132.mhtmlFrom McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series (formerly knownas McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this Seventh Edition of TAKING SIDES:CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY presents current controversial issuesin a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest anddevelop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framedwith an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. Aninstructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume.USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellentinstructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating thiseffective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES readerfeatures an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites andis supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 InfancyIssue 1. Is Institutional Child Care Beneficial to Children?Issue 2. Does Maternal Employment Have Negative Effects onChildren’s Development?Issue 3. Should Scientists Be Allowed to Clone Children?Issue 4. Do Federal Laws Make Transracial Adoptions MoreCommonplace?Unit 2 Early ChildhoodIssue 5. Is Spanking Detrimental to Children?Issue 6. Are Fathers Really Necessary?Issue 7. Does Divorce Create Long-Term Negative Effects forChildren?Issue 8. Is Viewing Television Violence Harmful for Children?Unit 3 Middle ChildhoodIssue 9. Does Marriage Improve Living Standards for Children?Issue 10. Are Stepfamilies Inherently Problematic for Children?Issue 11. Is Television Viewing Responsible for the Rise in ChildhoodObesity?Issue 12. Do Bilingual Education Programs Help Non-English-Speaking Children Succeed?Issue 13. Is Gay Adoption and Foster Parenting Healthy forChildren?Issue 14. Should the HPV Vaccination Be Mandatory for Girls inLater Childhood?Unit 4 AdolescenceIssue 15. Should Children Who Are at Risk for Abuse Remain withTheir Families?Issue 16. Is Abstinence-Only Sex Education the Best Way to TeachAbout Sex?Issue 17. Is the Internet a Safe Place for Teens to Explore?47

Educational PsychologyDeath and DyingChapter 12 – SuicideChapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern WorldChapter 14 – Beyond Death / After LifeChapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social ChoicesNEWNEWTHE LAST DANCE:ENCOUNTERING DEATHAND DYING8th EditionLynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College andAlbert Lee Strickland2009 / Hardcover / 688 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340546-9Available: July 2008The best-selling textbook in the eld, The Last Dance offers aninterdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying. Integratingthe experiential, scholarly, social, individual, emotional, and intellectualdimensions of death and dying, the eighth edition of this acclaimed texthas been thoroughly revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensivecoverage of death studies. Together with its companion volumes, thisnew edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory andresearch, as well as practical application to students’ lives.NEW TO THIS EDITION A new companion text, A Journey Through the Last Dance, helpsstudents reexamine their attitudes and behaviors toward death anddying, through activities, new ideas, terms, and references to manyresources. A new chapter on death systems highlights important publicpolicy issues. A new chapter on end-of-life issues and decisions includesdiscussion of informed consent, caregiver-patient relationships,physician-assisted suicide, euthanasia, advance directives, andfinancial planning. A new section on Celtic and Northern European culturaltraditions complements discussion of other cross-culturalperspectives on death and dying. A new section on terrorism, including discussion of the impactand aftermath of the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks. Expanded discussion of the role of biological and geneticfactors in suicide risk. Integrated discussion of developmental theories and the impactof sociocultural influences on socialization and learning aboutdeath.ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT 09/1011th EditionGeorge E Dickinson, College of CharlestonMichael R Leming, Saint Olaf College2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812767-0Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.CONTENTSChapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of ChangeChapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of SocioculturalForcesChapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and HistoricalChapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and InstitutionsChapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public PolicyChapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening IllnessChapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and DecisionsChapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of LossChapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body DispositionChapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and AdolescentsChapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults48

Educational PsychologyANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT 08/0910th EditionGeorge E Dickinson, College of CharlestonMichael R Leming, Saint Olaf College2008 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339771-9Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 717.mhtmlThis Tenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906, is offered as apractical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Issues in Dying and Death1. Finding Better Ways to DieNew! 2. Organ Transplantation in a Globalised WorldNew! 3. Into the OblivionNew! 4. Moving Toward Peac5. Technology and Death PolicNew! 6. A Survey of End-of-Life Care in Care HomesNew! 7. How Much Is More Life Worth?8. The Unsettled Question of Brain Death9. Studying the Black DeathUnit 2. Dying and Death Across the Life CycleNew! 10. Editorial: On Behalf of ChildrenNew! 11. Knowledge of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome PreventionStrategies in a Multicultural, Disadvantaged CommunityNew! 12. And Then the Dog DiedNew! 13. To Live with No RegretsNew! 14. “Cast Me Not Off in Old Age”15. Trends in Causes of Death Among the ElderlyUnit 3. The Dying Process16. Palliative Care17. Placing Religion and Spirituality in End-of-Life Care18. Spirituality and Religion in the “Art of Dying”New! 19. Death in the Nursing HomeNew! 20. Dying on the StreetsNew! 21. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns Toward Dying in PrisonUnit 4. Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide22. Death and the Law23. Doctor, I Want to Die. Will You Help Me?24. Competent Care for the Dying Instead of Physician-AssistedSuicid25. Colleen’s Choice26. Ethics and Life’s Ending27. When Students Kill Themselve28. Life Everlasting29. Who Will Speak for You When You Can’t?30. The Contemporary American Funeral31. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects32. The Arlington Ladies33. Face to Face With Death34. Six Feet Under35. The Grieving Process36. Disenfranchised Grief37. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief38. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning39. Those Left Behind40. Till Death Do Us Part41. Counseling With Children in Contemporary Society42. Discussing Tragedy With Your Child43. Life Is Like the Seasons49

Educational Psychology50

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHSOCIAL AND PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGYAdvanced Social Psychology .............................................................................57Attitudes and Behavior .......................................................................................55Health Psychology ..............................................................................................61Intimacy ..............................................................................................................58Motivation and Emotion ......................................................................................62Personality ..........................................................................................................56Psychology of Prejudice .....................................................................................61Psychology of Women and Gender ....................................................................58Psychology of Women and Gender – Reader ....................................................60Social Psychology – Texts ..................................................................................53Social Psychology – Readers .............................................................................5451

NEW TITLESSOCIAL AND PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PagePsychology of Success, 10e Waitley 978-0-07-337517-5 622009Theories of Personality, 7e Feist 978-0-07-338270-8 56Social Psychology, 5e Franzoi 978-0-07-337059-0 53Intimate Relationships, 5e Miller 978-0-07-337018-7 58Multicultural Psychology, 2e Mio 978-0-07-338271-5 55, 61Exploring Social Psychology, 5e Myers 978-0-07-337064-4 53Health Psychology, 7e Taylor 978-0-07-338272-2 61Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 4e White 978-0-07-351529-8 6052

Social and Personality PsychologySocial Psychology –TextsChapter 8--Group BehaviorChapter 9 Interpersonal AttractionChapter 10 Intimate RelationshipsChapter 11 AggressionChapter 12 Prosocial Behavior: Helping OthersNEWInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionSOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY5th EditionStephen L Franzoi, Marquette University2009 / Hardcover / 648 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337059-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128543-8 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/franzoi5Readable research. This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self”as a theme to give students a meaningful context for exploring thekey concepts of social psychology. “Applications” sections have beenincorporated into most chapters, and “Featured Study” sections at theend of every chapter summarize the purpose, method, and resultsof recently published scienti c articles. Retaining the emphasis onmethodology, the text also continues the tradition of strong gendercoverage, while expanding the coverage of social cognition andsocial neuroscience.NEW TO THIS EDITION Streamlined organization. The text has been reduced from 14chapters to 12 for the 5th edition. The formerly separate chapters onAttitudes and Persuasion have been condensed to a single chapter.In addition, the material in the Self, Self-Presentation and PersonPerception, and Thinking About Our Social World chapters has beencombined into a new Self chapter and a new Social Cognition andPerson Perception chapter. Each chapter contains new neuroscience research on socialbehavior. As a sub-theme to The Self, Franzoi explores automaticthinking versus deliberate thinking by integrating the neuroscientificapproach (the “hardware” of thinking) toward social behavior with thesocial-cognitive approach (the “software” of thinking). Expanded applications to students’ everyday lives. Morethan twenty Self/Social Connection Exercises contain self-reportquestionnaires currently being used by researchers, and the results ofstudies employing them are part of the text material. The online versionof these exercises also contains numerous personal reflectionsby students who have used an advance version of this edition intheir social psychology course. These students describe how theirknowledge of social psychology has provided them with insights intotheir own lives and the world in which they live.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introducing Social PsychologyChapter 2 Conducting Research in Social PsychologyChapter 3 The SelfChapter 4 Social Cognition and Person PerceptionChapter 5 Attitudes and PersuasionChapter 6 Stereotyping, Prejudice, and DiscriminationChapter 7 Social Influence2009 / Softcover / 528 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337064-4ISBN: 978-0-07-128042-6 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/myersesp5EXPLORING SOCIALPSYCHOLOGY5th EditionDavid Myers, Hope CollegeThis brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers streamlinedfocus on issues such as belief and illusion, prejudice and diversity,and love and hate. The brevity of each of the book’s 31 stand-alonemodules makes this the perfect text for covering the core conceptsin the eld. By introducing social psychology in an essay format andby writing in a voice that is both solidly scienti c and warmly human,Exploring Social Psychology is able to reveal social psychology asan investigative reporter might, by providing a current summary ofimportant social phenomena, by showing how social psychologistsuncover and explain such phenomena, and by re ecting on theirhuman signi cance. The new edition includes discussion of theHurricane Katrina aftermath as an illustration of hindsight bias andavailability heuristic, the Iraq War and belief perseverance, andterrorism and group polarization.NEW TO THIS EDITION Rich support package for instructors and students. Instructorscan incorporate instructor’s manual suggestions, PowerPoints, andvideos efficiently with McGraw-Hill’s award-winning PrepCenter.For students, icons throughout the text guide the student to theOnline Learning Center to gather more information on each moduleby viewing excerpts from the Social Connection video modules,participating in interactive exercises, and taking module quizzes totest their knowledge.CONTENTSPart One Introducing Social PsychologyModule 1 Doing Social PsychologyModule 2 Did You Know It All Along?Part Two Social ThinkingModule 3 Self-Concept: Who Am I?Module 4 Self-Serving BiasModule 5 The Power of Positive ThinkingModule 6 The Fundamental Attribution ErrorModule 7 The Powers and Perils of IntuitionModule 8 Reasons for UnreasonModule 9 Behavior and BeliefModule 10 Clinical IntuitionModule 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social CognitionPart Three Social InfluenceModule 12 Human Nature and Cultural Diversity53

Social and Personality PsychologyModule 13 Gender, Genes, and CultureModule 14 How Nice People Get CorruptedModule 15 Two Routes to PersuasionModule 16 Indoctrination and InoculationModule 17 The Mere Presence of OthersModule 18 Many Hands Make Diminished ResponsibilityModule 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do AloneModule 20 How Groups Intensify DecisionsModule 21 Power to the PersonPart Four Social RelationsModule 22 The Challenge of DiversityModule 23 The Roots of PrejudiceModule 24 The Nature and Nurture of AggressionModule 25 Does the Media Influence Social Behavior?Module 26 Who Likes Whom?Module 27 The Ups and Downs of LoveModule 28 Causes of ConflictModule 29 Blessed Are the PeacemakersModule 30 When Do People Help?Module 31 Social Psychology and the Sustainable FutureReferencesArt CreditsName IndexSubject IndexInternational EditionSOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY9th EditionDavid Myers, Hope College2008 / Hardcover / 864 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353189-2ISBN: 978-0-07-331026-8 (with student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128670-1 [IE with CD-ROM]Available: December 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/myers9David Myers’ Social Psychology continues to set the standardby which other Social Psychology texts are judged. Its renownedauthor’s engaging writing style and unique, intimate voice make thetext compelling without being simplistic. The organization logicallymoves the student through the study of how people think about,in uence, and relate to one another, with an appropriate balanceof basic research and application. This edition features additionalcontemporary research, supplemented by video clips and vignettesthat demonstrate social psychology’s relevance.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introducing Social PsychologyPart 1: Social ThinkingChapter 2: The Self in a Social WorldChapter 3: Social Beliefs and JudgmentsChapter 4: Behavior and AttitudesPart 2: Social InfluenceChapter 5: Genes, Culture, and GenderChapter 6: ConformityChapter 7: PersuasionChapter 8: Group InfluencePart 3: Social RelationsChapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking OthersChapter 10: Aggression: Hurting OthersChapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving OthersChapter 12: HelpingChapter 13: Conflict and PeacemakingPart 4: Applying Social PsychologyChapter 14: Social Psychology in the ClinicChapter 15: Social Psychology in CourtChapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable FutureEpilogueGlossaryReferencesAcknowledgmentsName IndexSubject IndexSocial Psychology –ReadersANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY7th EditionKaren G Duffy, State University College – GeneseoGary Krolikowski, Empire State College – Saratoga Spg2008 / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339739-9Available: January 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 393.mhtmlThis Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Research IssuesNew! 1. How to Be a Wise Consumer of Psychological ResearchNew! 2. Ethnic and Racial Health Disparities Research: Issues andProblemsUnit 2. The SelfNew! 3. Self-Esteem Development Across the Lifespan4. Self-Concordance and Subjective Well-Being in Four CulturesNew! 5. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See YouUnit 3. Social Cognition and Social PerceptionPart A. Social Cognition6. How Social Perception Can Automatically Influence BehaviorNew! 7. Flashbulb Memories: How Psychological Research ShowsThat Our Most Powerful Memories May Be UntrustworthyNew! 8. Culture Affects Reasoning, CategorizationPart B. Social PerceptionNew! 9. The Social Nature of Perception and ActionNew! 10. Perception of Faces and BodiesUnit 4. AttitudesNew! 11. Implicit Discrimination12. The Science and Practice of PersuasionNew! 13. In Search of Pro-AmericanismUnit 5. Social InfluenceNew! 14. “Thin Slices” of Life15. Abu Ghraib Brings A Cruel Reawakening16. Persuasion: What Will It Take to Convince You?Unit 6. Social RelationshipsPart A. Interpersonal RelationshipsNew! 17. Contagious Behavior54

Social and Personality PsychologyNew! 18. Competent Jerks, Lovable Fools, and the Formation ofSocial NetworksPart B. Intimate Relationships19. Isn’t She Lovely?20. If It’s Easy Access That Really Makes You Click, Log On HereNew! 21. Brokeback Mountain: A Gay and a Universal Love StoryUnit 7. Social BiasesPart A. Prejudice22. The Self-Protective Properties of Stigma: Evolution of a ModernClassicNew! 23. Leaving Race BehindPart B. StereotypingNew! 24. Lowered Expectations25. Change of Heart26. Thin Ice: “Stereotype Threat” and Black College StudentsUnit 8. Violence and AggressionNew! 27. A Bicultural Perspective on WorldviewsNew! 28. Anger on the Road29. Bullying: It Isn’t What It Used To Be30. Influencing, Negotiating Skills, and Conflict-Handling: SomeAdditional Research and ReflectionsUnit 9. Altruism, Helping and CooperationNew! 31. The Compassionate InstinctNew! 32. Gift Giving’s Hidden Strings33. Trends in the Social Psychological Study of JusticeUnit 10. Group ProcessesPart A. LeadershipNew! 34. Seven Transformations of Leadership35. When Followers Become ToxicPart B. GroupsNew! 36. To Err Is Human37. Senate Intelligence Report: Groupthink Viewed as Culprit inMove to WarNew! 38. Sports Complex: The Science Behind Fanatic BehaviorAttitudes and BehaviorNEW2009 / Softcover / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338271-5Available: June 2008http://www.mhhe.com/mio2eMULTICULTURALPSYCHOLOGY2nd EditionJeffrey Scott Mio, Lori Barker Hackett andJaydee TumambingIn this thoroughly updated revision of Multicultural Psychology, theauthors once again use their own personal stories and experiencesalong with those of students as a means of entry to scienti c andprofessional writing on multicultural psychology. In doing so, theyengage students in the presentation of quantitative and qualitativeresearch on multicultural issues while capturing the richness of diversecultures. The text focuses on compelling topics such as differences inworldviews and communication; racial/cultural identity development;issues of racism; immigration; and nonracial populations of diversity,such as gender, sexuality, age, and ability. The authors integrateissues speci c to populations of diversity throughout the chapters,as opposed to covering such issues in distinct chapters.CONTENTSChapter 1—IntroductionChapter 2—Research and TestingChapter 3—Cultural EquivalenceChapter 4—CommunicationChapter 5—AcculturationChapter 6—RacismChapter 7—Racial Identity DevelopmentChapter 8—HealthChapter 9—Mental HealthChapter 10—Wrapping it All Up55

Social and Personality PsychologyPersonalityInternational EditionNEW2009 / 592 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338270-8ISBN: 978-0-07-126345-0 [IE]Available: July 2008http://www.mhhe.com/feist7International EditionTHEORIES OFPERSONALITY7th EditionJess Feist, Mcneese State UniversityGeogory Feist, College of William MaryThe 7th edition of this trusted introduction to personality centers on thepremise that personality theories are a reection of the unique culturalbackground, family experiences, personalities, and professionaltraining of their originators. The book begins by acquainting studentswith the meaning of personality and providing them with a solidfoundation for understanding the nature of theory, as well as its crucialcontributions to science. The chapters that follow present twentythreemajor theories: coverage of each theory also encompasses abiographical sketch of each theorist, related research, and applicationsto real life. The primary focus of this revision was updating the theorychapters to re ect the most recent research.NEW TO THIS EDITION Related Research sections of each chapter were extensivelyrevised for this edition.CONTENTSPart I: IntroductionChapter 1: Introduction to Personality TheoryPart II: Psychodynamic TheoriesChapter 2: Freud: PsychoanalysisChapter 3: Adler: Individual PsychologyChapter 4: Jung: Analytical PsychologyChapter 5: Klein: Object Relations TheoryChapter 6: Horney: Psychoanalytic Social TheoryChapter 7: Fromm: Humanistic PsychoanalysisChapter 8: Sullivan: Interpersonal TheoryChapter 9: Erikson: Post-Freudian TheoryPart III: Humanistic/Existential TheoriesChapter 10: Maslow: Holistic-Dynamic TheoryChapter 11: Rogers: Person-Centered TheoryChapter 12: May: Existential PsychologyPart IV: Dispositional TheoriesChapter 13: Allport: Psychology of the IndividualChapter 14: Eysenck, McCrae, and Costa’s Factor and TraitTheoriesPart V: Learning TheoriesChapter 15: Skinner: Behavioral AnalysisChapter 16: Bandura: Social Cognitive TheoryChapter 17: Rotter and Mischel: Cognitive Social Learning TheoryChapter 18: Kelly: Psychology of Personal ConstructsPERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY: DOMAINS OFKNOWLEDGE ABOUT HUMAN NATURE3rd EditionRandall J. Larsen, Wasington University - St Louis and David M. Buss,University of Texas at Austin2008 / 784 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353190-8ISBN: 978-0-07-110168-4 [IE]Available: November 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/larsen3Larsen and Buss’s Personality Psychology is based on a frameworkof six important domains of knowledge about personality functioning.These six domains are the dispositional domain (traits, traittaxonomies, and personality dispositions over time), the biologicaldomain (physiology, genetics, evolution), the intrapsychic domain(psychodynamics, motives), the cognitive/experiential domain(cognition, emotion, and the self), the social and cultural domain(social interaction, gender, and culture), and the adjustment domain(stress, coping, health, and personality disorders). This book isbased on the notion that these domains of knowledge represent theorganizing structure of contemporary personality psychology.CONTENTSIntroduction1. Introduction to Personality Psychology2. Personality Assessment, Measurement, and Research DesignPart I: The Dispositional Domain3. Traits and Trait Taxonomies4. Theoretical and Measurement Issues in Trait Psychology5. Personality Dispositions over Time: Stability, Change, andCoherencePart II: The Biological Domain6. Genetics of Personality7. Physiological Approaches to Personality8. Evolutionary Perspectives on PersonalityPart III: The Intrapsychic Domain9. Psychoanalytic Approaches to Personality10. Psychoanalytic Approaches: Contemporary Issues11. Motives and PersonalityPart IV: The Cognitive/Experiential Domain12. Cognitive Approaches to Personality13. Emotion and Personality14. Approaches to the SelfPart V: The Social and Cultural Domain15. Personality and Social Interaction16. Sex, Gender, and Personality17. Culture and PersonalityPart VI: The Adjustment Domain18. Stress, Coping, Adjustment, and Health19. Disorders of PersonalityConclusion20. Summary and Future Directions56

Social and Personality PsychologyAdvanced SocialPsychologyInternational EditionSOCIAL COGNITION, FROM BRAINS TOCULTURESusan T Fiske, University of Massachusetts, AmherstShelley E Taylor, University of California-Los Angeles2008 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340552-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128486-8 [IE]Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/sketaylorThis exciting new version of the classic text, Social Cognition,describes the increasingly complete link between neuropsychologyand culture. Highlighting the cutting-edge research in socialneuropsychology, mainstream experimental social-cognitivepsychology, and cultural psychology, it retains the authors’ uniqueability to be both scholarly and entertaining. Reader-friendly style andconcise summaries combine with the authors’ engaging perspectiveson this ourishing eld. Comprehensive without being overwhelming,this new standard for the eld brings with it a new organizationreecting current consensus open issues of the eld, and its trajectoryinto the future.CONTENTS1. Introductiona. Approaches to Studying the Social Thinkerb. Ebb & Flow of Cognition in Psychology & Neurosciencec. What is Social Cognition?d. People Are Not Thingse. Culture Mattersf. Brains Matterg. SummaryBasic Concepts in Social Cognition2. Dual-Modesa. Automaticityb. Controlc. Motivations that Moderate Modesd. Models of Both Automatic and Controlled Processese. Single-Mode Alternativesf. Summary3. Attention and Encoding: What Gets into Our Headsa. Salience: A Property of Stimuli in Contextb. Vividness: An Inherent Property of Stimulic. Accessibility: A Property of Categories in Our Headsd. Direct Perception: Not Just in Our Headse. Faces: The focus of social attentionf. Summaryg. Unfinished business:4. Representation in Memorya. Models of Memoryb. Social Memory Structures: Why Social Memory Mattersc. Summaryd. Unfinished business:e. How Social Memory MattersTopics in Social Cognition: From Self to Society5. Selfa. Mental representation of the Selfb. Culture and the Selfc. Self-Regulationd. Motivation and Self-Regulatione. Self as a Reference Point (ck Ochsner, Kelley, Heatherton)6. Causal Attribution Processesa. What is Attribution Theory?b. Attribution Theory: The Empirical Legacyc. Attributional Biasesd. Summary7. Heuristicsa. Introduction to heuristicsb. When do heuristics lead to the wrong answers?c. Judgments over timed. Accuracy-efficiency trade-off in perspectivee. Summary8. Cognitive Approaches to Attitudes & Evaluations (inprogress)a. Backgroundb. Cognitive features of two consistency theoriesc. Types of attitude processingd. Cognitive analyses of attitudes within social contextse. Attitude change and the selff. Summary9. Stereotyping: A Central Topic in Social Cognitiona. Introductionb. Blatant stereotypesc. Subtle stereotypesd. Effects of biase. Summary10. Prejudice: Interplay of Cogntive and Affective Biases (inprogress)a. Introductionb. Intergroup emotionsc. Special case of Race & Ethnicityd. Prejudice: Special case of Gendere. Special case of Agef. Special case of heterosexismg. Summary11. Mood & Emotions (in progress)a. Differentiating among affects, preferences, evaluations, moodsb. Early theoriesc. Physiological theories of emotiond. Social foundations of affecte. Affective influences on cognitionf. Affect versus cognitiong. Summary12. Behavior and cognitiona. Self regulation revisitedb. How is cognition related to behavior?c. When are cognitions and behavior related?d. Using behavior to test hypotheses about otherse. Summary13. Conclusion57

Social and Personality PsychologyIntimacyPsychology of Womenand GenderNEWINTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS5th EditionRowland Miller, Sam Houston State UniversityDaniel PerlmanSharon Stephens Brehm2009 / Softcover / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337018-7Available: November 2008Miller’s 5th edition of Intimate Relationships retains all of the qualitiesthat made the trusted text a best seller, with a new organization thatmakes the material accessible to students. The text has engaging,accessible prose, a comprehensive reach across disciplines, vigorousstandards of scholarship, and a personal appeal in its subject matter.The new edition is more concise with two newreorganized chapters,but still packed with new developments and current research woveninto every chapter. The authors illustrate the relevance of relationshipscience to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and analysis.This lively, comprehensive, user-friendly text provides students withthe tools they need to succeed in this course.NEW TO THIS EDITION Reorganization of 3 chapters from previous edition: Friendship,Power and Violence, and Shyness and Loneliness. The Shyness andLoneliness chapter from the previous edition was deleted, with its keymaterial being folded into the chapter on Friendship.Text is more concise than previous editions. Findings from attachment research are now highlighted in almostevery chapter.CONTENTSPart 1: Introduction to the Study of Intimate RelationshipsChapter 1: The Building Blocks of RelationshipsChapter 2: Research MethodsPart 2: Getting Together and Basic Processes in IntimateRelationshipsChapter 3: AttractionChapter 4: Social CognitionChapter 5: CommunicationChapter 6: InterdependencyPart 3 Friendship and IntimacyChapter 7: FriendshipsChapter 8: LoveChapter 9: SexualityPart 4 Relationship IssuesChapter 10: Stresses and StrainsChapter 11: ConflictChapter 12: Power and ViolencePart 5 Losing and Enhancing RelationshipsChapter 13: The Dissolution and Loss of RelationshipsChapter 14: Maintaining and Repairing RelationshipsLECTURES ON THE PSYCHOLOGY OFWOMEN4th EditionJoan C. Chrisler, Connecticut College2008 / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340544-5Available: July 2007This unique collection of previously unpublished essays byexperienced teachers and leading experts in Psychology of Womenis designed as a companion reader to any Psychology of Womentextbook. The lectures included are written in an informal manner:the authors speak to students directly and address questions thatstudents often ask.CONTENTSPrefaceIntroductionI. Status of Women1. Transforming the Debate on Sexual Inequality: From BiologicalDifference to Institutionalized Androcentrism2. Who’s In and Who’s Out: The Results of Oppression3. Poor Women in a Wealthy Nation4. Sex Discrimination at Work5. Feminist Perspectives on the Personal and Political Aspects ofMothering6. Gender Socialization, or How Long a Way Has Baby Come?II. Women’s Bodies7. Sweating It Out: The Good News and the Bad News about Womenand Sport8. Women, Weight, and Body Image9. The Intersexed and the Transgendered: Rethinking Sex/Gender10. PMS as a Culture-bound Syndrome11. Understanding Emotional Responses after Abortion12. Women with Disabilities13. The Health Risks of Being Black, Latina, Women, and/or Poor:Redefining Women’s Health within the Context of Social InequalityIII. Diversity of Women14. Asian American Women and Adolescent Girls: Sexuality andSexual Experession15. Life as a Lesbian; What Does Gender Have to Do with It?16. Gender Issues Among Latinas17. Triple Jeopardy in the Lives of Biracial Black/White Women18. Mammy, jezebel, Sapphire, and Their Homegirls: Developing an“Oppositional Gaze” toward the Images of Black Women19. Crossing the Color Line in Women’s FriendshipsIV. Violence against Women20. Women’s Fear of Rape: Causes, Consequences, and Coping21. Women and Pornography: What We Don’t Know Can Hurt Us22. Battered Women: Why Don’t They Just Leave?V. Women’s Mental Health23. Positive Aging for Women24. A Feminist Approach to Agoraphobia: Challenging TraditionalViews of Women at Home58

Social and Personality PsychologySEX & GENDER6th EditionHilary M Lips, Radford University2008 / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340553-7Available: July 2007This is a comprehensive introduction to sex and gender theories,research, and issues, focusing on social psychological and feministperspectives. The book examines the similarities and differencesbetween women and men, discusses where that knowledge comesfrom, and explains how that knowledge may itself be shaped andlimited by cultural perceptions. This new edition has been thoroughlyrevised with up-to-date research citations for all chapters and morecurrent examples.CONTENTSPart I: Myths, Theories, and ResearchChapter 1 Masculinity and Femininity: Myths and StereotypesChapter 2 Theoretical Perspectives on Sex and GenderChapter 3 Researching Sex and Gender: Exploring the Whys andHowsPart II: Behavior & Experience: Female—Male Similiarities andDifferencesChapter 4 Worlds Apart? Gender Differences in Social Behavior andExperienceChapter 5 Biology and Environment: The Process of BecomingFemale or MaleChapter 6 Perceptual and Cognitive Abilities: Gender Similaritiesand DifferencesChapter 7 Sexual Lives and OrientationsChapter 8 Hormonal and Reproductive ConnectionsChapter 9 Mental and Physical Health: Stress, Change, andAdaptationsPart III: Sex and Gender in Social RelationshipsChapter 10 Sex and Gender and Childhood: Constructing GenderChapter 11 Family and Friends: Attachment, Intimacy, and PowerChapter 12 Economic and Political Life: Power, Status, andAchievementChapter 13 Issues in the WorkplaceChapter 14 Justice, Equity, and Social ChangeEpilogueThe Ties That Bind: The Future of Sex and GenderGlossaryReferencesAuthor Index I–1 Subject Index I–15 Credits C–1International EditionWOMEN AND GENDER: A FEMINISTPSYCHOLOGY4th EditionMary Crawford, University of Connecticut—Storrs and Rhoda Unger,Brandeis University2004 / Softcover / 656 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-282107-9ISBN: 978-0-07-121661-6 [IE]CONTENTSPreface1. Introduction to a Feminist Psychology of Women2. Images of Women and Men3. Doing Gender4. The Meanings of Difference5. Biology, Sex, and Gender6. Becoming Gendered: Childhood Acquiring Gender: A DevelopmentalPerspective7. Becoming a Woman: Puberty and Adolescence8. Sex, Love, and Romance9. Commitments: Women and Close Relationships10. Mothering11. Work and Achievement12. Midlife and Beyond13. Violence Against Women14. Mental and Physical Health15. Making a Difference: Toward a Better Future for Women59

Social and Personality PsychologyPsychology of Womenand Gender – ReaderNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN GENDER4th EditionJacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro2009 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351529-8Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtmlIssue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender inChildhoodIssue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry?Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parentsfor Children?Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being?Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society?Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of WorkIssue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) ImproveWomen’s Lives?Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in theWorkplace?Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due toSocietal Obstacles?Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards?Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong?Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messageto Teens?Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional GenderConstraints?This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students tocontroversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent thearguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators,reect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their livelinessand substance and because of their value in a debate framework.Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally andpolitically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKINGSIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts,presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and publicdiscourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills byanalyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments.The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what isgender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover thatwhat might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is somuch more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only)accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have beenprovided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teachingsuggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teachinghints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion aroundthe themes raised by the clashing essays.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Gender_4e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Gender, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Hyde/DeLamater and Lips.CONTENTSUnit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving TargetIssue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny?Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate?Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and SciencesHave a Biological Basis?Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of DifferenceIssue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different?Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and MenInnately Determined?Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responsesto Stress Gender-Based?Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and MenIssue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender?Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levelsof Violence Against Intimate Partners?60

Social and Personality PsychologyHealth PsychologyPsychology of PrejudiceNEWInternational EditionNEW2009 / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338272-2ISBN: 978-0-07-128360-1 [IE]Available: June 2008http://www.mhhe.com/taylorhealth7eHEALTH PSYCHOLOGY7th EditionShelley Taylor, University of California-Los AngelesThe seventh edition of Health Psychology highlights health issues thatface the college student and his or her family through both accessibleresearch examples and pro les of interventions. It also highlightshealth issues relevant to the college student’s immediate and globalenvironment with both accessible research examples and pro lesof interventions. This edition contains clear descriptions on currentresearch into the prevention, treatment, and causes (social, genetic,and biological) of health related disorders.NEW TO THIS EDITION International health psychology research is incorporated,showing students the global nature of health psychology.CONTENTSPart One--Introduction to Health PsychologyChapter 1 -What Is Health Psychology?Chapter 2--The Systems of the BodyPart Two--Health Behavior and Primary PreventionChapter 3--Health BehaviorsChapter 4--Specific Health Related BehaviorsChapter 5--Health-Compromising Behaviors: Alcoholism andSmokingPart Three--Stress and CopingChapter 6--StressChapter 7--Moderators of the Stress ExperiencePart Four--The Patient in the Treatment SettingChapter 8--Using Health ServicesChapter 9--Patient-Provider RelationsChapter 10--The Management of Pain and DiscomfortPart Five--Management of Chronic and Terminal IllnessChapter 11--Management of Chronic IllnessChapter 12--Psychological Issues in Advancing and TerminalIllnessChapter 13--Heart Disease, Hypertension, Stroke, and DiabetesChapter 14--Psychoneuroimmunology, AIDS, Cancer, and ArthritisPart Six--Toward the FutureChapter 15--Health Psychology: Challenges for the FutureGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject Index2009 / Softcover / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338271-5Available: June 2008http://www.mhhe.com/mio2eMULTICULTURALPSYCHOLOGY2nd EditionJeffrey Scott Mio, Lori Barker Hackett andJaydee TumambingIn this thoroughly updated revision of Multicultural Psychology, theauthors once again use their own personal stories and experiencesalong with those of students as a means of entry to scienti c andprofessional writing on multicultural psychology. In doing so, theyengage students in the presentation of quantitative and qualitativeresearch on multicultural issues while capturing the richness of diversecultures. The text focuses on compelling topics such as differences inworldviews and communication; racial/cultural identity development;issues of racism; immigration; and nonracial populations of diversity,such as gender, sexuality, age, and ability. The authors integrateissues speci c to populations of diversity throughout the chapters,as opposed to covering such issues in distinct chapters.CONTENTSChapter 1—IntroductionChapter 2—Research and TestingChapter 3—Cultural EquivalenceChapter 4—CommunicationChapter 5—AcculturationChapter 6—RacismChapter 7—Racial Identity DevelopmentChapter 8—HealthChapter 9—Mental HealthChapter 10—Wrapping it All Up61

Social and Personality PsychologyMotivation and EmotionNEWPSYCHOLOGY OF SUCCESS10th EditionDenis Waitley2010 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337517-5Available: February 2009http://www.mhhe.com/waitley5ePsychology of Success denes the fundamental psychology principlesof success—principles applicable to everyone regardless of age,major, background or specialty. Unlike many books, Psychologyof Success doesn’t take a one-size- ts-all approach; rather it asksstudents to take an active role in de ning what is right for them asan individual. It calls on students to use self-awareness and criticalthinking to examine their dreams, values, interests, skills, needs,identities, self-esteem, and relationships and to set and achievegoals based on their personal vision of success. It introduces keyconcepts of psychology and offers creative exercises designed to helpstudents understand these concepts and apply them to their lives. Aworkbook as well as a textbook, Psychology of Success offers simpleyet effective strategies for self-improvement.NEW TO THIS EDITION New full-color design and larger, stream-lined layout accommodatethe useful features and application-oriented theme of this text. Internet Action boxes and end-of-chapter Internet Activities areupdated to include the latest topics and online materials, which arelinked at the book’s Online Learning Center site at www.mhhe.com/waitley5e. Discussions of gender and diversity have been updated to moreappropriately address today’s student. Applying Psychology boxes are updated where necessary toreflect the latest research and thinking. Further Readings and references to other materials are updatedto include the latest books on personal psychology and self-help andreflection.62

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHCLINICAL PSYCHOLOGYAbnormal Psychology .........................................................................................65Abnormal Psychology – Readers .......................................................................66Adjustment – Readers ........................................................................................67Counseling..........................................................................................................68Developmental Psychopathology .......................................................................71Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ...........................................................................68Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers ..........................................................69Introduction to Clinical Psychology .....................................................................6763

NEW TITLESCLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PageDrugs in Perspective, 7e Fields 978-0-07-338075-9 68Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10, 24e Wilson 978-0-07-812763-2 692009Counseling and Psychotherapy Today Austad 978-0-07-311225-1 68Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Abnormal Psychology, 5e Halgin 978-0-07-351526-7 66Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 13e Hart 978-0-07-338079-7 69Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 08/09, 23e Wilson 978-0-07-339773-3 7064

Clinical PsychologyAbnormal PsychologyInternational EditionInternational EditionABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGYMedia and Research with MindMap II CD,Updated 5th EditionRichard P Halgin and Susan Krauss Whitbourne of University of Mass-Amherst2008 / Hardcover with CD-ROMISBN: 978-0-07-723638-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128462-2 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/halgin5Focused, fresh, and engaging, this text captures student interestand facilitates comprehension through an integrated media programand the widespread use of current and highly relevant clinical casestudies. The fth edition Media Update includes Faces Interactivecase studies directly in the text, linking information on the disordersin the text to our unique Faces Interactive Online. The text maintainsthe integrative approach to treatment using the biopsychosocialmodel, the emphasis on cases, and the succinct coverage that havebeen the foundations of the text’s success. It also features a focusedapproach, with the goal of presenting only the most up-to-date andrelevant research and clinical material.CONTENTSChapter 1: Understanding Abnormality: A Look at History andResearch MethodsChapter 2: Classification and Treatment PlansChapter 3: AssessmentChapter 4: Theoretical PerspectivesChapter 5: Anxiety DisordersChapter 6: Somatoform Disorders, Psychological Factors AffectingMedical Conditions and Dissociative DisordersChapter 7: Sexual DisordersChapter 8: Mood DisordersChapter 9: Schizophrenia and Related DisordersChapter 10: Personality DisordersChapter 11: Development-Related DisordersChapter 12: Cognitive DisordersChapter 13: Substance-Related DisordersChapter 14: Eating Disorders and Impulse-Control DisordersChapter 15: Ethical and Legal IssuesABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY MEDIA ANDRESEARCH UPDATE WITH MINDMAP4th EditionSusan Nolen-Hoeksema, Yale University2008 / Hardcover with CD-ROMISBN: 978-0-07-723639-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128431-8 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/nolen4Authored by award-winning teacher and noted researcher SusanNolen-Hoeksema, this text blends cutting-edge research inpsychopathology with compassion for people who suffer frompsychological disorders. Capturing the excitement of major advancesin biological and psychosocial research and treatment alternatives,Abnormal Psychology Media and Research Update imparts a trueenthusiasm for and appreciation of scienti c investigation. Theauthor’s scienti c and caring approach, combined with strong studytools, has won accolades from instructors and students alike. ThisMedia and Research Update includes Faces Interactive CaseStudies, which link information about disorders covered in the textto Face Interactive Online, integrating the audio visual resources tothe written text. The text continues to place great emphasis on anintegrated approach to abnormal psychology, on making biologicalinformation clear to students, and on providing a strong focus onempirical research and diversity.CONTENTS1. Looking at Abnormality2. Contemporary Theories of Abnormality3. The Research Endeavor4. Assessing and Diagnosing Abnormality5. Treatments for Abnormality6. Stress Disorders and Health Psychology7. Anxiety Disorders8. Somatoform and Dissociative Disorders9. Mood Disorders10. Suicide11. Schizophrenia12. Personality Disorders13. Childhood Disorders14. Cognitive Disorders and Life-Span Issues15. Eating Disorders16. Sexual Disorders17. Substance-Related Disorders18. Mental Health and the LawGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject Index65

Clinical PsychologyInternational EditionABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY WITH MINDMAPPLUS CD-ROM AND POWERWEB9th EditionLauren Alloy, Temple University-Philadelphia, John Riskind, GeorgeMason University and Margaret Manos2005 / Hardcover / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-726586-1ISBN: 978-0-07-121780-4 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/alloy9CONTENTSChapter 1 Abnormal Behavior: Historical PerspectivesChapter 2 Diagnosis and AssessmentChapter 3 Research Methods in Abnormal PsychologyChapter 4 The Behavioral, Cognitive, and SocioculturalPerspectivesChapter 5 The Psychodynamic, Humanistic, and InterpersonalPerspectivesChapter 6 The Neuroscience PerspectiveChapter 7 Anxiety DisordersChapter 8 Dissociative and Somatoform DisordersChapter 9 Psychological Stress and Physical DisordersChapter 10 Mood DisordersChapter 11 Personality DisordersChapter 12 Substance-Use DisordersChapter 13 Sexual Dysfunctions, Paraphilias, and Gender IdentityDisordersChapter 14 Schizophrenia and Delusional DisorderChapter 15 Neuropsychological DisordersChapter 16 Disorders of Childhood and AdolescenceChapter 17 Mental Retardation and AutismChapter 18 Legal Issues in Abnormal PsychologyAbnormal Psychology –ReadersNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN ABNORMALPSYCHOLOGY5th EditionRichard P Halgin, University of Mass-Amherst2009 / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351526-7Available: February 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515264.mhtmlThis Fifth Edition of TAKING SIDES: ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGYpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, anissue introduction, and a postscript. An online instructor’s resourceguide with testing material is available. USING TAKING SIDES IN THECLASSROOM (ISBN 9780073343907) is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Abnormal_Psychology_5e_CorrGuide.pdf .pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Abnormal Psychology, 5/e with corresponding chapters in two of ourbest-selling McGraw-Hill Abnormal Psychology textbooks by Nolen-Hoeksema and Halgin/Whitbourne.CONTENTSUnit 1 Psychological Conditions and TreatmentsIssue 1. Is Forced Treatment of Seriously Mentally Ill IndividualsJustifiable?Issue 2. Should Individuals with Anorexia Nervosa Have the Right toRefuse Life-Sustaining Treatment?Issue 3. Is Psychological Debriefing a Harmful Intervention forSurvivors of Trauma?Issue 4. Are Blocked and Recovered Memories Valid Phenomena?Issue 5. Is Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) a RealDisorder?Issue 6. Should MDMA (Ecstasy) Be Prohibited, Even for TherapeuticUse?Issue 7. Should Abstinence Be the Goal for Treating People withAlcohol Problems?Unit 2 The Trend Toward Biological InterventionsIssue 8. Should Memory-Dampening Drugs Be Used to Alleviate theSymptoms of Trauma?Issue 9. Are Antipsychotic Medications the Treatment of Choice forPeople with Psychosis?Issue 10. Is Ritalin Overprescribed?Issue 11. Should Psychologists Prescribe Medication?Issue 12. Is Electroconvulsive Therapy Ethical?66

Clinical PsychologyUnit 3 Social IssuesIssue 13. Is It Ethical to Support the Wish for Healthy Limb Amputationin People with Body Integrity Identity Disorder (BIID)?Issue 14. Is Sexual Orientation Conversion Therapy Ethical?Issue 15. Does Exposure to Media Violence Promote AggressiveBehavior?Issue 16. Would Legalization of Virtual Child Pornography ReduceSexual Exploitation of Children?Issue 17. Does Evolution Explain Why Men Rape?Issue 18. Should Mental Health Professionals Serve as Gatekeepersfor Physician-Assisted Suicide?Issue 19. Must Mentally Ill Murderers Have a RationalUnderstandingof Why They Are Being Sentenced to Death?Adjustment – ReadersANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONAL GROWTHAND BEHAVIOR 07/0826th EditionKaren G Duffy, State University of Coll-Geneseo2008 / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339731-3Available: January 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 318.mhtmlThis Twenty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONALGROWTH AND BEHAVIOR 07/08 provides convenient, inexpensiveaccess to current articles selected from the best of the public press.Organizational features include: an annotated listing of selected WorldWide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; ageneral introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index;and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USINGANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practicalguide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by ourstudent website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Becoming a Person: Foundations1. Carl Rogers’ Life and Work: An Assessment on the 100thAnniversary of His Birth2. Mysteries of the Mind3. Skepticism of Caricatures: B.F. Skinner Turns 1004. The “Big Five” and You: How Personality Traits Affect BehaviorUnit 2. Determinants of Behavior: Motivation, Environment, andPhysiology5. What Makes You Who You Are6. The Blank Slate, Steven Pinker7. Genetic Influence on Human Psychological Traits8. Nature vs. Nurture: Two Brothers With Schizophrenia9. The Amazing Brain: Is Neuroscience the Key to What Makes UsHuman?10. His Brain, Her Brain11. Cultural Psychology: Studying the Exotic Other12. Just Do It13. Stand and DeliverUnit 3. Problems Influencing Personal Growth14. The Biology of Aging15. and Now, the Hard Part: That Sweet Little Thing Is About toCommandeer Your Life16. Childhood Is for Children17. Kaleidoscope of Parenting Cultures18. What American Schools Can Learn from Hogwarts School ofWitchcraft and Wizardry19. What Makes Teens Tick20. Staving Off Middle-Age Spread Requires Portion Control andPlenty of Exercise21. Midlife Crisis? Bring It On!22. The Borders of HealingUnit 4. Relating to Others23. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See You24. What’s Your Emotional IQ?25. Nurturing Empathy26. What Does That Mean?27. Deception Detection28. Calling It Off29. Want to Stay Married? Move to Massachusetts30. Forgiveness: Who Does It and How Do They Do It?Unit 5. The Individual and Society31. The Emperor’s New Woes32. Suspicious Minds33. 50th Anniversary: Brown v. Board of Education34. The Social Net35. Work-life: Organizations in Denial36. How to Get Out Alive37. The Collateral Psychological Damage of WarUnit 6. Enhancing Human Adjustment: Learning to CopeEffectively38. Are We Becoming a Nation of Depressives?39. Dear Reader: Get a Life40. The 10 Rules of Change41. Drugs vs. Talk TherapyIntroduction toClinical PsychologyInternational EditionINTRODUCTION TO CLINICALPSYCHOLOGY: SCIENCE AND PRACTICEBruce Compas, University of Vermont and Ian Gotlib, Stanford University2002ISBN: 978-0-07-253650-8 (with Student CD-ROM)ISBN: 978-0-07-128745-6 [IE w/Student CD]Website: www.mhhe.com/compasCONTENTSSection I: Introduction to the FieldChapter 1: What Is Clinical Psychology?Chapter 2: Clinical Psychology: Past and PresentChapter 3: Research Methods in Clinical PsychologyChapter 4: Models of Development, Behavior and PersonalityChapter 5: PsychopathologySection II: Psychological AssessmentChapter 6: Assessment: Understanding Individuals and ContextsChapter 7: Assessment: Clinical InterviewingChapter 8: Assessment: Measurement of Intelligence andNeuropsychological TestingChapter 9: Assessment: Measurement of PersonalityChapter 10: Assessment: Measurement of Behavior, Cognition, andPsychophysiologySection III: Psychological Intervention: From Prevention toPsychotherapyChapter 11: Intervention: Promotion, Prevention, and TreatmentChapter 12: Psychotherapy: Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic67

Clinical PsychologyApproachesChapter 13: Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Existential, and ExperientialApproachesChapter 14: Psychotherapy: Behavioral and Cognitive ApproachesChapter 15: Effectiveness of Psychotherapy: Evaluation andIntegrationChapter 16: Clinical Psychology: Our Past, Our Future, and YourOpportunitiesDrugs /Psycho-pharmacologyNEWNEW2009 / Hardcover / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-311225-1ISBN: 978-0-07-110163-9 [IE]Available: September 2008http://mhhe.com/austad1eCounselingInternational EditionCOUNSELING ANDPSYCHOTHERAPY TODAYCarol Shaw Austad, Central Conn StateUniversityToday’s counseling and psychotherapy-related careers requirepractitioners to grasp and respond to a continually changing context.This comprehensive and contemporary introduction to the eldprepares students to engage productively with a variety of theoreticalmodels, practice settings, and patient problems. The author draws onher experience as a practicing therapist and professor in presentingtheory, practice, and research in a clear and compelling style. Startingwith the big picture of psychotherapy within its sociocultural contextand fundamental issues, Austad then reviews the major theoreticalmodels. Students are encouraged to develop a mental model thathelps them to compare and contrast key features of each theory andto understand the settings in which each best applies.CONTENTSChapter 1: The State of Psychotherapy and CounselingChapter 2: Professionalism, Ethics, and Legal Issues in Chapter 3:Freud’s Classical PsychoanalysisChapter 4: Psychodynamic Therapy After FreudChapter 5: Adler’s Individual PsychologyChapter 6: Rogers’s Client-Centered TherapyChapter 7: Existential TherapyChapter 8: Gestalt TherapyChapter 9: Behavior TherapyChapter 10: Cognitive TherapyChapter 11: Reality TherapyChapter 12: Feminist TherapyChapter 13: Biopsychosocial Therapy and HealthChapter 14: PsychopharmacologyChapter 15: Eclectic and Other PsychotherapiesDRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE7th EditionRichard Fields, Private Counseling Practice Tuscon AZ and RedmondWashington2010 / Softcover / 434 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338075-9Available: March 2009NEW TO THIS EDITION Updated and Reorganized: Chapters 1 and 2 have been updatedand reorganized to reflect current information on etiology and trendsin substance abuse and dependence. Treatment and Relapse Prevention: Chapter 11 has beenreorganized and updated to help students to understand both recoveryand relapse prevention. This chapter lays a nice foundation for thosewho will explore careers in the counseling fields. Updated Chapter Pedagogy: This new 6th edition has addedmany teaching and learning aids to each chapter including a chapterin review, chapter learning objectives and discussion questions. New Information on Recovery: Chapter 9 (Change & Interventionfor Substance Abuse Problems) has been revised and updated tofocus on the issues of change and motivation and the ways to helpsubstance abusers to focus on recovery. The chapter outlines ways toovercome denial and defensive rationalizations, and to avoid enablingbehavior while maintaining healthy boundaries.CONTENTSSection I: Understanding Substance Abuse1 Putting Drugs in Perspective2 Why Do People Abuse Drugs?3 Drug-Specific Information4 Definitions of Substance Abuse, Dependence, and AddictionSection II: Family5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems6 Parenting7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family SystemSection III: Prevention, Intervention, and Treatment8 Prevention of Substance-Abuse Problems9 Change, Motivation & Intervention for Substance-AbuseProblems10 Disorders Co-Occurring with Substance Abuse11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment and Relapse PreventionAppendix A: Trends in Annual Prevalence of Use of Various Drugsfor Eight, Tenth, and Twelfth GradersAppendix B: Alcohol/Drug Screening InventoriesAppendix C: Medication ExamplesAppendix D: At-Risk Factors For Substance Abuse68

Clinical PsychologyNEWInternational EditionDrugs / Psychopharmacology– ReadersDRUGS, SOCIETY, ANDHUMAN BEHAVIOR13th EditionCarl L Hart, Columbia UniversityCharles J Ksir, University of Wyoming-LaramieOakley S Ray (deceased)2009 / Softcover / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338079-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128559-9 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/hart13eDesigned for the introduction to drugs and substance abuse courseas taught in departments of health education, psychology, biology,sociology, and criminal justice, this full-color market-leading textprovides the latest information on drugs and their effects on societyand human behavior. For over thirty years, instructors and studentshave relied on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral,pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical perspectives.NEW TO THIS EDITION Fully updated. Includes current statistics and trends for druguse and effects, costs of drug control, and the prison population. Keytopics and controversies are also timely including current researchfindings on popular recreational drugs, medical marijuana, drug usein sports, and dietary supplement regulation.CONTENTSSection One: Drug Use in Modern Society1: Drug Use: An Overview2: Drug Use as a Social Problem3: Drug Products and Their RegulationSection Two: How Drugs Work4: The Nervous System5: The Actions of DrugsSection Three: Uppers and Downers6: Stimulants7: Depressants and Inhalants8: Medication for Mental DisordersSection Four: Alcohol9: AlcoholSection Five: Familiar Drugs10: Tobacco11: Caffeine12: Dietary Supplements and Over-the-Counter DrugsSection Six: Restricted Drugs13: Opioids14: Hallucinogens15: Marijuana16: Performance-Enhancing DrugsSection Seven: Prevention and Treatment17: Preventing Substance Abuse18: Treating Substance Abuse and DependenceAppendix A Drug NamesAppendix B Resources for Information and AssistanceGlossaryNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, ANDBEHAVIOR 09/1024th EditionHugh T Wilson, CA State University Sacramento2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812763-2Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127637.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.69

Clinical PsychologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR08/0923rd EditionHugh T Wilson, California State University—Sacramento2009 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339773-3Available: January 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 733.mhtmlThis Twenty-Third Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY,AND BEHAVIOR provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM (ISBN-13:9780073301907/ISBN-10:0073301906)is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_ Drugs_Society_and_Behavior _0809_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches units in Annual Editions: Drugs,Society, and Behavior 08/09 with corresponding chapters in one of ourbest-selling McGraw-Hill Criminal Justice textbooks by Goode.Unit 4. Other Trends in Drug UseNew! 25. Fentanyl-Laced Street Drugs “Kill Hundreds”New! 26. A Nation Without Drunk Driving27. Some Cold Medicines Move Behind the CounterNew! 28. Drug AddictionNew! 29. The Right to a Trial,30. New Study Shows 1.8 Million Youth Use InhalantsNew! 31. Teens and Prescription Drugs32. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of PrescriptionDrugs by College StudentsUnit 5. Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs33. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systemsand PopulationsNew! 34. Sobering ThoughtsNew! 35. Students with Fetal Alcohol SyndromeNew! 36. Keep Your Older Patients Out of Medication Trouble37. My Spirit Lives,Roxanne Chinook38. The Problem With Drinking39. High on the JobUnit 6. Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control PolicyNew! 40. Reorienting U.S. Drug Policy41. Is Drug Testing of Athletes Necessary?42. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate Use, and Public PolicyNew! 43. Researchers Explore New Visions for Hallucinogens44. State’s EvidenceNew! 45. Durbin46. How to Stand Up to Big TobaccoUnit 7. Prevention, Treatment, and EducationNew! 47. Keeping Drug Prevention for Kids ‘Real’New! 48. An Update on Adolescent Drug Use49. Combination Treatment for One Year Doubles Smokers’ QuitRate50. Parent PowerNew! 51. Nonconventional and Integrative Treatments of Alcohol andSubstance Abuse52. Exercise and Drug DetoxificationNew! 53. Rehab Reality Check54. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That WorkCONTENTSUnit 1. Living with DrugsNew! 1. Over the LimitNew! 2. Smoking, Drugs, Obesity Top Health Concerns for Kids3. Living the High Life4. Methamphetamine Abuse: A Perfect Storm of ComplicationsNew! 5. HIV ApathyNew! 6. Not Invented Here7. Did Prohibition Really Work?New! 8. Vice Vaccines9. Pass the WeedUnit 2. Understanding How Drugs Work—Use, Dependency,and AddictionNew! 10. Reducing the Risk of Addiction to Prescribed Medications11. Predicting AddictionNew! 12. Better Ways to Target Pain13. The Effects of Alcohol on Physiological Processes and BiologicalDevelopmentNew! 14. A Small Part of the Brain, and Its Profound EffectsNew! 15. The Changing Science of Pain16. The Toxicity of Recreational DrugsNew! 17. Stress and Drug Abuse18. Does Cannabis Cause Psychosis or Schizophrenia?Unit 3. The Major Drugs of Use and AbuseNew! 19. Methamphetamine AbuseNew! 20. Mexico Drug Cartels Reap Big Profits from MethNew! 21. The Taliban’s Opium WarNew! 22. The Opposite ResultNew! 23. The Teen Drinking DilemmaNew! 24. An Update on the Effects of Marijuana and Its PotentialMedical Use70

Clinical PsychologyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INDRUGS AND SOCIETY8th EditionRaymond Goldberg, State University of NY – Cortland2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351511-3Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 116.mhtmlThis Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: DRUGS AND SOCIETYpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our studentwebsite, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSPart 1 Drugs and Public PolicyIssue 1. Should Laws Against Drug Use Remain Restrictive?Issue 2. Should the United States Put More Emphasis on Stoppingthe Importation of Drugs?Issue 3. Are Drinking Age Laws Effective?Issue 4. Are the Dangers of Ecstasy (MDMA) Overstated?Issue 5. Should Pregnant Drug Users Be Prosecuted?Issue 6. Should Drug Addiction Be Considered a Disease?Issue 7. Should the Federal Government Play a Larger Role inRegulating Steroid Use?Part 2 Drugs and Social PolicyIssue 8. Are the Adverse Effects of Smoking Exaggerated?Issue 9. Should Laws Prohibiting Marijuana Use Be Relaxed?Issue 10. Are Psychotherapeutic Drugs Over-Prescribed for TreatingMental Illness?Issue 11. Do the Consequences of Caffeine Outweigh Its Benefits?Issue 12. Should School-age Children with Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) Be Treated with Ritalin and OtherStimulants?Issue 13. Do Consumers Benefit When Prescription Drugs AreAdvertised?Part 3 Drug Prevention and TreatmentIssue 14. Does Secondhand Smoke Endanger the Health ofNonsmokers?Issue 15. Is Alcoholism Hereditary?Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Approved for Medical Use?Issue 17. Should Schools Drug Test Students?Issue 18. Does Drug Abuse Treatment Work?Issue 19. Is Abstinence an Effective Strategy for Drug Education?DevelopmentalPsychopathologyInternational EditionCHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGYJeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University--Ithaca2008 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340550-6ISBN: 978-0-07-126354-2 [IE]Available: October 2007All students who will one day work with children or their families cangain a basic foundation for understanding child psychopathologyfrom this text. Students who seek careers in the mental health,physical health, or social work elds will nd extensive informationon childhood disorders, their prevention, and their treatment. All willgain an appreciation for the many facets of this growing eld, and ofthe need to base interventions on research and on a humane attitudetoward each child and family.CONTENTSChapter 1 IntroductionChapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical IssuesChapter 3 Basic Psychological TheoriesChapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral GeneticsChapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment DisordersChapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant DisorderChapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity DisorderChapter 8 Bipolar DisorderChapter 9 Depressive DisordersChapter 10 Anxiety DisordersChapter 11 Mental RetardationChapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental DisordersChapter 13 Childhood-onset SchizophreniaChapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and OtherTrauma (Posttraumatic Stress Disorder, Dissociative Disorders,Reactive Attachment Disorder)Chapter 15 Disorders Related to Physical Health and Functioning(Somatoform Disorders, Childhood Obesity, Elimination Disorders)71

Clinical Psychology72

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHEXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGYCognitive Psychology .........................................................................................79Perception ..........................................................................................................80Physiological Psychology / Psychobiology .........................................................80Research Methods .............................................................................................75Statistics .............................................................................................................78SPSS/SAS ..........................................................................................................78Tests and Measurements ...................................................................................7973

NEW TITLESEXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PagePscyhological Testing and Assessment, 7e Cohen 978-0-07-312909-9 79Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 09/10, 7e Jubilan 978-0-07-812768-7 802009Methods in Behavioral Research, 10e Cozby 978-0-07-337022-4 75Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 08/09, 6e Jubilan 978-0-07-339778-8 80Research Methods in Psychology, 8e Shaughnessy 978-0-07-338269-2 7574

Experimental PsychologyResearch MethodsNEWInternational EditionNEW2009 / Softcover / 448 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337022-4ISBN: 978-0-07-128102-7 [IE]Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/cozby10eInternational EditionMETHODS IN BEHAVIORALRESEARCH10th EditionPaul C Cozby, California State University-FullertonMethods in Behavioral Research has achieved its market-leadingposition with its concise and strategic approach to methodologicaldecision making. Combining helpful pedagogy and rich examples,Cozby’s tenth edition again incorporates learning objectives,illustrative graphics, and activities to increase student involvement.Highlights of the new edition include a broader introduction of differentresearch techniques in Chapter 4, extensive revision of the “validity ofmeasurements” section, and updated structural equations models.NEW TO THIS EDITION Currency. Coverage in the the 10th edition has been updated,refined, and broadened throughout to better reflect the current stateof behavioral research methods.CONTENTS1. Scientific Understanding of Behavior2. Where to Start3. Ethical Research4. Studying Behavior5. Measurement Concepts6. Observational Methods7. Asking People About Themselves: Survey Research8. Experimental Design9. Conducting Experiments10. Complex Experimental Designs11. Quasi-Experimental and Single-Participant Designs12. Understanding Research Results: Description and Correlation13. Understanding Research Results: Statistical Inference14. Generalizing ResultsAppendix A: Writing Research ReportsAppendix B: Statistical TestsAppendix C: Statistical TablesAppendix D: Constructing a Latin SquareGlossaryReferencesIndexRESEARCH METHODS INPSYCHOLOGY8th EditionJohn Shaughnessy, Hope CollegeEugene B Zechmeister andJeanne S Zechmeister of Loyola University-Chicago2009 / Hardcover / 576 PagesISBN: 978-0-07-338269-2ISBN: 978-0-07-128351-9 [IE]Available: February 2008http://www.mhhe.com/shaughnessy8eResearch Methods in Psychology provides a comprehensive andreadable introduction to methods for undergraduates. Employinga multi-method approach and exposing students to real examplesof published research throughout the text, the authors providestudents with the tools necessary to do good and ethical researchin psychology and to understand the research they learn about inpsychology courses and in the media. A wealth of pedagogical aidsserve to break down the aversion and phobia that many studentsbring to a methods course. The 8th edition boasts a wealth of newexamples with nearly 50 of the research examples from 2004-2007and more than half of those from 2006 and 2007. So, as studentsread this methods text, they will also be learning about “cutting-edge”research in psychology.NEW TO THIS EDITION Multiple pedagogical aids help students to learn and to apply thematerial, and to test their knowledge More than 50 of the research examples cited in the book are from2004-2007 with more than half of those from 2006 and 2007.CONTENTSPart I General Issues1 Introduction2 The Scienti c Method3 Ethical Issues in the Conduct of Psychological ResearchPart II Descriptive Methods4 Observation5 Survey Research6 Unobtrusive Measures of BehaviorPart III Experimental Methods7 Independent Groups Designs8 Repeated Measures Designs9 Complex DesignsPart IV Applied Research10 Single-Case Designs, and Small-n Research11 Quasi-Experimental Designs and Program EvaluationPart V Analyzing and Reporting Research12 Data Analysis and Interpretation: Part I. Describing Data, Con -dence Intervals, Correlation13 Data Analysis and Interpretation: Part II. Tests of StatisticalSigni cance and the Analysis Story14 Communication in PsychologyAppendix: Statistical Tables75

Experimental PsychologyInternational EditionRESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: APROCESS APPROACH7th EditionKenneth Bordens and Bruce Barrington Abbott of Indiana University2008 / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312906-8ISBN: 978-0-07-126636-9 [IE]Available: July 2007RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: A PROCESS APPROACH,Seventh Edition, offers students an in-depth introduction to theprocess of research design and methods. It is distinguished by itsapplication of the process approach, a proven strategy for guidingstudents at each step in designing, conducting, and evaluatingpsychological research.CONTENTSPrefacePart I1: Explaining Behavior2: Developing and Evaluating Theories of Behavior3: Getting and Developing Research Ideas4: Choosing a Research Design5: Making Systematic Observations6: Choosing and Using Participants and Subjects7: Understanding Ethical Issues in the Research ProcessPart II8: Using Nonexperimental Research9: Using Survey Research10: Using Between-Subjects and Within-Subjects ExperimentalDesigns11: Using Specialized Research Designs12: Using Single-Subject Designs13: Describing Data14: Using Inferential Statistics15: Using Multivariate Design and Analysis16: Reporting Your Research ResultsAppendix: Statistical TablesGlossaryReferencesText CreditsIndexESSENTIALS OF BEHAVIORAL RESEARCH:METHODS AND DATA ANALYSIS3rd EditionRobert Rosenthal, Harvard UniversityRalph L Rosnow, Temple University – Philadelphia2008 / 848 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-353196-0Available: April 2007The only comprehensive treatment of methods and data analysis,this classic advanced undergraduate/graduate text in researchmethods requires statistics as a prerequisite. The rst half of the textconcentrates on research methods and the second half introducesstudents to advanced statistical procedures.CONTENTSPrefacePart I: Conceptual And Ethical Foundations1. The Spirit of Behavioral Research2. Contexts of Discovery and Justification3. Ethical Considerations, Dilemmas, and GuidelinesPart II: Operationalization And Measurement Of DependentVariables4. Reliability and Validity of Measurements5. Observations, Judgments, and Composite Variables6. Questionnaires, Interviews, and DiariesPart III: The Logic Of Research Designs7. Randomized Controlled Experiments and Causal Inference8. Nonrandomized Research and Functional Relationships9. Randomly and Nonrandomly Selected Sampling UnitsPart IV: Fundamentals Of Data Analysis10. Describing, Displaying, and Exploring Data11. Correlation12. Statistical Power and Effect Size RevisitedPart V: One-Way Designs13. Comparing Means by Standard t Tests14. Analysis of Variance and the F Test15. One-Way Contrast AnalysesPart VI: Factorial Designs16. Factorial Analysis of Variance17. Interaction Effects in Analysis of Variance18. Repeated Measures in Analysis of VariancePart VII: Additional Topics in Data Analysis19. Significance Testing and Association in Tables of Counts20. Multivariate Data Analysis21. Meta-Analysis: Comparing and Combining Research ResultsPart VIII: AppendicesA: List of Numbered EquationsB: Statistical TablesGlossaryReferencesIndexesName IndexSubject Index76

Experimental PsychologyInternational EditionInternational EditionRESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY:IDEAS, TECHNIQUES AND REPORTSChris Spatz, Hendrix CollegeEdward P Kardas, Southern Arkansas University2008 / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-253074-2ISBN: 978-0-07-111664-0 [IE]Available: February 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/spatzEmphasizing critical thinking and ethics, Spatz & Kardas’ ResearchMethods in Psychology presents a practical approach to investigatingbehavioral and mental processes. By understanding context, studentsare led to apply appropriate methods, collect data, and arrive at validconclusions about subjects that relate to the world around them.Intended for a rst undergraduate course, Research Methods inPsychology incorporates student-friendly features such as ChapterReviews and Critical Thinking exercises, while providing all thebackground and tools necessary for students to conduct and reporton their own research.CONTENTSPrefaceChapter 1 ScienceChapter 2 Research in PsychologyChapter 3 EthicsChapter 4 MeasurementChapter 5 Data Exploration and DescriptionChapter 6 Statistical TestsChapter 7 Design I: Between-Subjects DesignsChapter 8 Design II: Within-Subjects Designs and PretestsChapter 9 Complex DesignsChapter 10 Observational, Qualitative, and Small-N ResearchChapter 11 Planning ResearchChapter 12 Conducting and Reporting ResearchAPPENDIXESAppendix A Annotated APA manuscriptAppendix B Ethical Standards of the APAAppendix C Statistical tablesAppendix D Glossary of TermsReferencesIndexPRINCIPLES OF RESEARCH INBEHAVIORAL SCIENCE2nd EditionBernard E. Whitley, Jr., Ball State University2002 / Hardcover / 544pagesISBN: 978-0-07-293233-1 (with Internet Guide)ISBN: 978-0-07-113135-3 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/whitley2CONTENTS1. The Science of Psychology: Theory, Research, and Application2. Research Strategies: An Overview3. The Ethical Treatment of Research Participants4. Formulating a Research Question5. Developing a Measurement Strategy6. The Internal Validity of Research7. The Experimental Research Strategy8. The Correlational (Passive) Research Strategy9. The Single-Case Research Strategy10. Research in Natural Settings11. Survey Research12. Data Collection13. Interpreting Research Results14. The External Validity of Research15. Evaluation Research16. Integrative Literature Reviewing17. Writing Research Reports18. The Professional and Social Responsibilities of Scientists77

Experimental PsychologyStatisticsSPSS/SASInternational EditionInternational EditionBEHAVIORAL STATISTICS IN ACTION,3rd EditionMark Vernoy, Palomar College and Diana Kyle, Fullerton College2002 / Hardback / 436 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-293732-9 (Corrective Edition)ISBN: 978-0-07-111361-8 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/vernoy3CONTENTS1. An Introduction to Statistics2. Frequency Distributions3. Graphs / Basics in Constructing a Graph4. Measures of Central Tendency5. Measures of Variability6. Scaled Scores and Standard Scores: How to Change Apples intoOranges7. The Normal Curve8. Correlation9. Regression10. Probability Theory and Sampling11. Experimental Design12. t Tests / z Tests (A Review) / t Tests / Single-Sample t Tests / tTests between Two Independent Sample Means / t Tests for CorrelatedSamples13. One-Way Analysis of Variance14. Two-Way Analysis of Variance15. Chi-Square and Other Nonparametric StatisticsAppendix A: TablesAppendix B: Solutions to Odd-Numbered ProblemsREADY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TOSPSS ® 13.0 AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS ®2nd EditionThomas Pavkov and Kent Pierce of Purdue Univ-calumet-hammond2007 / Softcover / 96 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312665-4ISBN: 978-0-07-125297-3[IE without CD]Available: February 2006For only $5 net when packaged with another McGraw-Hill text, thisguide features concise instructions for accessing and using SPSSfor Windows. Ready, Set, Go! is more than a reference book forversions 13.0 and 14.0; through ten guided assignments, studentslearn about statistical analysis of data while also learning the steps inthe research process. The students are guided through assignmentssuch as using frequency distributions, performing the t test, using theone-way ANOVA procedure, computing a correlation, and computingchi-square function.CONTENTSPrefaceAssignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSSAssignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and DescriptiveStatisticsAssignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic FormAssignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two IndependentSamplesAssignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two RelatedSampledAssignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-WayANOVAAssignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way ANOVAAssignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between TwoVariablesAssignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between TwoVariablesAssignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two CategoricalVariables AppendixEntering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS78

Experimental PsychologyTests and MeasurementsCognitive PsychologyNEWPSCYHOLOGICAL TESTING ANDASSESSMENT7th EditionRonald Jay Cohen, RJ Cohen ResearchMark Swerdlik, Illinois State University2010 / 720 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312909-9Available: February 2009[Details unavailable at press time]International EditionPSYCHOLOGICAL TESTING ANDASSESSMENT: AN INTRODUCTION TOTESTS AND MEASUREMENT6th EditionRonald Jay Cohen, R.J. Cohen Research and Mark Swerdlik, Illinois StateUniversity2005 / Hardcover with CD-ROM / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-319904-7 (with Exercise Workbook)ISBN: 978-0-07-111964-1 [IE with Exercise book]Website: www.mhhe.com/cohentesting6International EditionFUNDAMENTALS OF COGNITIVEPSYCHOLOGY7th EditionR. Reed Hunt, University of North Carolina - Greensboro and Henry C.Ellis, University of New Mexico-Albuquerque2004 / Softcover / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-285895-2ISBN: 978-0-07-121916-7 [IE]CONTENTSChapter 1: IntroductionChapter 2: Perceptual ProcessesChapter 3: AttentionChapter 4: Short-term Working MemoryChapter 5: Long-term MemoryChapter 6: Implicit MemoryChapter 7: Forgetting and Distorted MemoryChapter 8: MetacognitionChapter 9: Concepts and ClassificationChapter 10: Comprehension and KnowledgeChapter 11: LanguageChapter 12: Problem-solving and Decision MakingChapter 13: Cognition and EmotionCONTENTSPart I: An Overview1.Psychological Testing and Assessment2. Historical, Cultural, and Legal/Ethical ConsiderationsPart II: The Science of Psychological Measurement3. A Statistics Refresher4. of Tests and Testing5. Reliability6. Validity7. Test DevelopmentPart III: The Assessment of Intelligence8. Intelligence and Its Measurement9. Tests of Intelligence10. Preschool and Educational AssessmentPart IV: The Assessment of Personality11. Personality Assessment: An Overview12. Personality Assessment Methods13. Clinical and Counseling Assessment14. Neuropsychological Assessment15. The Assessment of People with Disabilities16. Assessment, Careers, and Business79

Experimental PsychologyPerceptionPhysiological Psychology/ PsychobiologyInternational EditionPERCEPTION5th EditionRandolph Blake, Vanderbilt University — Nashville and Robert Sekuler,Brandeis University2006 / Hardcover / 768 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-288760-0ISBN: 978-0-07-111272-7 [IE]Available: July 2005CONTENTS1: Introduction to Perception2: The Human Eye3: The Eye and Seeing4: Central Visual Pathways5: Spatial Vision and Pattern Perception6: Object Perception: Recognizing the Things We See7: Color Perception8: Seeing a Three-Dimensional World9: Action and the Perception of Events10: The Ear and Auditory System11: Hearing and Listening12: Speech and Music Perception13: Touch14: Chemical Senses I: Smell15: Chemical Senses II: TasteNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: BIOLOGICALPSYCHOLOGY 09/107th EditionBoyce M Jubilan, Desales UniversityDawn Albertson, Minnesota State University-Mankato2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812768-7Available: April 2009[Details unavailable at press time]NEWANNUAL EDITIONS:BIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY08/096th EditionBoyce M Jubilan, Desales UniversityDawn Albertson, Minnesota State University-Mankato2009 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339778-8Available: February 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397784.mhtmlThis Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: BIOPSYCHOLOGY 08/09provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Biological_Psychology_0809.pdf This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions:Biological Psychology 08/09 with the corresponding chapters in threeof our best-selling McGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Feldman,Passer/Smith, and King.CONTENTSUnit 1. Methods in Biological PsychologyNew! 1. Thinking It OverNew! 2. Really New AdvancesNew! 3. Neuron ControlNew! 4. A Great Attraction80

Experimental PsychologyUnit 2. The Cells and Regions of the BrainNew! 5. The Dark Side of GliaNew! 6. Mirror Neurons: How We Reflect on BehaviorNew! 7. Neural Correlates of a Mystical Experience in CarmeliteNunsNew! 8. Damage to Specific Part of the Brain May Make Smokers‘Forget’ to SmokeUnit 3. Neural Development and PlasticityNew! 9. New Neurons Strive to Fit In10. A Learning MachineNew! 11. Uneven Regional Brain Development Contributes toAdolescent Risk-TakingUnit 4. Genetic Influences on BehaviorNew! 12. Nature, Nurture, NuanceNew! 13. Gene Variant Increases Risk for Alcoholism FollowingChildhood AbuseUnit 5. Sensation and PerceptionNew! 14. Psychophysics of Sweet and Fat Perception in ObesityNew! 15. Cortical Activation to Indoor Versus Outdoor ScenesNew! 16. Olfactory Neurons Expressing Transient Receptor PotentialChannel M5 (TRPM5) Are Involved in Sensing SemiochemicalsNew! 17. Culture and the Physical EnvironmentUnit 6. Motivation: Eating and AggressionNew! 18. Metabolic and Hormonal Control of the Desire for Foodand SexNew! 19. Modulation of Appetite by Gonadal Steroid HormonesNew! 20. Influence of Aggressive Computer Games on the BrainCortex Activity Level in AdolescentsUnit 7. Reproductive or Sexual BehaviorNew! 21. Mammalian Animal Models of PsychosexualDifferentiationNew! 22. Ovulatory Shifts in Human Female OrnamentationNew! 23. Interaction of Fraternal Birth Order andHandedness in the Development of Male HomosexualityUnit 8. Sleep and Biological RhythmsNew! 24. Promoting Adjustment of the Sleep—Wake Cycle byChronobioticsNew! 25. Sleep and ImmunityNew! 26. Jet LagUnit 9. EmotionsNew! 27. Beyond a JokeNew! 28. Relation Between Cardiac Vagal Tone and Performance inMale Military Personnel Exposed to High StressNew! 29. A Dynamic Model of GuiltNew! 30. Is Automatic Emotion Regulation Associated withAgreeableness?New! 31. BuzzwordsUnit 10. Learning and MemoryNew! 32. Neuronal Competition and Selection During MemoryFormationNew! 33. The Memory CodeNew! 34. Genetics, Dementia, and the ElderlyNew! 35. The Secret to Not Losing Your MarblesUnit 11. Disorders of Behavior and the Nervous SystemNew! 36. Autistic Brains Out of Synch?New! 37. Changes in Anterior Cingulate and Amygdala After CognitiveBehavior Therapy of Posttraumatic Stress DisorderNew! 38. Eyes Open, Brain ShutNew! 39. Dissecting DyslexiaUnit 12. Evolutionary PerspectiveNew! 40. Brain Evolution Studies Go MicroNew! 41. Planet of the ... Dogs?New! 42. Ten Politically Incorrect Truths About Human NatureNew! 43. A Case for Angry Men and Happy WomenUnit 13. Ethical IssuesNew! 44. Brain Scans Raise Privacy ConcernsNew! 45. The Promise and Predicament of Cosmetic NeurologyNew! 46. Wanting Babies Like Themselves81

Experimental Psychology82

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHAPPLIED PSYCHOLOGYIndustrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior ...............................................85Sports Psychology ..............................................................................................8583

NEW TITLESAPPLIED PSYCHOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PageApplied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak Performance, 6e Williams 978-0-07-337653-0 8584

Applied PsychologyIndustrial Psychology –Organizational BehaviorSports PsychologyInternational EditionNEWHUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING ANDDESIGN7th EditionMark S. Sanders, California State University - Northridge and Ernest J.McCormick1993 / Hardcover / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-054901-2ISBN: 978-0-07-112826-1 [IE]CONTENTSPart I: Introduction1 Human Factors and Systems / 2 Human Factors ResearchMethodologies /Part II: Information Input3 Information Input and Processing / 4 Text, Graphics, Symbols, andCodes / 5 Visual Displays of Dynamic Information / 6 Auditory, Tactual,and Olfactory Displays / 7 Speech Communications /Part III: Human Output and Control8 Physical Work and Manual Materials Handling / 9 Motor Skills / 10Human Control of Systems / 11 Controls and Data Entry Devices /12 Hand Tools and Devices /Part IV: Workplace Design13 Applied Anthropometry, Work Space Design, and Seating /14 Arrangement of Components within a Physical Space / 15Interpersonal Aspects of Work Place Design /Part V: Environmental Conditions16 Illumination / 17 Climate / 18 Noise / 19 Motion /Part VI: Human Factors Applications20 Human Error, Accidents, and Safety / 21 Human Factors and theAutomobile / 22 Human Factors in Systems Design /Appendixes / A: List of Abbreviations / B: Control Devices / C: NIOSHRecommended Action Limit Formula for Lifting TasksAPPLIED SPORT PSYCHOLOGY: PERSONALGROWTH TO PEAK PERFORMANCE6th EditionJean M Williams, University of Arizona2010 / Softcover / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337653-0Available: June 2009This is a comprehensive and practical guide to psychological conceptsand theories as well as to strategies and techniques designed to helpfuture coaches and sport psychologists cultivate peak performanceand personal growth through recent advances in sport psychology.The text’s ve-part organization focuses on motivation and leadership,social interactions, mental training, program implementation, andissues that go beyond performance enhancement. Contributingauthors are experts in their topic, and each chapter has been writtenspeci cally for this collection.NEW TO THIS EDITION Each chapter has been carefully updated to reflect the latestresearch and cutting-edge practice in applied sport psychology. The text offers an even greater applied emphasis, throughadditional case studies, anecdotes, and examples illustrating waysto use various techniques and interventions. Many chapters have been reformatted to highlight key concepts,findings, and intervention exercises through the use of lists andboxes.Updated and new examples and statistics appear throughout.CONTENTS1 Sport Psychology: Past, Present, FuturePart I Learning, Motivation, and Effective Leadership2 Motor Skill Learning for Effective Coaching and Performance3 Positive Reinforcement, Performance Feedback, and PerformanceEnhancement of Control4 Toward Optimal Motivation in Sport: Fostering Athletes Competenceand Sense of Control5 The Self-Fulfilling Prophecy Theory: When Coaches’ ExpectationsBecome Reality6 Leadership Effectiveness7 Styles of Decision Making in CoachingPart II Social Interactions8 The Sport Team as an Effective Group9 Communicating Effectively10 Enhancing Coach-Parent Relationships in Youth Sports: IncreasingHarmony and Minimizing HasslePart III Mental Training for Performance Enhancement11 Psychological Characteristics of Peak Performance12 Increasing Awareness for Sport Performance13 Goal Setting for Peak Performance14 Arousal-Performance Relationships15 Relaxation and Energizing Techniques for Regulation of Arousal16 Seeing is Believing: Understanding and Using Imagery in Sport17 Cognitive Techniques for Building Confidence and EnhancingPerformance18 Concentration and Attention Control Training19 Strategies for Training85

Applied PsychologyPart IV Implementing Training Programs20 Integrating and Implementing a Psychological Skills TrainingProgram21 Development and Implementation of Coach Training Programs:Cognitive-Behavioral Principles and TechniquesPart V Psychological Considerations: Referral, Drug Abuse,Burnout, Injury, Termination from Athletics, and Exercise22 When to Refer Athletes for Counseling or Psychotherapy23 Drug Abuse in Sport: Causes and Cures24 Burnout in Sport: Causes and Cures25 Injury Risk and Rehabilitation: Psychological Considerations26 Career Transition Among Athletes: Is there Life After Sports?27 Exercise PsychologyInternational EditionSPORT PSYCHOLOGY6th EditionRichard H. Cox, University of Missouri-Columbia2007 / Softcover / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-297295-5ISBN: 978-0-07-110642-9 [IE]Available: February 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cox6eThis new edition provides students with a solid foundation in theconcepts of sport and exercise psychology and their application inexercise and sport settings. New texts now come packaged withPowerWeb: Health & Human Performance!CONTENTSPart 1: Introduction1 Introduction to Sport PsychologyPart 2: Motivation of the Athlete2 Motivation and Self-confidence in Sport3 Goal Perpective in Sport4 Attribution in Sport5 Developing Intrinsic Motivation6 Goal Setting in Sport7 Youth SportsPart 3: Arousal, Attention and Personality of the Athlete8 Neurophysiology of Arousal9 Attention and Concentration in Sport10 Personality of the AthletePart 4: Situational Factors Related to Anxiety and Mood11 Mood State and Athletic Performance12 Anxiety, Arousal and Stress Relationships13 Alternatives to Inverted-U TheoryPart 5: Cognitive and Behavioral Interventions14 Coping Strategies in Sport15 Relaxation Strategies in Sport16 Arousal Energizing Strategies in Sport17 Imagery and Sport Performance18 Role of Hypnosis in Sport19 Psychological Skills TrainingPart 6: Social Psychology of Sport and Exercise20 Agression and Violence in Sport21 Audience and Crowd Effects in Sport22 Team Cohesion in Sport23 Leadership in SportPart 7: Psychobiology of Sport and Exercise24 Exercise Psychology25 Overtraining and Burnout26 Psychology of Athletic Injuries27 Drug Abuse in Sport and Exercise86

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHPSYCHOLOGY HISTORY & SYSTEMSHistory and Systems...........................................................................................8987

NEW TITLESPSYCHOLOGY HISTORY & SYSTEMS2009 Author ISBN PageA Conceptual History of Psychology Greenwood 978-0-07-285862-4 8988

Psychology History & SystemsHistory and SystemsInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionHISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY4th EditionDavid Hothersall, Ohio State University2004 / Softcover / 624 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-284965-3ISBN: 978-0-07-121474-2 [IE]Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/00728496 57/2009 / Hardcover / 720 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-285862-4ISBN: 978-0-07-126353-5 [IE]Available: January 2008http://www.mhhe.com/greenwood1eA CONCEPTUAL HISTORYOF PSYCHOLOGYJohn D GreenwoodA Conceptual History of Psychology is a broad historical surveythat traces conceptual continuities and discontinuities in the historyof psychological thought. The author connects the history ofpsychological theory with the development of the history of science,from the proto-scienti c psychology of the 17th and 18th centuries tothe institutionalized scienti c psychology of the late 19th century tothe present day. The lucid writing style and clear organization re ectthe author’s fteen years’ experience teaching the course.CONTENTSIntroductionChapter 1 Psychology and the AncientsChapter 2 Philosophical and Scientific Antecedents of PsychologyChapter 3 Early Studies of the Central Nervous SystemChapter 4 Wilhelm Wundt and the Founding of PsychologyChapter 5 Edward Titchener and Hugo MunsterbergChapter 6 German Psychologists of the Nineteenth and EarlyTwentieth CenturiesChapter 7 Gestalt Psychology in Germany and the United StatesChapter 8 The History of Clinical Psychology and the Developmentof PsychoanalysisChapter 9 Darwin, Galton, Cattell, James, and HallChapter 10 Functionalism at the University of Chicago and ColumbiaUniversityChapter 11 Historical Uses and Abuses of Intelligence TestingChapter 12 The Research of Ivan Pavlov and the Behaviorism ofJohn B. WatsonEpilogueCONTENTSChapter 1: History, Science and PsychologyChapter 2: Ancient Greek Science and PsychologyChapter 3: Rome and the Medieval PeriodThe Roman AgeChapter 4: The Scientific RevolutionChapter 5: The Newtonian PsychologistsChapter 6: Physiology and PsychologyPositivismChapter 7: Theories of EvolutionChapter 8: Psychology in GermanyChapter 9: Psychology in America: The Early YearsChapter 10: Functionalism, Behaviorism and Mental TestingChapter 11: Neobehaviorism, Radical Behaviorism, and the Problemsof BehaviorismChapter 12: The Cognitive RevolutionChapter 13: Abnormal and Clinical PsychologyNeuroses, Alienists and PsychiatryChapter 14: Social and Developmental Psychology89

Psychology History & Systems90

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHHUMAN SEXUALITYHuman Sexuality ................................................................................................93Human Sexuality – Readers ...............................................................................9591

NEW TITLESHUMAN SEXUALITY2010 Author ISBN PageAnnual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e Hutchison 978-0-07-351634-9 95Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 11e Taverner 978-0-07-354563-9 952009 Author ISBN PageIntimate Relationships, 5E Miller 978-0-07-337018-7 9392

Human SexualityNEWHuman SexualityINTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS5th EditionRowland Miller, Sam Houston State UniversityDaniel PerlmanSharon Stephens Brehm2009 / Softcover / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337018-7Available: December 2008Miller’s 5th edition of Intimate Relationships retains all of the qualitiesthat made the trusted text a best seller, with a new organization thatmakes the material accessible to students. The text has engaging,accessible prose, a comprehensive reach across disciplines, vigorousstandards of scholarship, and a personal appeal in its subject matter.The new edition is more concise with two newreorganized chapters,but still packed with new developments and current research woveninto every chapter. The authors illustrate the relevance of relationshipscience to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and analysis.This lively, comprehensive, user-friendly text provides students withthe tools they need to succeed in this course.NEW TO THIS EDITION Reorganization of 3 chapters from previous edition: Friendship,Power and Violence, and Shyness and Loneliness. The Shyness andLoneliness chapter from the previous edition was deleted, with its keymaterial being folded into the chapter on Friendship.Text is more concise than previous editions. Findings from attachment research are now highlighted in almostevery chapter.CONTENTSPart 1: Introduction to the Study of Intimate RelationshipsChapter 1: The Building Blocks of RelationshipsChapter 2: Research MethodsPart 2: Getting Together and Basic Processes in IntimateRelationshipsChapter 3: AttractionChapter 4: Social CognitionChapter 5: CommunicationChapter 6: InterdependencyPart 3 Friendship and IntimacyChapter 7: FriendshipsChapter 8: LoveChapter 9: SexualityPart 4 Relationship IssuesChapter 10: Stresses and StrainsChapter 11: ConflictChapter 12: Power and ViolencePart 5 Losing and Enhancing RelationshipsChapter 13: The Dissolution and Loss of RelationshipsChapter 14: Maintaining and Repairing RelationshipsSEXUALITY TODAY9th EditionGary Kelly, Clarkson University2008 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338266-1Available: November 2007The ninth edition of this trusted text carefully balances thepsychological, biological/physiological, and social elements ofhuman sexuality, integrating the latest research ndings and socialtrends. The author’s balanced approach is also evident in his abilityto present various sides of controversial topics in a neutral voice.This new edition features updated case studies, more emphasison cross-cultural coverage and examples, and the new companionSexSource Online.CONTENTSEach chapter ends with a summary and Focus on Healthquestions.Part 1 Social And Biological Foundations Of Human SexualityChapter 1 Cultural, Historical, and ResearchChapter 2 Female Sexual Anatomy and PhysiologyChapter 3 Male Sexual Anatomy and PhysiologyChapter 4 Human Sexual ResponseChapter 5 Developmental and Social Perspectives on GenderPart 2 Understanding Sexuality In Ourselves And OurRelationshipsChapter 6 Sexuality through the Life CycleChapter 7 Adult Sexuality and RelationshipsChapter 8 Sexual Individuality and Sexual ValuesChapter 9 Sexuality, Communication, and RelationshipsPart 3 Human Reproduction, Contraception, And Abortion:Sexuality Confronts Social PolicyChapter 10 Reproduction, Reproductive Technology, and BirthingChapter 11 Decision Making about Pregnancy and ParenthoodPart 4 Sexual Behavior And Contemporary SocietyChapter 12 Solitary Sex and Shared SexChapter 13 Same-Gender Orientation and BehaviorChapter 14 The Spectrum of Human Sexual BehaviorChapter 15 Sex, Art, the Media, and the LawPart 5 Dealing With Sexual ProblemsChapter 16 Sexual Consent, Coercion, Rape, and AbuseChapter 17 Sexually Transmitted Diseases, HIV/AIDS, and SexualDecisionsChapter 18 Sexual Dysfunctions and Their Treatment93

Human SexualityInternational EditionInternational EditionHUMAN SEXUALITY: DIVERSITY INCONTEMPORARY AMERICA WITHSEXSOURCE CD-ROM AND POWERWEB5th EditionBryan Strong, University of California—Santa Cruz, Christine DeVault,Cabrillo College, Barbara Sayad, University of California, Monterey Bayand William Yarber, Indiana University—Bloomington2005 / Softcover with CDROM / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-297490-4 (No selling rights)(Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-111425-7 [IE With CD and Powerweb]Browse: http://www.mhhe.com/strong5CONTENTS1. Perspectives on Human Sexuality2. Studying Human Sexuality3. Female Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response4. Male Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response5. Gender and Gender Roles6. Sexuality Over the Life Span7. Love, Intimacy, and Sexuality8. Communicating about Sex9. Sexual Expression10. Variations in Sexual Behavior11. Contraception and Birth Control12. Conception, Pregnancy, and Childbirth13. The Sexual Body in Health and Illness14. Sexual Difficulties, Dissatisfaction, Enhancement and Therapy15. Sexually Transmitted Infections16. HIV and AIDS17. Sexual Coercion: Harassment, Aggression, and Abuse18. Sexually Explicit Materials, Prostitution, and Sex LawsDIMENSIONS OF HUMAN SEXUALITY6th EditionCurtis O. Byer, Mt. San Antonio College, Louis W. Shainberg, Mt. San AntonioCollege, Grace Galliano, Kennesaw State University and Sharon P. Shriver,Pennsylvania State University2002 / Hardcover / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-241278-9 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-121276-2 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/byer6CONTENTSPart 1: Sexual Dimensions1: Thinking About Human Sexuality2: Communication and Sexuality3: Attraction, Love, PartnershipsPart 2: Physical Sexuality4: Female Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health5: Male Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health6: Sexually Transmitted Infections7: HIV and AIDSPart 3: Sexual Response And Pleasuring8: Sexual Response, Dyfunction and Therapy9: Sexual Pleasuring10: Sexuality in Disability and IllnessPart 4: Developmental Sexuality11: Biological Sexual Development12: Gender Identity and Gender Roles13: Childhood and Adolescent Sexuality14: Adult SexualityPart 5: Reproductive Sexuality15: Fertility Management16: Conception, Pregnancy, and ChildrenPart 6: Social Issues In Sexuality17: 7 Variations in Sexual Behavior18: Commercial and Coercive Sex94

Human SexualityNEWHuman Sexuality –ReadersANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMANSEXUALITY31st EditionBobby Hutchison, Modesto Jr College2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351634-9Available: February 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516341.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.NEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INHUMAN SEXUALITY10TH EDITIONWilliam J Taverner, Fairleigh Dickinson University2008 / 368 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339719-1Available: March 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 199.mhtmlThis Tenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designed tostimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Eachissue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issueintroduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THECLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practicalsuggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom.Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selectedWorld Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Nature of SexIssue 1. Can Sex Be Addictive?Issue 2. Is Oral Sex Really Sex?Issue 3. Is Masters and Johnson’s Model an Accurate Description ofSexual Response?Issue 4. Is the G Spot a Myth?Issue5. Is the Testosterone Patch the Right Cure for Low Libido inWomen?Unit 2. Sex and SchoolsIssue 6. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make SomeCollege Campuses Healthier than Others?Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach About Abstinence?Issue 8. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination Before theyEnroll in School?a Gender Bias?Unit 3. Reproduction TechnologyIssue 10. Should Parents be Allowed to Select the Sex of TheirBaby?Issue 11. Should Emergency Contraception be Available Over theCounter?Issue 12. Should Federal Funding of Stem Cell be Restricted?Unit 4. Sex and SocietyIssue 13. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?Issue 14. Should Society Support Cohabitation Before Marriage?Issue 15. Is Pedophilia Always Harmful?Issue 16. Should Female Circumcision be Banned?Issue 17. Shold the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”?Issue 18. Should Sexual Content on the Internet be Restricted?TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INHUMAN SEXUALITY11th EditionWilliam J Taverner, Fairleigh Dickinson University2010 / Softcover / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-354563-9Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073545635.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY, 11/e presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.95

Human Sexuality96

DEVELOPMENTENGLISHSOCIOLOGYComparative Societies......................................................................................160Criminology – Readers .....................................................................................151Drugs & Society ................................................................................................147Drugs & Society – Readers ..............................................................................149Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers ....................................................126Introductory Sociology – Readers ....................................................................105Introductory Sociology ......................................................................................101Juvenile Delinquency........................................................................................147Marriage & the Family ......................................................................................113Marriage & the Family – Readers .....................................................................115Medical Sociology – Readers ...........................................................................125Political Sociology.............................................................................................133Race and Ethnicity – Readers ..........................................................................132Race and Ethnicity............................................................................................130Race, Class, Gender, and Sexuality .................................................................121Research Methods ...........................................................................................145Sex Roles .........................................................................................................158Social Inequality / Social Strati cation ..............................................................134Social Problems................................................................................................109Social Problems – Readers ..............................................................................110Social Psychology ............................................................................................142Social Psychology – Readers ...........................................................................144Sociological Theory ..........................................................................................137Sociological Theory - Readers .........................................................................139Sociology of Death ...........................................................................................127Sociology of Death – Readers ..........................................................................128Sociology of Education – Readers ...................................................................152Sociology of Family ..........................................................................................117Sociology of Family – Readers .........................................................................119Sociology of Gender .........................................................................................140Sociology of Health – Readers .........................................................................155Sociology of Law – Readers .............................................................................151Sociology of Sexuality ......................................................................................156Sociology of Sexuality – Readers .....................................................................157Sociology of Sport ............................................................................................15297

SOCIOLOGYSociology of Women .........................................................................................139Special Topics – Readers .................................................................................161Special Topics ...................................................................................................161SPSS / SAS ......................................................................................................146Statistics ...........................................................................................................145Technology & Society .......................................................................................159Urban Sociology ...............................................................................................12998

NEW TITLESSOCIOLOGY2010 Author ISBN PageThe Discovery of Society, 8e Collins 978-0-07-340419-6 105, 139Annual Editions: Aging 09/10, 22e Cox 978-0-07-812773-1 126Annual Editions: Computers in Society 09/10, 15e De Palma 978-0-07-352854-0 159Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e Dickinson 978-0-07-812767-0 128Who Rules America? Power, Politics, and Social Change, 6e Domhoff 978-0-07-811156-3 133Drugs in Perspective, 7e Fields 978-0-07-338075-9 147Annual Editions: Sociology 09/10, 38e Finsterbusch 978-0-07-812772-4 106Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, Expanded, 15e Finsterbusch 978-0-07-812750-2 106, 110Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e Hutchison 978-0-07-351634-9 157Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 17e Kromkowski 978-0-07-812762-5 132Annual Editions: Urban Society, 14e Levine 978-0-07-812771-7 129Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 13e Levine 978-0-07-354566-0 125Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, Expanded, 15e Noll 978-0-07-354565-3 152Global Sociology: Introducing Five Contemporary Societies, 5e Schneider 978-0-07-340418-9 105, 160Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 8e Schroeder 978-0-07-351540-3 115, 119Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 11e Taverner 978-0-07-354563-9 157Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10, 24e Wilson 978-0-07-812763-2 1492009American Ethnicity: The Dynamics and Consequences of Discrimination, 6e Aguirre 978-0-07-340421-9 130Statistics for Criminology and Criminal Justice, 3e Bachman 978-0-07-312924-2 145Annual Editions: Violence and Terrorism 08/09, 11e Badey 978-0-07-339776-4 111Sports In Society: Issues and Controversies, 10e Coakley 978-0-07-337654-7 152Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21e Cox 978-0-07-339760-3 127Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Race and Ethnicity, 7e D’Angelo 978-0-07-351537-3 132Annual Editions: Health 09/10, 30e Daniel 978-0-07-351632-5 155The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, 8e DeSpelder 978-0-07-340546-9 127Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology, 5e Disch 978-0-07-338006-3 121, 140Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Science, Technology, and Society, Expanded, 8e Easton 978-0-07-351535-9 159Annual Editions: Education 09/10, 36e Evers 978-0-07-351638-7 153Annual Editions: Social Problems 08/09, 36e Finsterbusch 978-0-07-339768-9 111Annual Editions: Sociology 08/09, 37e Finsterbusch 978-0-07-339767-2 106Classic Edition Sources: Sociology, 4e Finsterbusch 978-0-07-337980-7 107Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, 15e Finsterbusch 978-0-07-351523-6 108, 11299

NEW TITLESSOCIOLOGY2009 Author ISBN PageExperiencing Race, Class, and Gender in the United States, 5e Fiske-Rusciano 978-0-07-352814-4 123Social Psychology, 5e Franzoi 978-0-07-337059-0 142Rethinking the Color Line: Readings in Race and Ethnicity, 4e Gallagher 978-0-07-340427-1 131Annual Editions: The Family 09/10, 35e Gilbert 978-0-07-351637-0 115, 120Annual Editions: Developing World 09/10, 19e Griffiths 978-0-07-339782-5 134Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 13e Hart 978-0-07-338079-7 148Terrorism and Counterterrorism Understanding the New Security Environment, Howard 978-0-07-337979-1 109, 161Readings and Interpretations, 3eSociology: The Core, 9e Hughes 978-0-07-340425-7 101Social Stratification and Inequality, 7e Kerbo 978-0-07-338007-0 134Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4e Kridel 978-0-07-337974-6 154Marriage and Family: The Quest for Intimacy, 7e Lauer 978-0-07-340428-8 113, 117Exploring Social Psychology, 5e Myers 978-0-07-337064-4 143Families: A Sociological Perspective Newman 978-0-07-340416-5 117Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Educational Issues, 15e Noll 978-0-07-351520-5 154The Social Construction of Difference and Inequality: Ore 978-0-07-338008-7 123, 135Race, Class, Gender and Sexuality, 4eThe Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Rosenblum 978-0-07-338005-6 125, 136Social Class, and Sexual Orientation, 5eSociology: A Brief Introduction, 8e Schaefer 978-0-07-340426-4 101Sociology Matters, 4e Schaefer 978-0-07-340431-8 102Women’s Voices, Feminist Visions: Classic and Contemporary Readings, 4e Shaw 978-0-07-351228-0 139Feminist Frontiers, 8e Taylor 978-0-07-340430-1 140Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 4e White 978-0-07-351529-8 142157, 158Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 08/09, 23e Wilson 978-0-07-339773-3 149100

SociologyIntroductory SociologyNEWInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionSOCIOLOGY: THE CORE9th EditionMichael Hughes, VA Poly Institute & State UniversityCarolyn J Kroehler2009 / Softcover / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340425-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128552-0 [IE]Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/hughes9Highly respected for its scholarship and straightforward approach,Sociology: The Core covers core sociological concepts with a briefand accessible presentation at an affordable price. In the ninth edition,Sociology once again comes alive as a vital and exciting eld to relatesociological principles to real-world circumstances. New “What CanSociology Do For You?” sections introduce the careers and provideeducational recommendations for students that decide to pursue adegree in Sociology.NEW TO THIS EDITION Newly added “What Can Sociology Do For You?” boxes linkstudents to the American Sociological Association and other websites, gets them thinking about job possibilities in sociology-relatedfields, and lets them know what sorts of classes they will take if theydecide to major in sociology Features up-to-date data and new citations and examples inevery chapter with figures and text revised to reflect the most recentdata available. Includes enhanced coverage of global warming in discussionof the environment, new contemporary models of city growth, andthe newest population data throughout Chapter 12, Population andEnvironment. Presents data from the 2008 U.S. Religious Landscape Surveyand discusses the new “nonreligious movement” offering the most upto-datecoverage of data relating to religion and religious preferencesin the U.S. Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/CES_Sociology_4e.pdf This convenient guide matches the chapters in Classic EditionSources: Sociology, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in three ofour best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer andHughes/Kroehler.CONTENTSChapter 1: Developing a Sociological ConsciousnessChapter 2: Culture and Social StructureChapter 3: SocializationChapter 4: Social Groups and Formal OrganizationsChapter 5: Deviance and CrimeChapter 6: Social StratificationChapter 7: Inequalities of Race and EthnicityChapter 8: Gender InequalityChapter 9: Political and Economic PowerChapter 10: The FamilyChapter 11: Religion, Education, and MedicineChapter 12: Population and EnvironmentChapter 13: Social Change2009 / Softcover / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340426-4ISBN: 978-0-07-128084-6 [IE]Available: September 2008http://www.mhhe.com/schaefer8eSOCIOLOGY: A BRIEFINTRODUCTION8th EditionRichard T Schaefer, Depaul UniversityThis revised edition of Richard T. Schaefer’s Sociology: A BriefIntroduction provides students with a comprehensive, up-to-datepresentation of sociology. Students learn to think critically aboutsociety and their own lives from a wide range of classical andcontemporary perspectives. Combining balanced coverage oftheory with current research ndings, examples that students canrelate to, and abundant learning aids and exercises, the new editioncontinues to encourage the development of sociological imagination.Greater coverage of globalization through a new chapter and boxesfocusing on “Social Change in the Global Community” help removeethnocentric blinders and teaches students to think globally aboutissues and policies.NEW TO THIS EDITION Even greater coverage of globalization through extendedemphasis on cross-cultural and global content: updated chapter 16(new chapter title) Social Change in the Global Community, “Sociologyin the Global Community” boxes, and timely examples from othercultures are used throughout the text Twenty-seven new boxed sections covering social and politicalissues including campus crime (Ch. 7), stratification in Japan (Ch.9), social mobility among Latino immigrants (Ch. 10),Asian-Americandiversity (Ch. 10), and much more. Ten new chapter-opening excerpts, drawn from sociologicalwriting convey the excitement and relevance of sociological inquiry:Body Ritual Among the Nacirema by Horace Miner (ch. 3), The LuciferEffect: Understanding How Good People Turn Evil by Philip Zambardo(ch. 5), Is Voting for Young People? by Martin P. Watternberg (ch.14), and much more New “Thinking About Movies” feature in each chapter discussestwo movies that are related to the themes of the chapter - Eachfeature includes a brief description of each movie followed by twoapplication questions. “Taking Sociology to Work boxes”present practical applications ofsociology in real life careers explained by real professionals includinga research assistant, a special agent for the US Secret Service, aproduct launch manager, and more. Extensively updated Chapter 11 -Stratification by Gender andChapter 15 - Health Medicine and the Environment contain newsections and boxes: Includes discussion on the three perspectivesapproach to gender, a new Research Today box on gender rolesand volunteer work, a new section about environment problems,and much more101

SociologyCONTENTSChapter-Opening ExcerptsSocial Policy SectionsMaps, Summing Up Tables, and Photo EssaysPreface1 Understanding Sociology2 Sociological Research3 Culture4 Socialization and the Life Course5 Social Interaction, Groups, and Social Structure6 The Mass Media7 Deviance and Social Control8 Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States9 Global Inequality10 Racial and Ethnic Inequality11 Stratification by Gender12 The Family and Intimate Relationships13 Education and Religion14 Government and the Economy15 Health, Medicine, and the Environment16 Social Change in the Global CommunityGlossaryReferencesAcknowledgmentsPhoto CreditsName IndexIndexNEW Updated statistical figures including “Household Income in theUnited States, 2006” and “World-Systems Analysis at the Beginningof the Twenty-First Century” New “Use Your Sociological Imagination” exercises foundthroughout the text encourage students to think critically aboutsociological concepts New and updated data tables found throughout the text including“Sociological Perspectives on Culture” to include the feministperspective, “Mead’s Stages of the Self”, “Sociological Perspectiveson Global Inequality”, “Summing Up” tables and much more Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/CES_Sociology_4e.pdf This convenient guide matches the chapters in Classic EditionSources: Sociology, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in three ofour best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer andHughes/Kroehler.CONTENTSChapter 1: The Sociological ViewChapter 2: Culture and SocializationChapter 3: Social Interaction, Groups, and Social StructureChapter 4: Deviance and Social ControlChapter 5: Stratification in the United States and Global InequalityChapter 6: Inequality by Race and EthnicityChapter 7: Inequality by GenderChapter 8: Social Institutions: Family and ReligionChapter 9: Social Institutions: Education, Government, and theEconomyChapter 10: Population, Community, Health, and the EnvironmentChapter 11: Social Movements, Social Change, and Technology2009 / Softcover / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340431-8Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/schaefersm4eSOCIOLOGY MATTERS4th EditionRichard T Schaefer, Depaul UniversityRichard T. Schaefer’s Sociology Matters is a concise introductionto the discipline of sociology. Its straightforward style, streamlineddesign, and highly focused coverage make it the perfect affordable,ultra brief, introductory text for instructors who use a variety ofmaterials in their course. The new fourth edition includes new chapteropening vignettes and up to date coverage of current topics such asthe Virginia Tech shooting and the use of virtual networks such asFacebook.NEW TO THIS EDITION Up-to-date coverage of current topics added including use ofFacebook and other virtual networks by college students and U.S.troops in the Middle East, the Sociological approach to the study of the2007 shootings at Virginia Tech, the isolation of Iraqi youths from theirpeers as a result of increased terrorism and crime, the social effectsof cell phone use in developing countries, and much more New chapter-opening vignettes including a look at Earth Dayon the Washington Mall as seen through the eyes of a Sociologist,the Police department in Mt. Vernon, New York’s efforts to bridge thelanguage barrier in police work and the practice of self-injury.MAPPING THE SOCIAL LANDSCAPE:READINGS IN SOCIOLOGY5th EditionSusan Ferguson, Grinnell College2008 / 732 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352807-6Available: February 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ferguson5Drawing from a wide selection of classic and contemporary works,the 60 selections in this best-selling reader represent a plurality ofvoices and views within sociology.CONTENTSI. The Sociological PerspectiveSocial ResearchII. CultureIII. SocializationIV. Groups And Social StructureV. Deviance, Crime, And Social ControlVI. Social InequalitySocial ClassGenderRace and EthnicityVII. Social InstitutionsPower and PoliticsMass MediaThe Economy and WorkReligionHealth and MedicineEducationThe FamilyVIII. Social Change102

SociologyInternational EditionTHE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: CORECONCEPTS IN SOCIOLOGY4th EditionLisa J McIntyre, Washington State University-Pullman2008 / 288 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340415-8ISBN: 978-0-07-126367-2 [IE]Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mcintyre4The Practical Skeptic is a concise introduction to sociology thatfocuses on core concepts as the central building blocks forunderstanding sociology. Lisa McIntyre’s straightforward, lively, evenhumorous style and her emphasis on critical thinking make this anengaging and user-friendly text for students of all levels. Throughthis conversational style students are able to grasp key sociologicalconcepts and learn the essential lesson that there is much that goeson in the social world that escapes the sociologically untrained eye.CONTENTSPrefaceIntroductionChapter 1: Responding to Chaos: A Brief History of SociologyChapter 2: The Sociological EyeChapter 3: Science and Fuzzy Objects: Specialization in SociologyChapter 4: Who’s Afraid of Sociology?Chapter 5: The Vocabulary of ScienceChapter 6: Doing Social ResearchChapter 7: CultureChapter 8: Social StructureChapter 9: Society and Social InstitutionsChapter 10: SocializationChapter 11: Deviance and Social ControlChapter 12: Stratification and InequalityChapter 13: Inequality and Achievement: Social ClassChapter 14: Inequality and Ascription: Race, Ethnicity, and GenderReferencesGlossary/IndexCreditsEach chapter ends with End of Chapter Review and Stop and Review:Answers and DiscussionTHE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: READINGS INSOCIOLOGY4th EditionLisa McIntyre, Washington State University—Pullman2008 / 408 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338003-2Available: September 2007The Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology includes classicsociological research writings as well as recent pieces on fascinatingtopics of interest to students. It is the ideal companion to McIntyre’stext, The Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts in Sociology or othersociology texts. Readings in this edition challenge students to reevaluatefamiliar social arenas: the college classroom, televised sportsshows, restaurants, doctors’ of ces and even public restrooms. Thereadings focus around the essential message that there is much thatgoes on in the social world that escapes the sociologically untrainedeye.CONTENTSPart I. The Sociological Imagination1. C. Wright Mills, The Promise2. Stephanie Coontz, How History and Sociology Can Help Today’sFamilies3. Lisa J. McIntyre, Hernando WashingtonPart II. The Research Craft4. Simon Davis, Men as Success Objects and Women as Sex Objects:A Study of Personal Advertisements*5. Gart Wyatt, Skipping Class: An Analysis of Absenteeism AmongFirst-Year College Students6. Lisa J. McIntyre, Doing the Right Thing: Ethics in Social Research7. Philip Meyer, If Hitler Asked You to Electrocute a Stranger, WouldYou? ProbablyPart III. Culture8. Clyde Kluckhohn, Queer Customs9. Horace Miner, Body Ritual Among the Nacirema*10. Cheryl Laz, Act Your Age*11. Laurie Scheuble and David R. Johnson, Marital Name Change:Plans and Attitudes of College Students12. Elijah Anderson, The Code of the Streets*13. William T. Bielby, Rock in a Hard Place: Grassroots CulturalProduction in the Post-Elvis EraPart IV. Social Structure14. Erving Goffman, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life*15. Adrian F. Aventi, The Not-So-Lonely Crowd: Friendship Groupsin Collective Behavior16. Philip G. Zimbardo, Pathology of Imprisonment17. Greta Feoff Paules, “Getting” and “Making” a Tip18. Natalie Adams and Pamela Bettis, Commanding the Room inShort Skirts: Cheering as the Embodiment of Ideal Girlhood*19. Harvey Molotch, The Rest Room and Equal OpportunityPart V. Social Institutions and Socialization*20. Steven Brint, Mary F. Cntrereas, and Michael T. Matthews,Socialization Messages in Primary School: An OrganizationalAnalysis*21. Blake E. Ashford and Glen E. Kreiner, “How Can You Do It?” DirtyWork and the Challenge of Constructing a Positive Identity22. Gwynne Dyer, Anybody’s Son Will Do23. Thomas J. Schmid and Richard S. Jones, Suspended Identity:Identity Transformation in a Maximum Security Prison*24. Lynn Zimmer, How Women Reshape the Prison Guard Role25. Patti A. Giuffre and Christine L. Williams, Not Just Bodies:Strategies for Desexualizing the Physical Examination of PatientsPart VI. Deviance and Social Control26. Émile Durkheim, The Normality of Crime27. William J. Chambliss, The Saints and the Roughnecks28. D. L. Rosenhan, On Being Sane in Insane Places29. A. Ayres Boswell and Joan Z. Spade, Fraternities and CollegiateRape Culture: Why are Some Fraternities More Dangerous Placesfor Women?103

Sociology30. Emily E. LaBeff, Robert E. Clark, Valerie J. Haines, and GeorgeM. Dickhoff, Situational Ethics and College Student Cheating31. Michael L. Benson, Denying the Guilty Mind: Accounting forInvolvement in White-Collar CrimePart VII. Inequality32. James Loewan, The Land of Opportunity33. Barbara Ehrenreich, Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting By inAmerica34. Katherine Newman and Chauncy Lennon, The Job Ghetto35. Joe R. Feagn, Racism*36. Roxanna Harlow, “Race Doesn’t Matter, but...” The Effect of Raceon College Professors’ Experiences and Emotion Management in theUndergraduate College Classroom37. Robin D. G. Kelley, Confessions of a Nice Negro or Why I ShavedMy Head38. Yin Ling Leung, The Model Minority Myth: Asian AmericansConfront Growing Backlash39. Adriane Fugh-Berman, M.D, Tales Out of Medical School*40. Randall Collins, The Sociological Eye and Its BlindersPart 4: SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS14: The Family and Intimate Relationships15: Religion16: Education17: Government and Politics18: The Economy and Work19: Health and MedicinePart 5: Changing Society20: Communities and Urbanization21: Population and the Environment22: Collective Behavior and Social Movements23: Globalization, Technology, and Social ChangeGlossaryReferencesAcknowledgementsPhotoCreditsName IndexSubject IndexInternational EditionSOCIOLOGY11th EditionRichard Schaefer, Depaul University2008 / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340414-1ISBN: 978-0-07-128346-5 [IE]Available: October 2007Website: http://mhhe.com/schaefer11In the eleventh edition of Sociology, Rick Schaefer continues toprovide a comprehensive, up-to-date introduction to sociologythat appeals to students with a diversity of learning styles. Thiscontemporary text focuses on sociology in the global community andencourages students to think about the world they’re living in usinga sociological imagination. With the strongest coverage of race andethnicity, examples of sociology’s real world applications, and in-depthcoverage of currently relevant topics like mass media and social policy,Schaefer’s Sociology is the perfect text for today’s students.CONTENTSAbout the AuthorList of Chapter-Opening ExcerptsList of Boxed Features and Photo EssaysList of Social Policy SectionsList of Maps and Summing Up tablesPrefaceVisual GuidePart 1: The Sociological Perspective1: Understanding Sociology2: Sociological ResearchPart 2: Organizing Social Life3: Culture4: Socialization5: Social Interaction and Social Structure6: Groups and Organizations7: The Mass Media8: Deviance and Social ControlPart 3: Social Inequality9: Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States10: Global Inequality11: Racial and Ethnic Inequality12: Stratification by Gender13: Stratification by AgeTHE SOCIOLOGICALLY EXAMINED LIFE:PIECES OF THE CONVERSATION4th EditionMichael Schwalbe, NC State University—Raleigh2008 / 288 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338011-7Available: December 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/schwalbe4This lively and concise text uses analyses of everyday life to inspirestudents to think sociologically about society and about themselvesas social actors.CONTENTS1. Making Sense of the World Differently2. Inventing the Social World3. Seeing Connections4. Relationships, Groups, and Interdependence5. Becoming Human6. Behavior as a Product of Interaction7. Seeing Patterns8. Contingency and Cause9. Images, Representations, and Accounts10. Understanding Power in Social Life11. Differences and Inequalities12. Studying and Changing the Social World104

SociologyREVISITING SOCIOLOGY(In Chinese)By Keung-Sing Ho2005 / 200 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-124996-6[An Asian Publication]FEATURES Introductory Sociology –ReadersNEWTHE DISCOVERY OF SOCIETY8th EditionRandall Collins, University of PennsylvaniaMichael Makowky, Musart Company2010 / Softocver / 1320 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340419-6Available: April 2009[Details unavailable at press time]NEWInternational EditionSOCIOLOGY: DIVERSITY, CONFLICT, ANDCHANGEKenneth J. Neubeck, Emeritus, University of Connecticut-Storrs DavitaSilfen Glasberg, University of Connecticut-Storrs2005 / 576 pages / SoftcoverISBN: 978-0-07-250476-7ISBN: 978-0-07-111460-8 [IE]GLOBAL SOCIOLOGY: INTRODUCING FIVECONTEMPORARY SOCIETIES5th EditionLinda Schneider and Arnold Silverman of Nassau Community College2010 / Softcover / 352 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340418-9Available: January 2009[Details unavailable at press time]CONTENTS1. The Sociological ImaginationPart One: Core Sociological Concepts2. Social Structure: Macro-Level3. Social Structure: Mid-and Micro-Levels4. Culture5. Socialization6. Systems of Inequality7. Intersection of Race, Class, and Gender8. Deviance, Crime, Resistance, and Social Control9. Social Change and Social MovementsPart Two: Institutional Spheres10. The State and Capital11. Work and Production12. Education13. Health14. Families15. ReligionPart Three: Thinking About The Future16. Emerging Issues105

SociologyNEWNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIOLOGY 09/1038th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland-College Park2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812772-4Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127726.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.2009 / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339767-2Available: March 2008ANNUAL EDITIONS:SOCIOLOGY 08/0937th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College ParkWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 679.mhtmlThis Thirty-Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIOLOGYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITIONNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONSOCIAL ISSUES, EXPANDED15th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park2010 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812750-2Available: March 2009TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com. Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Sociology_0809_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions:Sociology 08/09 with the corresponding chapters in two of our bestsellingMcGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by McIntyre and Schaefer.CONTENTSUnit 1. CulturePart A. Special Cultural IssuesNew! 1. American DreamersPart B. American Culture and Cultural Change2. The Atrophy of Social LifeNew! 3. Understanding American WorldviewPart C. Value Issues4. Diversity within Unity: A New Approach to Immigrants and Minorities,The Communitarian Reader: Beyond the Essentials5. The Dubious Value of Value-NeutralityUnit 2. Socialization and Social ControlPart A. Influences on Personality and BehaviorNew! 6. The Laws of ChemistryNew! 7. Altered Ego8. The New Sex ScorecardPart B. Crime, Law Enforcement, and Social Control9. Fighting CrimeNew! 10. Reforming Juvenile Justice11. The Aggregate Burden of CrimeUnit 3. Groups and Roles in TransitionPart A. Marriage and the Family12. Can Marriage Be Saved?New! 13. The Opt-Out Myth14. Peer MarriagePart B. Gender and Gender Roles15. All Happy FamiliesNew! 16. (Rethinking) GenderPart C. City and CommunityNew! 17. The World Goes to TownNew! 18. The Strange Allure of the SlumsNew! 19. Why Aren’t U.S. Cities Burning?106

SociologyUnit 4. Stratification and Social InequalitiesPart A. Income InequalitiesNew! 20. GoodbyeNew! 21. The Geography of PovertyPart B. Welfare and Welfare Reform22. Welfare ReduxPart C. Racial and Ethnic Issues and Inequalities23. Virtual Equality24. Why We HateNew! 25. The Smog of Race War in LAPart D. Sex Inequalities and IssuesNew! 26. Great Expectations27. Too Many Women in College?28. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and ProstitutionUnit 5. Social Institutions: Issues, Crises, and ChangesPart A. The Political Sphere: Power, Politics, and AdministrationNew! 29. Who Rules America?30. The Great American Pork BarrelNew! 31. Foresight for GovernmentPart B. The Economic Sphere: Changing Consumption, Workplaces,WorkforceNew! 32. Building a More Humane Economy33. The Future of Outsourcing34. Born to BuyPart C. The Social Sphere: Education, Health, and Religion35. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?36. Medical Guesswork37. In Search of the SpiritualUnit 6. Social Change and the futurePart A. Population IssuesNew! 38. Enough AlreadyNew! 39. Putting a Stop to Slave LaborPart B. Environment and Safety40. SOS: We Need a Plan BNew! 41. The Science of Climate ChangeNew! 42. Climate change, Coming HomePart C. Technology for Better or for WorseNew! 43. Who’s Afraid of Human Enhancement?44. Biotech on the FarmPart D. The New Crisis: TerrorismNew! 45. Defeating TerrorismNew! 46. Nightmare in ManhattanPart E. Macro Changes for the World and the United States47. Update on the State of the Future48. Does Globalization Help or Hurt the World’s Poor?49. Understanding Our Moment in HistoryNEWCLASSIC EDITIONSOURCES: SOCIOLOGY4th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland-College Park2009 / Softcover / 272 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337980-7Available: August 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379808.mhtmlThis reader provides over 40 selections of enduring intellectual value--classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--that haveshaped the study of sociology and our contemporary understandingof it.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide:www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/CES_Sociology_4e.pdf This convenient guide matches the chapters in Classic EditionSources: Sociology, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in three ofour best-selling McGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer andHughes/Kroehler.CONTENTSThe Sociological PerspectiveSelection 1: C. WRIGHT MILLS, from The Sociological Imagination(OxfordUniversity Press, 1959) 1Selection 2: HERBERT BLUMER, from “Society as SymbolicInteraction,” in Human Behavior and Social Processes, Arnold Ross,ed. (Houghton Mifflin, 1962) 4CultureSelection 3: J. LAVELLE INGRAM, from “Understanding AmericanWorldview,” in Life in the USA (2007) 9Selection 4: HORACE MINER, from “Body Ritual Among theNacirema,” American Anthropologist (June 1956) 12Selection 5: ELIJAH ANDERSON, from “The Code of the Streets,”The Atlantic Monthly (1994) 15Selection 6: DEBORAH TANNEN, from You Just Don’t Understand(William Morrow, 1990) 20Socialization, Socializing, Human Biotech Potential, and theSocial Construction of SocietySelection 7: MARGARET L. ANDERSEN and DANA HYSOCK, fromThinking about Women, 8/e (Allyn & Bacon, 2009) 25Selection 8: PHYLLIS MOEN and PATRICIA ROEHLING, from TheCareer Mystique: Cracks in the American Dream (Rowman &Littlefield,2005) 30Selection 9: D. STANLEY EITZEN, from “The Atrophy of SocialLife,”Society (September/October 2004) 35Selection 10: ALYSSA FORD, from “Humanity: The Remix,” UtneReader (May/June 2005) 40Selection 11: PETER L. BERGER, from Invitation to Sociology: AHumanistic Perspective (Doubleday, 1963) 45Selection 12: ERVING GOFFMAN, from The Presentation of Self inEveryday Life (Doubleday, 1959) 49Deviance, Crime, and Social ControlSelection 13: JOHN J. DONOHUE, from “Fighting Crime,” MilkinInstitute Review (First Quarter 2005) 55Selection 14: DAVID A. ANDERSON, from “The Aggregate Burden ofCrime,” Journal of Law and Economics (October 1999) 61107

SociologySocial Organization: Groups, Associations, Social Movements,Communities, and Rational OrganizationsSelection 15: ROBERT WUTHNOW, from “How Small Groups AreTransforming Our Lives,” Christianity Today (February 1994) 67Selection 16: FRANCIS FUKUYAMA, from “Social Capital and CivilSociety” (International Monetary Fund, 2000) 71Selection 17: AMITAI ETZIONI, ET AL., from “Diversity within Unity:NewApproach to Immigrants and Minorities,” The CommunitarianReader: Beyond the Essentials (Rowan & Littlefield, 2004)76Selection 18: CHARLES TILLY, from “Social Movements,” in Regimesand Repertoires (University of Chicago Press, 2006) 81Selection 19: FRED SIEGEL, from “The Death and Life of America’sCities,” The Public Interest (Summer 2002) 86Selection 20: CHARLES PERROW, from Organizing America: Wealth,Power, and the Origins of Corporate Capitalism (Princeton UniversityPress, 2002) 91Social InequalitySelection 21: DOUGLAS S. MASSEY, from “How Stratification Works,”from Categorically Unequal: The American Stratification System(Russell Sage Foundation, 2007) 97Selection 22: KARL MARX and FRIEDRICH ENGELS, from TheCommunist Manifesto (1848) 103Selection 23: JEFF MADRICK, from “Goodbye, HoratioAlger,” TheNation (February 5, 2007) 108Selection 24: DAVID K. SHIPLER, from “Connecting the Dots,” inJohn Edwards, et al., Ending Poverty in America (The New Press,2007) 112Views of the Top and the BottomSelection 25: ROBERT PERRUCCI and EARL WYSONG, from“Care and Feeding of the Privileged Class,” The New Class Society(Rowman & Littlefield, 2008) 118Selection 26: JONATHAN KOZOL, from “Poverty’s Children: GrowingUp in the South Bronx,” The Progressive (October 1995) 123Racial and Sexual InequalitySelection 27: NORMAN KELLEY, from “Virtual Equality, VirtualSegregation,” Society (July/August 2006) 130Selection 28: SILVIA ANN HEWLETT and CAROLYN BUCK LUCE,from “Off-Ramps and On-Ramps: Keeping Talented Women on theRoad to Success,” Harvard Business Review (March 2005) 137Selection 29: ALICE LEUCHTAG, from “Human Rights, Sex Trafficking,and Prostitution,” The Humanist (January/February 2003) 144The Political SystemSelection 30: G. WILLIAM DOMHOFF, from Who Rules America?(McGraw-Hill, 2006) 150Selection 31: LILLIAN B. RUBIN, from “Sand Castles and SnakePits: Homelessness, Public Policy, and the Law of UnintendedConsequences,” Dissent Magazine (Fall 2007) 155Selection 32: DAVID OSBORNE and TED GAEBLER, from“Reinventing Government,” in The New Democrat (March 1992)160The EconomySelection 33: BETSY MORRIS and PATRICIA NEERING, from “TheNew Rules,” Fortune (July 24, 2006) 167Selection 34: THOMAS L. FRIEDMAN, from “It’s a Flat World, Afterall,” New York Times Magazine (April 3, 2005) 172The FamilySelection 35: FRANK FURSTENBERG, from “Can Marriage BeSaved?,” Dissent Magazine (Summer 2005) 179Selection 36: PEPPER SCHWARTZ, “Peer Marriage,” TheCommunitarian Reader (Rowman & Littlefield, 2004) 183Selection 37: HUMAN RIGHTS CAMPAIGN, from “Answers toQuestions About Marriage Equality” (Family Net Project, 2004) 189Other Institutions: Education, Health Care, and ReligionSelection 38: CHESTER E. FINN, JR., from “Can the Center Find aSolution That Will Hold?,” Education Next (Winter 2006) 195Selection 39: ROBERT LANGRETH, from “Fixing Hospitals,” ForbesMagazine (June 20, 2005) 200Selection 40: JERRY ADLER, from “In Search of the Spiritual”,Newsweek (August 29–September 5, 2005) 205Population, Environment, and SocietySelection 41: LESTER R. BROWN, from Plan B 3.0 (Earth PolicyInstitute, 2008) 212Selection 42: SARAH DEWEERDT, from “Climate Change, ComingHome: Global Warming’s Effects on Populations,” World WatchMagazine (May/June 2007) 217Global Social ChangeSelection 43: SAMUEL P. HUNTINGTON, from “The ClashofCivilizations?” Foreign Affairs (Summer 1993) 223Selection 44: MARVIN J. CETRON, from “DefeatingTerrorism: IsItPossible? Is It Probable?” The Futurist (May/June 2007) 230Selection 45: STEVEN WEBER, ET AL., from “Globalization WentBad,” Foreign Policy (January/February 2008) 236NEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES15th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park2009 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351523-6Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351523x.mhtmlThis Fifteen Edition of TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designed tostimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Eachissue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issueintroduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES INTHE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073343900 is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Social_Issues_15e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: SocialIssues, 15/e with the corresponding chapters in two best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer.CONTENTSUnit 1 Culture And ValuesIssue 1 Is America in Moral Decline?Issue 2 Does the Media Have a Liberal Bias?Issue 3 Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way ofLife?Unit 2 Sex Roles, Gender, And The FamilyIssue 4 Does Divorce Have Long-Term Damaging Effects onChildren?Issue 5 Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children?Issue 6 Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?Unit 3 Stratification And InequalityIssue 7 Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem?Issue 8 Has Feminism Benefited American Society?Issue 9 Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness?108

SociologyIssue 10 Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to Girls andWomen?Unit 4 Political Economy And InstitutionsIssue 11 Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist Economy?Issue 12 Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor?Issue 13 Is Competition the Reform that Will Fix Education?Issue 14 Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and EnhanceHumans?Unit 5 Crime And Social ControlIssue 15 Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime?Issue 16 Should Marijuana Be Legalized?Issue 17 Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant the Curtailment ofCivil Liberties?Unit 6 The Future: Population/Environment/SocietyIssue 18 Is Humankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?Issue 19 Is Globalization Good for Humankind?CONTENTSUnit I Defining the ThreatChapter 1 Defining Terrorism: Means, Ends, and MotivesChapter 2 Understanding the Facilitators of Modern TerrorismChapter 3 The New TerrorismChapter 4 Religion and the Intersection with TerrorismChapter 5 Modern Methods and Modes of AttackUnit II Countering the Terrorist ThreatChapter 6 Terrorism and the MediaChapter 7 The Challenges of Terrorism to a Free SocietyChapter 8 Strategies and Approaches for Combating TerrorismChapter 9 Leveraging the Role of the Private SectorChapter 10 Winning the War on TerrorismNEWSocial ProblemsTERRORISM ANDCOUNTERTERRORISMUNDERSTANDING THE NEWSECURITY ENVIRONMENT,READINGS ANDINTERPRETATIONS3rd EditionRussell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer ofUS Military AcademyNatasha E Bajema2009 / 696 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337979-1Available: February 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 794.mhtmlIn this new edition of TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM:UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT,READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS, Brigadier General (Retired)Russell Howard, Major Reid Sawyer and Natasha Bajema havecollected original and previously published seminal articles andessays by political scientists, government of cials, and members ofthe nation’s armed forces. The editors and several of the authors writefrom practical eld experience in the nation’s war on terrorism. Othershave had signi cant responsibility for planning government policyand responses. The contributors include a majority of the signi cantnames in the eld including John Arquilla, Richard Betts, MarthaCrenshaw, Rohan Gunaratna, Bruce Hoffman and Paul Pillar. PartOne of the book analyzes the philosophical, political, and religiousroots of terrorist activities around the world and discusses the national,regional, and global effects of historical and recent acts of terrorism.In addition to material on the threats from suicide bombers, as wellas chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear weapons, thereare also important contributions analyzing new and growing threatssuch as genomic terrorism. Part Two deals with past, present, andfuture national and international responses to--and defenses against--terrorism. Essays and articles in this section analyze and debatethe practical, political, ethical, and moral questions raised by militaryand non-military responses (and pre-emptive actions) outside of thecontext of declared war. This section has expanded on the previousedition to include three timely chapters on terrorism and the media,the role of the private sector, and winning the war on terrorism.WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION ANDTERRORISMRussell D Howard, US Military AcademyJames J F Forest, US Military Academy2008 / 624 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337970-8Available: March 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 700.mhtml)In TERRORISM AND WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION ANDDISRUPTION, Brigadier General (Retired) Russell Howard and Dr.James Forest have collected original and previously published seminalarticles and essays by scientists, academics, government of cials,and members of the nation’s security and intelligence communities.The editors and several of the authors write from practical eldexperience in nonproliferation and counterterrorism efforts. Othershave had signicant responsibility for developing government policiesto address the threat of weapons of mass destruction and terrorism.The contributors include a majority of the signicant names in the eldincluding Bruce Hoffman, Brian Jenkins, Jonathan Tucker, RohanGunaratna, David Franz, Richard Betts, William Rosenau, and DavidAlbright. Unit One of the book introduces key terms and addressesimportant strategic and policy debates. Authors explain how the newforms of terrorism affect the post-9/11 security environment andintroduce the notion that weapons of mass destruction could giveterrorists short-term, asymmetric attack advantages over conventionalmilitary forces. Unit Two offers detailed accounts of the characteristics,availability, and dangers of specic types of WMD, along with four casestudies that associate theory with practice—an important feature ofthis volume. Unit Three deals with past, present, and future nationaland international responses to—and defenses against—the threat ofWMD terrorism. and in the nal section of the volume, authors predictfuture WMD threats and seek to draw on past events and mistakesin order to identify lessons and strategies for the future.Appendices include a primer on bioterrorism and fact sheets onchemical, biological, nuclear and radiological terrorism.CONTENTSPart I. IntroductionChapter 1.1 Definitions, Trends, and the Concept of “NewTerrorism”Chapter 1.2 The Nature of the Post-9/11 WMD Terrorism ThreatChapter 1.3 The WMD Terrorism HypeChapter 1.4 The Terrorist WMD of ChoicePart II. Understanding The ThreatChapter 2.1 Different “Faces” of Nuclear TerrorismChapter 2.2 Radiological Dispersal DevicesChapter 2.3 Sabotage of Nuclear Facilities and other CriticalInfrastructureChapter 2.4 BioterrorismChapter 2.5 Chemical TerrorismChapter 2.6 Food Security and Agricultural and TerrorismChapter 2.7 CyberterrorismChapter 2.8 Case Study #1: Ricin Plot in London 2003109

SociologyChapter 2.9 Case Study #2: Jemaah IslamiyahChapter 2.10 Case Study #3: Aum ShinrikyoChapter 2.11 Case Study #4: al QaedaChapter 2.12 Case Study #5: A.Q. Khan NetworkChapter 2.13 Case Study #6: Iraq as an Example of State-DirectedWMD TerrorismPart III. Responding to the ThreatChapter 3.1 Deterrence and PreemptionChapter 3.2 Intelligence and WMDChapter 3.3 WMD Detection TechnologyChapter 3.4 Nonproliferation RegimesChapter 3.5 Interdiction and Law EnforcementChapter 3.6 Case Study #1: The Public Health Response to the 2001Anthrax AttacksChapter 3.7 Case Study #2: Hurricane Katrina and EmergencyResponseChapter 3.8 Case Study #3: The Response to the 1995 Attack inTokyo, JapanPart IV. Lessons Learned and Future ThreatsChapter 4.1 The Need for a Comprehensive, MultidimensionalStrategyChapter 4.2 Gaps in the International Framework for CombatingTerrorismChapter 4.3 Future ThreatsChapter 4.4 ConclusionAppendixSOCIAL PROBLEMS AND THE QUALITY OFLIFE11th EditionRobert Lauer, Alliant International University2008 / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338012-4Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lauersp11GlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexNEWSocial Problems –ReadersTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONSOCIAL ISSUES, EXPANDED15th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park2010 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812750-2Available: March 2009TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.Focusing on quality of life, this text de nes what a social problem isand then addresses speci c issues—for example, how can one gaina sociological understanding of social problems? What kinds of criticalthinking should one engage in and what kinds should one avoid inattempting to understand social problems? How is the quality of one’slife affected by particular problems? What causes these problems andhow can we resolve them? Part One establishes key approaches tosocial problems; the remaining parts discuss the social problems thatmost acutely impact the quality of our lives.CONTENTSPart One: Foundations1. Understanding Social ProblemsPart Two: Problems of Behavioral Deviance2. Sexual Deviance3. Alcohol and Other Drugs4. Crime and Delinquency5. ViolencePart Three: Problems of Inequality6. Poverty7. Gender and Sexual Orientation8. Race, Ethnic Groups, and RacismPart Four: Problems of Social Institutions9. Government and Politics10. Work and the Economy11. Education12. Family Problemsl3. Health Care and Illness: Physical and MentalPart Five: Global Social Problems14. War and Terrorism15. The Environment110

SociologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS:VIOLENCE ANDTERRORISM 08/0911th EditionThomas J Badey, Randolph-Macon College30. Cross-Regional Trends in Female Terrorism31. Explosive Baggage: Female Palestinian Suicide Bombers andthe Rhetoric of EmotionNew! 32. The Bomb Under the AbayaNew! 33. Picked Last: Women and Terrorism,Alisa Stack-O’ConnorUnit 9. Government ResponseNew! 34. The Eye of the Storm35. Port Security Is Still a House of Cards36. Are We Ready Yet?New! 37. Held Without Trial in the USAUnit 10. Future ThreatsNew! 38. From the War on Terror to Global Counterinsurgency39. The Terrorism to Come2009 (February 2008) / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339776-4Available: February 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 768.mhtmlThis Eleventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: VIOLENCE ANDTERRORISM provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906 is offered as apractical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Concept of Terrorism1. Ghosts of Our Past, Karen Armstrong2. An Essay on Terrorism3. The Origins of the New TerrorismNew! 4. The Myth of the Invincible TerroristUnit 2. Tactics of Terrorism5. Paying for TerrorNew! 6. Toy SoldiersUnit 3. State-Sponsored TerrorismNew! 7. Iran’s Suicide BrigadesNew! 8. Hizballah and Syria9. Guerrilla Nation10. The Growing Syrian Missile Threat: Syria after LebanonUnit 4. International Terrorism11. Colombia and the United States: From Counternarcotics toCounterterrorismNew! 12. Wounded But Still DangerousNew! 13. Peace at Last?14. Root Causes of Chechen Terror15. End of Terrorism?Unit 5. Terrorism in America16. Homegrown TerrorNew! 17. Green RageNew! 18. Echoes of the FutureNew! 19. Casting a Wider Net20. Speaking for the Animals, or the Terrorists?21. José Padilla and the War on RightsUnit 6. Terrorism and the Media22. A Violent Episode in the Virtual World23. Terror’s ServerNew! 24. The Globe of VillagesNew! 25. Congress and the “YouTube War,”Unit 7. Terrorism and ReligionNew! 26. Qutbism: An Ideology of Islamic-Fascism27. The Madrassa ScapegoatNew! 28. Holy OrdersUnit 8. Women and TerrorismNew! 29. Female Suicide Bombers: A Global TrendNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIALPROBLEMS 08/0936th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park2009 / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339768-9Available: September 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397687.mhtmlThis Thirty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMSprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; and an online instructor’s resource guide with testingmaterials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM isoffered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Social_Problems_0910.pdf This convenient guide matches the Units in Annual Editions:Social Problems 09/10 with the corresponding Chapters in one ofour best-selling McGraw-Hill Social Problems textbooks by Lauer/Lauer.CONTENTSUnit 1: Introduction: The Nature of Social Problems and GeneralCritiques of American Society1. Social Problems: Definitions, Theories, and Analysis2. The Fragmentation of Social Life,3. How to Re-Moralize AmericaUnit 2: Problems of the Political EconomyPart A. The Polity4. Who Rules America?5. Inside the Hidden World of Earmarks6. Our Incompetent Government7. Rights, Liberties, and SecurityPart B. The Economy8. Evaluating Economic Change9. The New Rules111

Sociology10. Debtor Nation11. Born to BuyPart C. Problems of Place12. Why Aren’t U.S. Cities Burning?013. Phantom Menace14. The Invisible OnesUnit 3: Problems of Poverty and InequalityPart A. Inequality and the Poor15. How Stratification Works16. Goodbye17. Can Extreme Poverty Be Eliminated?Part B. Welfare18. Welfare ReduxPart C. Racial and Ethnic Inequality and Issues19. Virtual Equality20. Why We Hate21. American DreamersPart D. Gender Inequalities and Issues22. Great Expectations23. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution24. All Happy FamiliesUnit 4: Institutional ProblemsPart A. The Family25. The Frayed Knot26. The Opt-Out Myth27. (Rethinking) Gender28. Overworked, Time Poor, and Abandoned by Uncle Sam 29. PeerMarriagePart B. Education30. Against School31. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?Part C. Health32. Fixing Hospitals, Robert Langreth33. Medical GuessworkUnit 5: Crime, Law Enforcement, and TerrorismPart A. Crime34. Fighting Crime35. The Aggregate Burden of Crime36. DrugsPart B. Law Enforcement37. Causes and Consequences of Wrongful Convictions38. Reforming Juvenile Justice39. America IncarceratedPart C. Terrorism40. Defeating Terrorism41. Nightmare in ManhattanUnit 6: Problems of Population, Environment, Technology, andthe FuturePart A. Population and Environment Issues42. Enough Already43. SOS: We Need a Plan B44. The Science of Climate ChangePart B. Technological Issues45. Who’s Afraid of Human Enhancement?46. The Secret Nuclear WarPart C. The Future47. Update on the State of the Future48. How Globalization Went Bad49. Understanding Our Moment in HistoryNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES15th EditionKurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park2009 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351523-6Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351523x.mhtmlThis Fifteen Edition of TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designed tostimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Eachissue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issueintroduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES INTHE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073343900 is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Social_Issues_15e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides: SocialIssues, 15/e with the corresponding chapters in two best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Sociology textbooks by Schaefer.CONTENTSUnit 1 Culture and ValuesIssue 1 Is America in Moral Decline?Issue 2 Does the Media Have a Liberal Bias?Issue 3 Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way ofLife?Unit 2 Sex Roles, Gender, and the FamilyIssue 4 Does Divorce Have Long-Term Damaging Effects onChildren?Issue 5 Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children?Issue 6 Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?Unit 3 Stratification and InequalityIssue 7 Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem?Issue 8 Has Feminism Benefited American Society?Issue 9 Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness?Issue 10 Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to Girls andWomen?Unit 4 Political Economy and InstitutionsIssue 11 Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist Economy?Issue 12 Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor?Issue 13 Is Competition the Reform that Will Fix Education?Issue 14 Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and EnhanceHumans?Unit 5 Crime and Social ControlIssue 15 Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime?Issue 16 Should Marijuana Be Legalized?Issue 17 Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant the Curtailment ofCivil Liberties?Unit 6 The Future: Population/Environment/SocietyIssue 18 Is Humankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?Issue 19 Is Globalization Good for Humankind?112

SociologyANNUAL EDITIONS: HOMELAND SECURITY2nd EditionThomas J Badey, Randolph-Macon College2008 / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339730-6Available: March 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 30x.mhtmlThis Second Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HOMELAND SECURITYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Concept of Homeland SecurityNew! 1. Homeland SecurityNew! 2. Terrorism: How Much Are We Willing to Take?New! 3. Lethal FantasiesNew! 4. Why We Don’t PrepareUnit 2. The Department of Homeland SecurityNew! 5. Are We Ready for the Next 9/11?New! 6. Revisiting Homeland SecurityNew! 7. Shifting Priorities: Congressional Incentives and theHomeland Security Granting ProcessNew! 8. Airport Security Screening: Privatize or Federalize?Unit 3. The Federal Government and Homeland SecurityNew! 9. The Doom BoomNew! 10. Immigration and National SecurityNew! 11. Senators Say Scrap FEMA and Start OverUnit 4. State and Local Governments and Homeland SecurityNew! 12. Terrorism’s Impact on State Law EnforcementNew! 13. State of ReadinessNew! 14. New York State of MindNew! 15. Blame Amid the TragedUnit 5. First RespondersNew! 16. Antiterrorist Policing in New York City After 9/11: ComparingPerspectives on a Complex ProcessNew! 17. Community Policing and TerrorismNew! 18. D.C. Deploys Wireless Net for First RespondersNew! 19. The Front Line in Training for DisastersUnit 6. New Technologies in Homeland SecurityNew! 20. Guarding Against MissilesNew! 21. Modernizing Homeland SecurityNew! 22. Hesitation at Homeland SecurityNew! 23. Thanks, Dubai!Unit 7. Vulnerabilities and ThreatsNew! 24. Thwarting Nuclear TerrorismNew! 25. Bioterrorism—Preparing to Fight the Next WarNew! 26. These Chemicals Are So DeadlyNew! 27. Port Security Is Still a House of CardsUnit 8. Civil Liberties and Civil RightsNew! 28. Island MentalityNew! 29. The Truth about TortureNew! 30. Civil Liberties and Homeland Security31. Homeland Security and the Lessons of Waco32. Heading in the Wrong Direction33. Mining Personal DataUnit 9. Intelligence and Homeland SecurityNew! 34. U.S. Intelligence: A Losing PropositionNew! 35. In Defence of the Intelligence ServicesNew! 36. Can Spies Be Made Better?New! 37. We Have Not Correctly Framed the Debate on IntelligenceReformUnit 10. The Future of Homeland SecurityNew! 38. Department of Homeland Security: Charting a PathForwardNew! 39. The Terrorism IndexNew! 40. Building an Agile Homeland Security EstablishmentNew! 41. Fighters, Not First RespondersMarriage & the FamilyNEW2009 / Softcover / 496 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340428-8Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf7MARRIAGE AND FAMILY:THE QUEST FOR INTIMACY7th EditionRobert H Lauer and Jeanette C Lauer ofAlliant International UniversityMarriage & Family combines a positive and practical approach tothe study of marriage and family life with a manageable amount ofsociological theory and research citations. The text not only providesstudents with a basic understanding of marriage and family life buthelps them apply the knowledge to enrich their lives and nurture theirown intimate relationships.NEW TO THIS EDITION Includes the latest available research - more than 500 newreferences from the professional literature and the latest governmentdata in addition to updated knowledge about intimate relationships Book was revised to be easier to use in one semester throughthe elimination of Chapter 5, Getting to Know Someone Else (andthe restructuring of chapters to include important information fromthe removed chapter) Revision of all On the Web sections at the end of each chapterto suggest better sites and more challenging projects New section on the social context of family life and expandedmaterials on the Hispanic family (chapter 2) New “Comparison” boxes on unwanted sex in China, datingviolence in Russia, corporal punishment and aggression in Singapore,and much moreCONTENTSList of FiguresList of TablesPrefaceA Guided TourPart One. The Context of Intimacyl. Marriage and Family in America: Needs, Myths, and Dreams2. Diversity in Families3. Gender Roles: Foundation for Intimacy4. SexualityPart Two: Seeking Intimate Relationships5. Getting Involved6. Falling in Love113

Sociology7. Selecting a Life PartnerPart Three: The Intimate Couple8. Getting Married9. The Challenge of Communication10. Power and Conflict in Marriage11. Work and HomePart Four: Intimacy in Families12. Becoming a Parent13. The Family Life CyclePart Five: Challenges to Intimacy14. Family Crises15. Separation and Divorce16. Remarriage and StepfamiliesEpilogue: The Quest Revisited: Why Bother?GlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexPUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER5th EditionAndrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University2008 / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352809-0Available: November 2006This reader examines the family through two lenses--the familiarprivate family, in which we live our personal lives, and the publicfamily, in which we deal with broader societal issues, such as raisingthe next generation, and the care of the elderly. Consequently,these readings look both at intimate, personal concerns, such aswhether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmentalpolicies that affect families. The reader corresponds exactly to andis published concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and PrivateFamilies: An Introduction; both the textbook and the reader have 15same-named chapters.CONTENTSPrefacePart One: IntroductionChapter 1: Public and Private FamiliesChapter 2: The History of the FamilyPart Two: Gender, Class, and Race-EthnicityChapter 3: Gender and FamiliesChapter 4: Social Class and FamiliesChapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and FamiliesPart Three: Sexuality, Partnership, and MarriageChapter 6: SexualitiesChapter 7: Cohabitation and MarriageChapter 8: Work and FamiliesPart Four: Links Across the GenerationsChapter 9: Children and ParentsChapter 10: The Elderly and Their FamiliesPart Five: Conflict, Disruption, and ReconstitutionChapter 11: Domestic ViolenceChapter 12: DivorceChapter 13: Remarriage and StepfamiliesPart Six: Family and SocietyChapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social PolicyChapter 15: Social Change and FamiliesReferencesINTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS, MARRIAGESAND FAMILIES7th EditionMary Kay DeGenova, University of of New HampshireF Philip Rice (deceased)2008 / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352810-6Available: September 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/degenova7This comprehensive introduction to marriage and the familycombines the most current research base with an emphasis on familybackground and diversity. It presents a positive perspective on familiesand focuses on the importance of public and social policy in the livesof families. Each chapter concludes with a section on public policyand critical thinking questions. The text makes research and statisticseasy for students to follow and understand, and it integrates culturaldiversity throughout.CONTENTSChapter 1: Intimate Relationships, Marriages, and Families in theTwenty-First CenturyChapter 2: Family Backgrounds and How They Influence UsChapter 3: Gender: Identity and RolesChapter 4: Being SingleChapter 5: Attraction and DatingChapter 6: Love and Mate SelectionChapter 7: Qualities of a Successful MarriageChapter 8: Marital Relationships over The Family Life CycleChapter 9: Work, Family Roles, and Material ResourcesChapter 10: Power, Decision Making, and CommunicationChapter 11: Family Planning and ParentingChapter 12: Pregnancy and ChildbirthChapter 13: Parent-Child RelationshipsChapter 14: Parents and Extended Family RelationshipsChapter 15: Conflict, Family Crises, and Crisis ManagementChapter 16: The Family and DivorceChapter 17: Coming Together: Remarriage and StepparentingGlossaryReferencesCreditsIndex114

SociologyMARRIAGE AND FAMILIESINTIMACY, DIVERSITY AND STRENGTHS,6th EditionDavid H Olson, University of Minnesota--MinneapolisJohn DeFrain, University of Nebraska—LincolnLinda Skogrand, Utah State University-Logan2008 / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338004-9Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson6This introduction to marriages and families accentuates the positiveaspects of relationships and focuses on enriching students’ knowledgeand experience in building strong, successful couple and familyrelationships. The authors, both seasoned family scholars andtherapists, integrate research, theory, and practical application withan interdisciplinary perspective on marriage and family.CONTENTSBrief ContentsBoxed FeaturesAbout the AuthorsPrefaceA Visual PreviewPart One: The Social Context of Intimate RelationshipsChapter One. Perspectives on Intimate RelationshipsChapter Two. Cultural Diversity: Family Strengths and ChallengesChapter Three. Understanding Marriage and Family DynamicsPart Two: Dynamics Of Intimate RelationshipsChapter Four. Communication and IntimacyChapter Five. Conflict and Conflict ResolutionChapter Six. Sexual IntimacyChapter Seven. Gender Roles and Power In the FamilyChapter Eight. Managing Economic ResourcesPart Three. Stages of Intimate RelationshipsChapter Nine. Friendship, Intimacy, and SinglehoodChapter Ten. Dating, Mate Selection, and Living TogetherChapter Eleven. Marriage: Building a Strong FoundationChapter Twelve. Parenthood: Choices and ChallengesChapter Thirteen. Midlife and Older CouplesPart Four. Challenges and OpportunitiesChapter Fourteen. Stress, Abuse, and Family ProblemsChapter Fifteen. Divorce, Single-Parent Families, and StepfamiliesChapter Sixteen. Strengthening Marriages and FamiliesAppendicesAppendix A. Couple and Family ScalesAppendix B. Family Science and Family Research MethodsAppendix C. Contraception and Abortion Optionsappendix D. Pregnancy and ChildbirthGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexMarriage & the Family –ReadersNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INFAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS8th EditionElizabeth Schroeder2010 / Softcover / 320 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351540-3Available: March 2009Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351540x.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS,8/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website.Visit www.mhcls.com.NEWANNUAL EDITIONS: THEFAMILY 09/1035th EditionKathleen R Gilbert, Indiana University-Bloomington2009 / Softcover / 192 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351637-0Available: August 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516376.mhtmlThis THIRTY-FIFTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotatedtable of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviewsfor each section; a topical index; and an online instructor’s resourceguide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THECLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_TheFamily_0910.pdf115

Sociology This convenient guide matches the Units in Annual Editions:The Family 09/10 with the corresponding Chapters in two of ourbest-selling McGraw-Hill Marriage, Family, and Intimacy textbooksby Olson et al. and Miller et al.CONTENTSUnit 1: Evolving Perspectives on the Family1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience2. Interracial Families3. Children as a Public GoodUnit 2: Exploring and Establishing RelationshipsPart A. Love and Sex4. This Thing Called Love5. Pillow Talk, Nina Utne6. How to Talk about SexPart B. Choosing a Mate7. On-Again, Off-AgainPart C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation8. A New Fertility Factor9. Starting the Good Life in the Womb10. Breeder Reaction11. Adopting a New American FamilyUnit 3: Family RelationshipsPart A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships12. Free As a Bird and Loving It13. Gay Marriage Lite14. Two Mommies and a Daddy15. Marriage at First Sight16. Couple TherapyPart B. Relationships between Parents and Children17. Kaleidoscope of Parenting Cultures18. Do We Need a Law to Prohibit Spanking?19. Prickly Père20. When Parents Hover Over Kids’ Job Search21. Last Hope in a Weak Economy?Part C. Other Family Relationships22. Being a Sibling23. Aunties and Uncles24. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of CulturalCrisis25. Aging Japanese Pen Messages to PosterityUnit 4: Challenges and OpportunitiesPart A. Family Violence and Chaos26. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse27. The Myths and Truths of Family AbductionPart B. Substance Abuse28. Children of AlcoholicsPart C. Infidelity29. My Cheatin’ Heart30. Love but Don’t Touch31. Is This Man Cheating on His Wife?Part D. Economic Concerns32. Becoming Financial Grown-Ups33. Making Time for Family TimePart E. Illness and Death in the Family34. Partners Face Cancer Together35. A Guide for Caregivers36. Caring for the Caregiver37. Bereavement after CaregivingPart F. War and Terror38. Terrorism, Trauma, and ChildrenPart F. Divorce and Remarriage39. A Divided House40. Civil Wars41. Stepfamily Success Depends on IngredientsUnit 5: Families, Now and into the Future42. The 3rd National Family History Initiative43. Get a Closer Look44. Spirituality and Family Nursing45. The Joy of Rituals46. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades47. The Consumer Crunch48. Sparking Interest in Nature—Family StyleTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INFAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS7th EditionElizabeth Schroeder2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339714-6Available: May 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 148.mhtmlThis Seventh Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INFAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Parental Decision-Making: What’s Best for Children…OrWhat’s Best for ParentsIssue 1. Is It Ever Appropriate to Spank A Child?Issue 2. Should Adoptive Parents Only Adopt within Their Own Racial/Ethnic Group?Issue 3. Does Divorce Create Long-Term Negative Effects forChildren?Issue 4. Should Parents Homeschool Their Children?Issue 5. Do Mothers Who Work Outside the Home Have a NegativeEffect on Their Children?Unit 2. How Much Control Should Parents Have Over TheirChildren?Issue 6. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messagefor Teens?Issue 7. Should Parents Routinely Vaccinate Their Children?Issue 8. Should Parents be Able to Select the Biological Sex of TheirChildren?Issue 9. Should Parents Surgically Alter Their Intersex InfantsIssue 10. Should Minors Be Required to Get Their Parents’ Permissionin Order to Obtain an Abortion?Unit 3. Revisiting Ozzie and Harriet: Same-Sex Couples andTheir Families Fit InIssue 11. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Allowed to Marry?Issue 12. Should the U.S. Constitution Be Amended to DefineMarriage?Issue 13. Should Lesbians and Gay Individuals be Allowed to AdoptChildren?Issue 14. Is Cybersex “Cheating”?Issue 15. Are Open Relationships Healthy?Issue 16. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?Issue 17. Should Men Who Have Sex with Men Be Allowed to DonateBlood?Issue 18. Are Statutory Rape Laws Effective at Protecting Minors?116

SociologySociology of FamilyNEW2009 / Softcover / 496 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340428-8Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf7MARRIAGE AND FAMILY:THE QUEST FOR INTIMACY7th EditionRobert H Lauer and Jeanette C Lauer ofAlliant International UniversityMarriage & Family combines a positive and practical approach tothe study of marriage and family life with a manageable amount ofsociological theory and research citations. The text not only providesstudents with a basic understanding of marriage and family life buthelps them apply the knowledge to enrich their lives and nurture theirown intimate relationships.NEW TO THIS EDITION Includes the latest available research - more than 500 newreferences from the professional literature and the latest governmentdata in addition to updated knowledge about intimate relationships Book was revised to be easier to use in one semester throughthe elimination of Chapter 5, Getting to Know Someone Else (andthe restructuring of chapters to include important information fromthe removed chapter) Revision of all On the Web sections at the end of each chapterto suggest better sites and more challenging projects New section on the social context of family life and expandedmaterials on the Hispanic family (chapter 2) New “Comparison” boxes on unwanted sex in China, datingviolence in Russia, corporal punishment and aggression in Singapore,and much moreCONTENTSList of FiguresList of TablesPrefaceA Guided TourPart One. The Context of Intimacyl. Marriage and Family in America: Needs, Myths, and Dreams2. Diversity in Families3. Gender Roles: Foundation for Intimacy4. SexualityPart Two: Seeking Intimate Relationships5. Getting Involved6. Falling in Love7. Selecting a Life PartnerPart Three: The Intimate Couple8. Getting Married9. The Challenge of Communication10. Power and Conflict in Marriage11. Work and HomePart Four: Intimacy in Families12. Becoming a Parent13. The Family Life CyclePart Five: Challenges to Intimacy14. Family Crises15. Separation and Divorce16. Remarriage and StepfamiliesEpilogue: The Quest Revisited: Why Bother?GlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexNEW2009 / Hardcover / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340416-5Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/newman1FAMILIES: A SOCIOLOGICALPERSPECTIVEDavid M Newman, Depauw UniversitySociology of Families is an exciting new text from David Newman thatsuccessfully connects to students’ personal lives while showing howsociologists understand and explain families. It is not only informativein terms of current sociological knowledge of families, but meaningfulin terms of contemporary family debates and applicable to students’own family experiences. What Does it All Mean?, Going Global,and See for Yourself sections appear throughout the text allowingstudents to think and perform experiments like sociologists to exploretheoretical concepts to better understand their own family lives aswell as those of others.CONTENTSPart I Families And Society1 Defining Families2 Declining and Enduring Families3 Measuring FamiliesPart II Families and Social Inequalities4 Gendered Families5 Diverse Families/Similar Families6 Unequal FamiliesPart III Families and Relationships7 Love, Sexuality, and Relationship Formation8 Marriage and Cohabitation9 Work and FamilyPart IV Families Over The Life Course10 Entering Parenthood11Childhood and Adolescence12 Adulthood and Later LifePart V Families and Challenges13 Intimate Violence14 Divorce and Remarriage15 Change, Stability, and Future Families117

SociologyPUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIESAN INTRODUCTION5th EditionAndrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University2008 / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352808-3Available: October 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cherlin5Nationally recognized for its sound scholarship and balancedapproach and written by one of the leading authorities in the eld,this text examines the family through two lenses: the familiar privatefamily in which we live most of our personal lives, and the public familyin which we, as adults, deal with broader societal issues such as thecare of the elderly, the increase in divorce, and childbearing outsideof marriage. The book looks at intimate personal concerns, such aswhether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmentalpolicies that affect families. Distinctive chapters – Chapter 9, “Childrenand Parents;” Chapter 10, “The Elderly and Their Families;” andChapter 14, “The Family, the State and Social Policy” – examineissues of great current interest, such as income assistance to poorfamilies, the effects of out-of-home childcare, and the costs of theSocial Security and Medicare programs.CONTENTSPart I: IntroductionChapter 1: Public and Private FamiliesChapter 2: The History of the FamilyPart II: Gender, Class, and Race-EthnicityChapter 3: Gender and FamiliesChapter 4: Social Class and FamiliesChapter 5: Race, Ethnicity, and FamiliesPart III: Sexuality, Partnership, and MarriageChapter 6: SexualitiesChapter 7: Cohabitation and MarriageChapter 8: Work and FamiliesPart IV: Links Across the GenerationsChapter 9: Children and ParentsChapter 10: The Elderly and Their FamiliesPart V: Conflict, Disruption, and ReconstitutionChapter 11: Domestic ViolenceChapter 12: DivorceChapter 13: Remarriage and StepfamiliesPart VI: Family And SocietyChapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social PolicyChapter 15: Social Change and FamiliesPUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER5th EditionAndrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University2008 / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352809-0Available: November 2006This reader examines the family through two lenses--the familiarprivate family, in which we live our personal lives, and the publicfamily, in which we deal with broader societal issues, such as raisingthe next generation, and the care of the elderly. Consequently,these readings look both at intimate, personal concerns, such aswhether to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmentalpolicies that affect families. The reader corresponds exactly to andis published concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and PrivateFamilies: An Introduction; both the textbook and the reader have 15same-named chapters.CONTENTSPrefacePart One: IntroductionChapter 1: Public and Private FamiliesChapter 2: The History of the FamilyPart Two: Gender, Class, and Race-EthnicityChapter 3: Gender and FamiliesChapter 4: Social Class and FamiliesChapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and FamiliesPart Three: Sexuality, Partnership, and MarriageChapter 6: SexualitiesChapter 7: Cohabitation and MarriageChapter 8: Work and FamiliesPart Four: Links Across the GenerationsChapter 9: Children and ParentsChapter 10: The Elderly and Their FamiliesPart Five: Conflict, Disruption, and ReconstitutionChapter 11: Domestic ViolenceChapter 12: DivorceChapter 13: Remarriage and StepfamiliesPart Six: Family and SocietyChapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social PolicyChapter 15: Social Change and FamiliesReferences118

SociologyMARRIAGE AND FAMILIESINTIMACY, DIVERSITY AND STRENGTHS,6th EditionDavid H Olson, University of Minnesota--MinneapolisJohn DeFrain, University of Nebraska—LincolnLinda Skogrand, Utah State University-Logan2008 / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338004-9Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson6This introduction to marriages and families accentuates the positiveaspects of relationships and focuses on enriching students’ knowledgeand experience in building strong, successful couple and familyrelationships. The authors, both seasoned family scholars andtherapists, integrate research, theory, and practical application withan interdisciplinary perspective on marriage and family.CONTENTSBrief ContentsBoxed FeaturesAbout the AuthorsPrefaceA Visual PreviewPart One: The Social Context of Intimate RelationshipsChapter One. Perspectives on Intimate RelationshipsChapter Two. Cultural Diversity: Family Strengths and ChallengesChapter Three. Understanding Marriage and Family DynamicsPart Two: Dynamics Of Intimate RelationshipsChapter Four. Communication and IntimacyChapter Five. Conflict and Conflict ResolutionChapter Six. Sexual IntimacyChapter Seven. Gender Roles and Power In the FamilyChapter Eight. Managing Economic ResourcesPart Three. Stages of Intimate RelationshipsChapter Nine. Friendship, Intimacy, and SinglehoodChapter Ten. Dating, Mate Selection, and Living TogetherChapter Eleven. Marriage: Building a Strong FoundationChapter Twelve. Parenthood: Choices and ChallengesChapter Thirteen. Midlife and Older CouplesPart Four. Challenges and OpportunitiesChapter Fourteen. Stress, Abuse, and Family ProblemsChapter Fifteen. Divorce, Single-Parent Families, and StepfamiliesChapter Sixteen. Strengthening Marriages and FamiliesAppendicesAppendix A. Couple and Family ScalesAppendix B. Family Science and Family Research MethodsAppendix C. Contraception and Abortion Optionsappendix D. Pregnancy and ChildbirthGlossaryReferencesCreditsName IndexSubject IndexSociology of Family –ReadersNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INFAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS8th EditionElizabeth Schroeder2010 / Softcover / 320 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351540-3Available: March 2009Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351540x.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS,8/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website.Visit www.mhcls.com.119

SociologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: THEFAMILY 09/1035th EditionKathleen R Gilbert, Indiana University-Bloomington2009 / Softcover / 192 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351637-0Available: August 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516376.mhtmlThis THIRTY-FIFTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotatedtable of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviewsfor each section; a topical index; and an online instructor’s resourceguide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THECLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_TheFamily_0910.pdf This convenient guide matches the Units in Annual Editions:The Family 09/10 with the corresponding Chapters in two of ourbest-selling McGraw-Hill Marriage, Family, and Intimacy textbooksby Olson et al. and Miller et al.Part C. Other Family Relationships22. Being a Sibling23. Aunties and Uncles24. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of CulturalCrisis25. Aging Japanese Pen Messages to PosterityUnit 4: Challenges and OpportunitiesPart A. Family Violence and Chaos26. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse27. The Myths and Truths of Family AbductionPart B. Substance Abuse28. Children of AlcoholicsPart C. Infidelity29. My Cheatin’ Heart30. Love but Don’t Touch31. Is This Man Cheating on His Wife?Part D. Economic Concerns32. Becoming Financial Grown-Ups33. Making Time for Family TimePart E. Illness and Death in the Family34. Partners Face Cancer Together35. A Guide for Caregivers36. Caring for the Caregiver37. Bereavement after CaregivingPart F. War and Terror38. Terrorism, Trauma, and ChildrenPart F. Divorce and Remarriage39. A Divided House40. Civil Wars41. Stepfamily Success Depends on IngredientsUnit 5: Families, Now and into the Future42. The 3rd National Family History Initiative43. Get a Closer Look44. Spirituality and Family Nursing45. The Joy of Rituals46. Sustaining Resilient Families for Children in Primary Grades47. The Consumer Crunch48. Sparking Interest in Nature—Family StyleCONTENTSUnit 1: Evolving Perspectives on the Family1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience2. Interracial Families3. Children as a Public GoodUnit 2: Exploring and Establishing RelationshipsPart A. Love and Sex4. This Thing Called Love5. Pillow Talk, Nina Utne6. How to Talk about SexPart B. Choosing a Mate7. On-Again, Off-AgainPart C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation8. A New Fertility Factor9. Starting the Good Life in the Womb10. Breeder Reaction11. Adopting a New American FamilyUnit 3: Family RelationshipsPart A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships12. Free As a Bird and Loving It13. Gay Marriage Lite14. Two Mommies and a Daddy15. Marriage at First Sight16. Couple TherapyPart B. Relationships between Parents and Children17. Kaleidoscope of Parenting Cultures18. Do We Need a Law to Prohibit Spanking?19. Prickly Père20. When Parents Hover Over Kids’ Job Search21. Last Hope in a Weak Economy?120

SociologyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INFAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS7th EditionElizabeth Schroeder2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339714-6Available: May 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 148.mhtmlThis Seventh Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INFAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Parental Decision-Making: What’s Best for Children…OrWhat’s Best for ParentsIssue 1. Is It Ever Appropriate to Spank A Child?Issue 2. Should Adoptive Parents Only Adopt within Their Own Racial/Ethnic Group?Issue 3. Does Divorce Create Long-Term Negative Effects forChildren?Issue 4. Should Parents Homeschool Their Children?Issue 5. Do Mothers Who Work Outside the Home Have a NegativeEffect on Their Children?Unit 2. How Much Control Should Parents Have Over TheirChildren?Issue 6. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messagefor Teens?Issue 7. Should Parents Routinely Vaccinate Their Children?Issue 8. Should Parents be Able to Select the Biological Sex of TheirChildren?Issue 9. Should Parents Surgically Alter Their Intersex InfantsIssue 10. Should Minors Be Required to Get Their Parents’ Permissionin Order to Obtain an Abortion?Unit 3. Revisiting Ozzie and Harriet: Same-Sex Couples andTheir Families Fit InIssue 11. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Allowed to Marry?Issue 12. Should the U.S. Constitution Be Amended to DefineMarriage?Issue 13. Should Lesbians and Gay Individuals be Allowed to AdoptChildren?Issue 14. Is Cybersex “Cheating”?Issue 15. Are Open Relationships Healthy?Issue 16. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?Issue 17. Should Men Who Have Sex with Men Be Allowed to DonateBlood?Issue 18. Are Statutory Rape Laws Effective at Protecting Minors?Race, Class, Gender, andSexualityNEWRECONSTRUCTINGGENDER: AMULTICULTURALANTHOLOGY5th EditionEstelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston2009 / Softcover / 720 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338006-3Available: January 2008Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5Reconstructing Gender is an anthology that addresses thecontemporary experiences from a variety of women and men.Drawing from a wide range of sources including research articles,critical essays, and personal narratives, Disch has chosen accessible,engaging, and provocative readings that represent many perspectivesand experiences. Eleven part-opening introductions identify importantissues in the general eld of study, describe the readings, remind thereader about some of the central themes emerging throughout thebook, and raise questions for students to consider.NEW TO THIS EDITION 23 of the 74 articles are new to this edition addressing welfarereform and immigration; beauty rituals; environmental toxicity;disability; sexual orientation; gender bias in science from theperspective of a transgendered man; young feminists of color; anupdate on the women’s peace movement in Israel; bullying; theperspective of an Black American Muslim feminist; homophobia inprofessional sports; and anti-violence activism by men. A dozen of the readings address international issues such asglobal feminism, immigration, and war More coverage of recent hot topics such as the effects of war onmen and women, sexism in hip-hop, homophobia in the Army, andsame-sex marriage in Massachusetts just to name a few Includes a name index and a subject index at the end of theanthology providing an easy reference for students and instructors.CONTENTS* indicates new readingGeneral IntroductionPart I: It’s not just about Gender1. The Puerto Rican Dummy and the Merciful Son, Martín Espada2. From Nothing, A Consciousness, Helen Zia3. The Past is Ever Present: Recognizing the New Racism, PatriciaHill Collins4. Angry Women Are Building: Issues and Struggles Facing AmericanIndian Women Today, Paula Gunn Allen5. “J.A.P.”-Slapping: The Politics of Scapegoating, Ruth Atkin andAdrienne Rich*6. Latinas in the Fault Lines of Citizenship, Alejandra Marchevskyand Jeanne Theoharis121

Sociology7. White Privilege: Unpacking the Invisible Knapsack, PeggyMcIntosh8. Controlled or Autonomous: Identity and the Experience of theNetwork, Women Living Under Muslim Laws, Farida Shaheed*9. Under and (Inside) Western Eyes: At the Turn of the Century,Chandra Talpade Mohanty10. Patriarchy, the System: An It, Not a He, a Them or an Us, AllanJohnsonPart II: Gender Socialization11. The Social Construction of Gender, Judith Lorber12. Boyhood, Organized Sports, and the Construction of Masculinities,Michael A. Messner13. Who’s the Fairest of Them All?, Jill Nelson14. He Defies You Still: The Memoirs of a Sissy, Tommi Avicolli15. Growing Up Hidden, Linnea Due*16. Masculinity as Homophobia, Michael KimmelPart III: Embodiment*17. Making Up Is Hard To Do, Sheila Jeffreys18. “A Way Outa No Way”: Eating Problems among African American,Latina, and White Women, Becky W. Thompson19. Yellow Woman and a Beauty of the Spirit, Leslie Marmon Silko20. Just Walk on By: A Black Man Ponders His Power to Alter PublicSpace, Brent Staples21. Taking It, Leonard Kriegel22. I’m Not Fat, I’m Latina, Christy Haubegger23. The Tyranny of the Esthetic: Surgery’s Most Intimate Violation,Martha A. CoventryPart IV: Communication24. For the White Person Who Wants to Know How to Be My Friend,Pat Parker*25. Men and Women are from Earth, Rosalind Barnett and CarylRivers26. Real Men Don’t Cry … and Other “Uncool” Myths, Phil W.Petrie27. The New Momism, Susan J. Douglas and Meredith W.Michaels28. Claiming Jezebel: Black Female Subjectivity and SexualExpressions in Hip-Hop, Ayana Byrd29. Where are the women? The strange case of the missing feminists.When was the last time you saw one on TV?, Laura ZimmermanPart V: Sexuality*30. A Pornographic World [What is normal?], Robert Jensen31. The Myth of the Sexual Athlete, Don Sabo*32. Passing Last Summer, Domenika Bednarska33. The Impact of Multiple Marginalization, Paula C. RustPart VI: Families*34. Contemporary Challenges to Black Women’s ReproductiveRights, Jeanne Flavin35. Bloodmothers, Othermothers, and Women-Centered Networks,Patricia Hill Collins36. Dilemmas of Involved Fatherhood, Kathleen Gerson37. Man Child: A Black Lesbian Feminist’s Response, Audre Lorde38. I Am a Man, Raul E. Ybarra39. What is marriage for?, E.J. Graff*40. Free to Marry, At Last—May 17, 2004, Pat Gozemba and KarenKahnPart VII: Education41. Missing in Interaction, Myra and David Sadker42. “What About the Boys?” What the Current Debates Tell Us--andDon’t Tell Us--About Boys in Schools, Michael S. Kimmel43. Does Gender Matter?, Ben A. Barres44. Black and Female: Reflections on Graduate School, bell hooks*45. Mentors in Violence Program, Jackson KatzPart VIII: Paid Work and Unemployment*46. The End of Welfare as We Know It: An Overview of the PRWORA,Alejandra Marchevsky and Jeanne Theoharis47. Sixty Cents to a Man’s Dollar, Ann Crittenden48. “Global Woman” by Barbara Ehrenreich and Arlie RussellHochschild49. America’s Dirty Work: Migrant Maids and Modern-Day Slavery,Joy M. Zarembka50. The Globetrotting Sneaker, Cynthia Enloe*51. The Center of Masculine Production: Gay Athletes in ProfessionalSports, Eric Anderson*52. Men at War: Vietnam and Agent Orange, Cynthia R. Daniels*53. Fort Bragg: Command, Jeffrey McGowanPart IX: Violence54. Women, Violence, and Resistance, Melanie Kaye/Kantrowitz*55. Eminem’s Popularity is a Major Setback for Girls and Women,Jackson Katz*56. Pictures of Boyhood, Richard Hoffman*57. Injury, Gender, and Trouble, Laurie Schaffner58. Homophobia in Straight Men, Terry A. Kupers59. The Ultimate Growth Industry: Trafficking in Women and Girls,Jan Goodwin60. How Safe Is America?, Desiree Taylor61. Wielding Masculinity Inside Abu Ghraib: Making Feminist Senseof an American Military Scandal, Cynthia Enloe*62. The Private War of Women Soldiers, Helen BenedictPart X: Health and Illness63. Masculinities and Men’s Health: Moving toward Post—SupermanEra Prevention, Don Sabo*64. Health Care Reform – A Woman’s Issue, Catherine DeLowry,Dr.PH65. Reproductive Issues Are Essential Survival Issues for the Asian-American Communities, Connie S. Chan66. Why the Precautionary Principle? A Meditation on PolyvinylChloride (PVC) and the Breasts of Mothers, Sandra Steingraber67. Does Silencio = Muerte? Notes on Translating the AIDS Epidemic,Rafael Campo68. To Be Poor and Transgender, Kai WrightPart XI: A World That Is Truly Human69. Statement of Principles, National Organization for Men AgainstSexism*70. New Black Man, Mark Anthony Neal*71. Feminism’s Future: Young Feminists of Color Take the Mic, DaisyHernández and Pandora L. Leong*72. Tapping Our Strength, Eisa Nefertari Ulen*73. The Women’s Peace Movement in Israel, Gila Svirsky*74. Women and Human Rights, Rita Arditti122

SociologyNEWNEW2009 / Softcover / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352814-4Available: July 2008http://www.mhhe.com/ske5EXPERIENCING RACE,CLASS, AND GENDER INTHE UNITED STATES5th EditionRoberta Fiske-Rusciano, Rider UniversityThrough individual stories, essays, and critical analyses, thisanthology introduces issues of race, class, and gender within aninterdisciplinary framework. Themes of identity, power, and changeare examined from many different perspectives and voices. Newarticles covering environmental and post-Katrina issues provide thereader with information about recent concerns of Americans living inthe United States.NEW TO THIS EDITION Numerous selections are new to this edition, bringing theanthology up to date; they include “1-2 Punch: A Major Blow to Roe”by Allison Stevens; “Phoenix Rising from the Waters: The Post-KatrinaRenewal of the New Orleans East Vietnamese Community” by MarySue Ply; “The Dirty Saga of Onondaga County” (environmental racism)by Linda Carty; “At Colleges Women are Leaving Men in the Dust” byTamar Lewin; “A War Against Boys?” by Michael Kimmel New set of articles addressing post-Katrina issues within theframework of race, class and gender. New articles covering issues of environmental justice within theframework of race and classCONTENTSIdentityPart I: Racial and Ethnic IdentityPart II: Gender IdentityPart III: Sexual IdentityPowerPart V: Power and RacismPart VI: Power and SexismPart VII Power and ClassismChangePart VIII: Taking ActionPart IX: Change MakersPart X: Race, Class, and Gender After 9/11 and Post-KatrinaTHE SOCIALCONSTRUCTION OFDIFFERENCE ANDINEQUALITY: RACE, CLASS,GENDER AND SEXUALITY4th EditionTracy E Ore, St Cloud State University2009 / Softcover / 816 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338008-7Available: February 2008Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4This anthology examines the social construction of race, class, gender,and sexuality and the institutional bases for these relations. Whileother texts discuss various forms of strati cation and the impact ofthese on members of marginalized groups, Ore provides a thoroughdiscussion of how such systems of strati cation are formed andperpetuated and how forms of stratication are interconnected. Criticalthinking questions at the end of each reading and part opening essaysaid students in understanding how the material relates to their livesand how their own attitudes, actions, and perspectives may serve toperpetuate a strati ed system. 13 new readings have been addedfocusing on the experiences of immigrants, contemporary issues insocial institutions, current examples of how the media portrays eventsand much more.NEW TO THIS EDITION 13 new readings have been added focusing on the experiencesof immigrants, contemporary issues in social institutions, currentexamples of how the media portrays events and much more Updated statistical information from the latest US Census reportdata regarding inequality Additional readings focusing on contemporary issues in socialinstitutions including “Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality”,“Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces”, and much more Updated statistical information to support assertions utilizing themost recent studies of race, class, gender and sexuality available. New reading that provides a current example of how the mediaportrays events: “Metaphors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames,and Their Consequences in Hurricane Katrina” Systematically examines how and why the categories of race,class, gender, and sexuality are constructed, maintained, experienced,and transformed.CONTENTS* An asterisk indicates a new reading.PrefacePart I: Constructing DifferencesRace & Ethnicity1. Racial Formations- Michael Omi and Howard Winant2. Optional Ethnicities: For Whites Only?- Mary C. Waters*3. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from ImmigrantCommunities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen4. How Jews Became White Folks and What that Says about Racein America- Karen BrodkinSocial Class5. Race, Wealth, and Equality- Melvin L. Oliver and Thomas M.Shapiro6. Media Magic: Making Class Invisible- Gregory Mantsios*7. Doubly Divided: The Racial Wealth Gap- Meizhu Lui123

Sociology*8. Getting Corporations off the Public Dole- Janice ShieldsSex & Gender9. The Social Construction of Gender- Judith Lorber*10. The Five Sexes, Revisited- Anne Fausto-Sterling11. The Transgender Paradigm Shift toward Free Expression- HollyBoswell12. Masculinity as Homophobia: Fear, Shame, and Silence in theConstruction of Gender Identity- Michael S. KimmelSexuality13. The Invention of Heterosexuality- Jonathan Ned Katz*14. Sexuality and Gender in Children’s Daily Worlds- Barrie Thorneand Zella Luria15. Sexual Identity and Bisexual Identities: The Struggle for Self-Description in a Changing Sexual Landscape- Paula C. Rust16. Naming All the Parts- Kate BornsteinPart II: Maintaining Inequalities: Systems of Oppression &PrivilegeSocial InstitutionsFamily17. Our Mothers’ Grief: Racial Ethnic Women and the Maintenanceof Families- Bonnie Thornton Dill18. Families on the Fault Line: America’s Working Class Speaks Aboutthe Family, the Economy, Race, and Ethnicity- Lillian B. Rubin19. Stability and Change in Chicano Men’s Family Lives- ScottColtrane*20. Gay and Lesbian Families Are Here- Judith StaceyEducation21. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools- JonathanKozol22. Preparing for Power: Cultural Capital and Curricula in America’sElite Boarding Schools- Peter W. Cookson, Jr and Caroline HodgesPersell23. Civilize Them with a Stick- Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes24. Missing in Interaction- Myra Sadker and David Sadker*25. Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality- Melinda MiceliWork & the Economy26. Jobless Ghettos: The Social Implications of the Disappearanceof Work in Segregated Neighborhoods- William J. Wilson27. “We’d Love to Hire Them But?”: The Meaning of Race forEmployers- Joleen Kirschenman and Kathryn M. Neckerman28. The Glass Escalator: Hidden Advantages for Men in the ‘Female’Professions- Christine L. Williams29. Cause of Death: Inequality- Alejandro ReussThe State & Public Policy*30. Welfare Reform, Family Hardship, and Women of Color- LindaBurnham*31. Beyond Crime and Punishment- Bruce Western and Becky Petit32. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TelevisionDomestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch33. The Effects of Affirmative Action on Other Stakeholders- BarbaraReskin34. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness: Racialized SocialDemocracy and the “White” Problem in American Studies- GeorgeLipsitzMedia35. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TV DomesticSitcoms- Richard Butsch36. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment-Robert*37. Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces: Will and Grace andthe Situation Comedy Genre- Kathleen Battles and Wendy Hilton-Morrow*38. Metahors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames, and TheirConsequences in Hurricane Katrina- Kathleen Tierney, ChristineBevc, and Erica KuligowskiLanguage & Culture39. Racism in the English Language- Robert B. Moore40. Self, Identity & the Naming Question: Reflections on the Languageof Disability- Irving Kenneth Zola41. How to Tame a Wild Tongue- Gloria Anzaldúa42. The Dark Side of Sports Symbols- Stanley D. Eitzen and MaxineBaca ZinnViolence & Social Control43. Where Race and Gender Meet: Racism, Hate Crimes, andPornography- Helen Zia44. Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why are SomeFraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?- A. Ayres Boswell& Joan Z. Spade45. The Construction of Masculinity and the Triad of Men’s Violence-Michael Kaufman46. Homophobia as a Weapon of Sexism- Suzanne PharrPart III: Experiencing Difference & Inequality in Everyday Life47. Making Systems of Privilege Visible- Stephanie M. Wildman withAdrienne D. Davis.48. “Yes, I Follow Islam, But I’m Not a Terrorist”- Nada El Sawy49. A Dozen Demons- Ellis Cose*50. Always Running- La Vida Loca, Gang Days in L.A.- LuisRodriguez51. The Story of My Body- Judith Ortiz Cofer*52. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from ImmigrantCommunities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen53. “Gee, You Don’t Seem Like An Indian From the Reservation”-Barbara Cameron*54. Living Fearlessly With and Within Differences: My Search forIdentity Beyond Categories and Contradictions- Shefali Milczarek-Desai55. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting by in America- BarbaraEhrenreich56. I Am Your Welfare Reform- Annie Downey57. Learning to Fight- Geoffrey Canada58. Bisexuality, Feminism, Men, and Me- Robyn OchsPart IV: Resistance & Social Change59. Toward a New Vision: Race, Class, and Gender as Categories ofAnalysis and Connection- Patricia Hill Collins60. Cultural Resistance: Reconstructing Our Own Images- Yen LeEspritu*61.Good for the Hood?- Anmol Chaddha62. Seeing More Than Black & White: Latinos, Racism, and theCultural Divides- Elizabeth Martinez*63. How White People Can Serve as Allies to People of Color in theStruggle to End Racism- Paul Kivel64. Dismantling Noah’s Ark: Gender and Equality- Judith Lorber*65. Voices of a New Movimiento- Roberto LovatoIndex* An asterisk indicates a new reading.124

SociologyNEWTHE MEANING OFDIFFERENCE: AMERICANCONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE,SEX AND GENDER, SOCIALCLASS, AND SEXUALORIENTATION5th EditionKaren E Rosenblum, George Mason UniversityToni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University2009 / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338005-6Available: January 2008Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5The Meaning of Difference focuses on the social construction ofdifference as it operates in American formulations of race and ethnicity,sex and gender, social class, sexual orientation, and disability. Theconceptual structure of this text-reader comes from four frameworkessays addressing the construction of difference, the experienceof difference, the social meaning of difference, and social actionthat might bridge differences. Each framework essay is followedby a set of readings selected for readability, conceptual depth, andapplicability to a variety of statuses. Boxed inserts throughout offer rst-person accounts from real people, many of them students.This edition features an expanded focus on disability and 29 newreadings, including articles on how immigration is transforming thenature of American race and ethnic categories, the changing shapeof higher education, and the experience of Americans of Middle-Eastern descent.NEW TO THIS EDITION 29 new readings covering topics such as intersectionality,disability, social class, language, and much more Systematic incorporation of disability as a master statusfunctioning in ways comparable to race and ethnicity, sex and gender,sexual orientation, and social class New section focused on intersectionality of identities includingselections that involve discussions about gender, race, and the nation;disability and gender; white privilege; and much more 4 new personal accounts including “My Strategies” by EricJackson; “How I Learned to Appreciate Printers” by Sandra PamelaMaida; “A Time I Didn’t Feel Normal” by Heather Calendar; and “MySecret” by Sarah Herschler New readings about the impact of immigration on America’s raceand ethnic categories and experience of those of Middle Easterndescent A selection on the experience of transracial adoption: “Adoptedin China, Seeking Identity in America,” by Lynette Clemetson (NewYork Times) New material focusing on the effects of Hurricane Katrina onAmerican racial stereotypes found in a reading titled “Loot or Find:Fact of Fame?” By Cheryl L. Harris and Devon W. Carbado New readings directly addressing the circumstances of collegestudents including the topics of disability, transgenderism, interracialinteractions, preferential treatment of the children of alumni in collegeadmissions, and access to higher education based on social classCONTENTSSection I - Framework Essay: Constructing Categories OfDifferenceWhat is Race?What Is Sex? What Is Gender?What Is Social Class?What Is Sexual Orientation?What is Disability?Section II - Framework Essay: Experiencing DifferenceRace and EthnicitySex and GenderSexual OrientationSocial ClassDisabilitySection III - Framework Essay: The Meaning Of DifferenceIntersectionalityLaw, Politics, and PolicyLanguageSection IV - Framework Essay: Bridging DifferencesMedical Sociology –ReadersNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONBIOETHICAL ISSUES13th EditionCarol Levine, United Hospital Fund2010 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-354566-0Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007354566x.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: BIOETHICAL ISSUES, 13/e presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.125

SociologyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONBIOETHICAL ISSUES12th EditionCarol Levine, United Hospital Fund2008 / 400 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339718-4Available: April 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 180.mhtmlThis Twelfth Edition of TAKING SIDES: BIOETHCIAL ISSUESpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our studentwebsite, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Medical Decision MakingIssue 1 Is Informed Consent Still Central to Medical Ethics?Issue 2 Should Truth-Telling Depend on the Patient’s Culture?Issue 3 Does Direct-to-Consumer Drug Advertising Enhance PatientChoice?Unit 2. Death and DyingIssue 4 Are Some Advance Directives Too Limiting of PatientsRights?Issue 5 Do Standard Medical Ethics Apply in Disaster Conditions??Issue 6 Should Physicians Be Allowed to Assist in Patient Suicide?Issue 7 Should Doctors Be Able to Refuse Demands for “Futile”Treatment?Unit 3. Choices in ReproductionIssue 8 Is Abortion Immoral?Issue 9 Should a Pregnant Woman Be Punished for Exposing HerFetus to Risk?Unit 4. Children and BioethicsIssue 10 Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Make Their Own Lifeand-DeathDecisions?Issue 11 Do Parents Harm Their Children When They Refuse MedicalTreatment on Religions Grounds?Unit 5. GeneticsIssue 12 Is the Ban on Federal Funding of Human Stem Cell ResearchJustifiable?Issue 13 Is Genetic Enhancement an Unacceptable Use ofTechnology?Unit 6. Human and Animal ExperiementationIssue 14 Should Animal Experimentation Be Permitted?Issue 15 Should Prisoners be Allowed to Participate in Research?Unit 7. Bioethics and Public PolicyIssue 16 Should Federally Funded Healthcare be Tied to FollowingDoctors’ Orders?Issue 17 Does Military Necessity Override Medical Ethics?Issue 18 Should Performance-Enhancing Drugs Be Banned fromSports?Issue 19 Should There be a Free Market in Body Parts?Issue 20 Should Pharmacists Be Allowed to Deny Prescriptions onGrounds of Conscience?Issue 21 Should Public Health Override Powers Over Individual Libertyin Combating Bioterrorism?Gerontology / Sociologyof Aging – ReadersNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 09/1022nd EditionHarold Cox, Indiana State University-Terre Haute2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812773-1Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127734.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.[Details unavailable at press time]126

SociologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING08/0921st EditionHarold Cox, Indiana State University—TerreHaute2009 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339760-3Available: March 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 601.mhtmlfThis Twenty-First Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING providesconvenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected from thebest of the public press. Organizational features include: an annotatedlisting of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table ofcontents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM,ISBN 0073301906, is offered as a practical guide for instructors.ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website,www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Aging_0809_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches units in Annual Editions: Aging08/09 with corresponding chapters in one of our best-selling McGraw-Hill Aging textbooks by Quadagno.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Phenomenon of Aging1. Elderly Americans2. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population3. Living Longer4. Puzzle of the Century5. Will You Live to Be 100? (as seen in Modern Maturity, Nov/Dec1999)New! 6. Can We Slow Aging?Unit 2. The Quality of Later LifeNew! 7. Stop Smoking and Benefits Come QuicklyNew! 8. Lifetime Achievements9. Women’s Sexuality As They Age10. We Can Control How We AgeUnit 3. Societal Attitudes Toward Old Age11. Society Fears the Aging ProcessNew! 12. A Healthy Mind, a Longer Life13. Single Women14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its Threatto Business VitalityUnit 4. Problems and Potentials of Aging15. Primary Care for Elderly PeopleNew! 16. Trust and Betrayal in the Golden Years17. The Disappearing Mind18. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of Older Womenand Their Relationship With Health OutcomesUnit 5. Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma?19. How to Survive the First YearNew! 20. Color Me Confident21. Old. Smart. Productive.22. The Broken Promise23. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of OlderAmericansUnit 6. The Experience of DyingNew! 24. To Live, or Not to Live25. The Grieving Process26. Start the Conversation27. Mind Frames Towards Dying and Factors Motivating TheirAdoption by Terminally Ill EldersUnit 7. Living Environment in Later Life28. (Not) the Same Old StoryNew! 29. Finding a Good Home,New! 30. The Salience of Social Relationships for Resident Well-Being in Assisted Living31. Declaration of IndependentsUnit 8. Social Policies, Programs, and Services for OlderAmericansNew! 32. The Corporate Beneficiaries of the Medicare Drug Benefit33. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years ofReform34. Universalism Without the Targeting: Privatizing the Old-AgeWelfare State35. Coverage For All36. Riding Into the SunsetNew! 37. Paying for It38. As Good As It GetsNEWSociology of DeathTHE LAST DANCE:ENCOUNTERING DEATHAND DYING8th EditionLynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College andAlbert Lee Strickland2009 / Hardcover / 688 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340546-9Available: July 2008The best-selling textbook in the eld, The Last Dance offers aninterdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying. Integratingthe experiential, scholarly, social, individual, emotional, and intellectualdimensions of death and dying, the eighth edition of this acclaimed texthas been thoroughly revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensivecoverage of death studies. Together with its companion volumes, thisnew edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory andresearch, as well as practical application to students’ lives.NEW TO THIS EDITION A new companion text, A Journey Through the Last Dance, helpsstudents reexamine their attitudes and behaviors toward death anddying, through activities, new ideas, terms, and references to manyresources. A new chapter on death systems highlights important publicpolicy issues.127

Sociology A new chapter on end-of-life issues and decisions includesdiscussion of informed consent, caregiver-patient relationships,physician-assisted suicide, euthanasia, advance directives, andfinancial planning. A new section on Celtic and Northern European culturaltraditions complements discussion of other cross-culturalperspectives on death and dying. A new section on terrorism, including discussion of the impactand aftermath of the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks. Expanded discussion of the role of biological and geneticfactors in suicide risk. Integrated discussion of developmental theories and the impactof sociocultural influences on socialization and learning aboutdeath.CONTENTSChapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of ChangeChapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of SocioculturalForcesChapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and HistoricalChapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and InstitutionsChapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public PolicyChapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening IllnessChapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and DecisionsChapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of LossChapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body DispositionChapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and AdolescentsChapter 11 – Death in the Lives of AdultsChapter 12 – SuicideChapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern WorldChapter 14 – Beyond Death / After LifeChapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social ChoicesSociology of Death –ReadersNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT 09/1011th EditionGeorge E Dickinson, College of CharlestonMichael R Leming, Saint Olaf College2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812767-0Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007812767x.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.128

SociologyANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT 08/0910th EditionGeorge E Dickinson, College of CharlestonMichael R Leming, Saint Olaf College2008 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339771-9Available: November 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 717.mhtmlThis Tenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, ANDBEREAVEMENT provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906, is offered as apractical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Issues in Dying and Death1. Finding Better Ways to DieNew! 2. Organ Transplantation in a Globalised WorldNew! 3. Into the OblivionNew! 4. Moving Toward Peace,5. Technology and Death PolicyNew! 6. A Survey of End-of-Life Care in Care HomesNew! 7. How Much Is More Life Worth?,8. The Unsettled Question of Brain Death9. Studying the Black DeathUnit 2. Dying and Death Across the Life CycleNew! 10. Editorial: On Behalf of ChildrenNew! 11. Knowledge of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome PreventionStrategies in a Multicultural, Disadvantaged CommunityNew! 12. And Then the Dog DiedNew! 13. To Live with No RegretsNew! 14. “Cast Me Not Off in Old Age”15. Trends in Causes of Death Among the ElderlyUnit 3. The Dying Process16. Palliative Care17. Placing Religion and Spirituality in End-of-Life Care18. Spirituality and Religion in the “Art of Dying”,New! 19. Death in the Nursing HomeNew! 20. Dying on the StreetsNew! 21. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns Toward Dying in PrisonUnit 4. Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide22. Death and the Law23. Doctor, I Want to Die. Will You Help Me?24. Competent Care for the Dying Instead of Physician-AssistedSuicide25. Colleen’s Choice26. Ethics and Life’s Ending27. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame28. Life Everlasting29. Who Will Speak for You When You Can’t?30. The Contemporary American Funeral31. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects32. The Arlington Ladies33. Face to Face With Death34. Six Feet Under35. The Grieving Process36. Disenfranchised Grief37. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief38. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning39. Those Left Behind40. Till Death Do Us Part41. Counseling With Children in Contemporary Society42. Discussing Tragedy With Your Child43. Life Is Like the SeasonsNEWUrban SociologyANNUAL EDITIONS: URBAN SOCIETY14th EditionMyron Alfred Levine, Wright State University-Dayton2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812771-7Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127718.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.129

SociologyANNUAL EDITIONS: URBAN SOCIETY13th EditionFred Siegel, The Cooper Union for Science and Art—New YorkHarry Siegel2008 / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339743-6Available: March 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 431.mhtmlThis Thirteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: URBAN SOCIETYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Urban Frame1. Fear of the City, 1783 to 19832. The Death and Life of America’s CitiesNew! 3. Interview with Jane Jacobs4. Broken WindowsUnit 2. The Inner Life: City StoriesNew! 5. Back to the Fortress of Solitude and the Millions of DestroyedMen Who Are My BrothersNew! 6. My L.A.New! 7. Chicago, City of ChampionsNew! 8. A Play at ContritionUnit 3. Selling the New City: The Fight to Attract the Young andthe Restless9. The Rise of the Creative Class10. Too Much Froth11. Packaging Cities12. Urban Warfare13. The Geography of Cool14. The Best of MatesUnit 4. Urban Revival, Gentrification and the Changing Face ofthe CityPart A. Urban Revival15. Return to Center16. The Fall and Rise of Bryant Park17. Ground Zero in Urban Decline18. Saving Buffalo From ExtinctionNew! 19. Movers and ShakersPart B. Gentrification20. The Gentry, Misjudged as NeighborsNew! 21. Red Hook—Wounded by Good Intentions22. The Essence of UptownNew! 23. In Parts of U.S. Northwest, a Changing Face24. Rocking-Chair Revival25. In New York City, Fewer Find They Can Make ItUnit 5. Urban Economies, Politics and PoliciesNew! 26. Winds of Change—Tale of a Warehouse Shows HowChicago Weathers a Decline27. Bloomberg So Far28. Mayors and Morality: Daley and Lindsay Then and NowUnit 6. Sprawl: Challenges to the Metropolitan Landscape29. Patio Man and the Sprawl People30. Downtown Struggles While Neighbor Thrives31. Is Regional Government the Answer?32. Unscrambling the City33. Are Europe’s Cities Better?Unit 7. Urban Problems: Crime, Education, and Poverty34. How an Idea Drew People Back to Urban Life35. Windows Not Broken36. Murder Mystery37. Police Line—Do CrossNew! 38. The Black Family—40 Years of LiesNew! 39. Big Cities Balk Over Illegal Migrants40. Segregation in New York Under a Different Name41. An Inner-City Renaissance42. The Rise, Fall, and Rise Again of Public HousingUNIT 8. Cities and Disasters: Viewing 9/11 and Katrina, and Preparingfor What’s Next43. A View From the SouthNew! 44. Debunking the Myths of KatrinaNew! 45. The Gathering StormNEWRace and EthnicityAMERICAN ETHNICITY:THE DYNAMICS ANDCONSEQUENCES OFDISCRIMINATION6th EditionAdalberto Jr Aguirre and Jonathan H Turner ofUniversity of California - Riverside2009 / SoftcoverISBN: 978-0-07-340421-9Available: September 2008http://www.mhhe.com/aguirre6eAmerican Ethnicity is a brief text that provides an accessibleintroduction to the dynamics of racial and ethnic relations. Keyconcepts and theories are summarized, and the authors develop asimple theoretical framework that guides the presentation of dataon each of the prominent ethnic groups in America. As a result,this book examines each ethnic group from the same perspective,allowing students to compare the dynamics of discrimination againstAfrican Americans, Native Americans, Asian and Paci c IslandAmericans, white ethnic Americans, and Latinos. The sixth editionoffers expanded theoretical framework through the inclusion of theSocial Identity Theory.NEW TO THIS EDITION Inclusion of the Social Identity Theory to expand the theoreticalframework in Chapters 2 and 3 and throughout the text Updated social and demographic data to enhance comparisonsacross racial/ethnic groups throughout the book Updated literature and research references that provide newsources for the student’s continued research.CONTENTSPrefaceChapter 1. Ethnicity and Ethnic RelationsChapter 2. Explaining Ethnic RelationsChapter 3. The Anglo-Saxon Core and Ethnic AntagonismChapter 4. White Ethnic AmericansChapter 5. African AmericansChapter 6. Native AmericansChapter 7. LatinosChapter 8. Asian and Pacific Island AmericansChapter 9. Arab AmericansChapter 10. The Future of Ethnicity in America130

SociologyNEWRETHINKING THE COLOR LINE: READINGSIN RACE AND ETHNICITY4th EditionCharles A. Gallagher, La Salle University2009 / Softcover / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340427-1Available: December 2008http://www.mhhe.com/gallagher4eRethinking the Color Line is a user-friendly text that does not sacriceintellectual or theoretical rigor. This anthology of current researchexamines contemporary issues and explores new approaches to thestudy of race and ethnic relations. The featured readings effectivelyengage students by helping them understand theories and concepts,and encourage active learning in the classroom all while providingrelevance for students from all ethnic, racial, cultural, and economicbackgrounds. The new fourth edition features 8 new readings as wellas a new two-color design that brings attention to the “Seeing theBig Picture” and “Questions to Consider” boxes found throughoutthe text.NEW TO THIS EDITION 8 new readings with current topics that redefine race relations inthe United States examine topics such as racial hybridity, new trendsin immigration, the meaning of colorblindness, interracial marriage andmixed race children, segregated houses of worship and much more New Two-Color Design that brings attention to the “Seeing the BigPicture” and “Questions to Consider” boxes that ofer critical thinkingquestions and opportunity for students to compare reading materialto up-to-date social statistics Five new “Seeing the Big Picture” boxes added to better link oursubsections to questions raised in the readings. Like in the previousedition, these boxes encourage students to compare social statisticsfeatured in the appendix with material covered in the readings. Expanded Appendix containing up-to-date racial and ethnic socialstatistics relevant for class discussions, research assignments, andquestions posed in “Seeing the Big Picture” features Vocabulary words are now newly boldfaced throughout the textand defined at the bottom of the pageCONTENTSIntroduction: Rethinking the Color Line: Understanding HowBoundaries ShiftPart I: Sorting By Color: Why We Attach Meaning To Race1. How Our Skins Got Their Color2. Drawing the Color Line3. Racial Formations4. Theoretical Perspectives in Race and Ethnic Relations5. Racialized Social Systems: Understanding Racism6. An Overview of Trends in Social and Economic Well-Being7. The Color of Health in the United States8. Transformative Assets, The Racial Wealth Gap and the AmericanDream9. Defining Race: Comparative Perspectives10. A Tour of Indian People and Indian Lands11. Asian American Panethnicity: Contemporary National andTransnational Possibilities12. Beyond Black and White: Remaking Race in America13. Color Blind Privilege: The Social and Political Functions of Erasingthe Color Line in Post Race America14. The Ideology of Colorblindness15. The Possibility of a New Racial Hierarchy in the Twenty-First-Century United StatesPart II: Prejudice, Discrimination, and Racism16. Race Prejudice as a Sense of Group PositionSeeing the Big Picture: Racism: Group Position or Individual Belief?17. Discrimination and the American Creed18. Race and Civil Rights Pre-September 11, 2001: The Targetingof Arabs and Muslims19. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness20. Laissez-Fair Racism, Racial Inequality and the Role of the SocialSciences21. Residential Segregation and Neighborhood Conditions in U.S.Metropolitan Areas22. The Code of the Streets23. Environmental Justice in the 21st Century: Race Still Matters24. Race, Religion, and the Color Line (or is that the Color Wall?)25. Why Are There No Supermarkets in my Neighborhood: The LongSearch for Fresh Fruit, Produce and Inexpensive Healthy FoodPart III: Racialized Opportunity in Social Institutions26. No Equal Justice: The Color of Punishment27. Everyday Racism on the Police Force28. .…and the Poor Get Prison29. The Mark of a Criminal Record30. Kristin v. Aisha; Brad v. Rasheed: What’s in a Name and How itEffects Getting a Job31. When the Pot Boils Over; The Irish, Jews, Blacks and Koreansof New York32. “There’s No Shame in My Game”: Status and Stigma AmongHarlem’s Working Poor33. Sweatshops in Sunset Park: A Variation of Late Twentieth-CenturyChinese Garment Shops in New York City34. Hispanics in the American South and the Transformation of thePoultry Industry35. Broadcast News Portrayal of Minorities: Accuracy in Reporting36. Television and the Politics of Representation37. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment38. Winnebagos, Cherokees, Apaches and Dakotas: The Persistenceof Stereotyping of American Indians in American Advertising39. Sport in America: The New Racial StereotypesPart IV: How America’s Complexion Changes40. The Melting Pot and the Color Line41. Who are the Other African Americans? Contemporary African andCaribbean Immigrants in the United States42. The Arab Immigrant Experience43. Ethnic and Racial Identities of Second-Generation BlackImmigrants in New York City44. Guess Who’s Been Coming to Dinner? Trends in InterracialMarriage over the 20th Century45. Captain Kirk Kisses Lieutenant Uhura: Interracial IntimaciesFrom Hollywood46. Discovering Racial Borders47. Redrawing the Color-Line? : The Problems and Possibilities ofMultiracial Families and Group Making48. Closing the Racial Inequality Gap: A Plan For Action49. Ten Things You Can Do To Improve Race RelationsAppendix: Race by the Numbers—America’s Racial Report Card131

SociologyRace and Ethnicity –ReadersNEWNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE AND ETHNICRELATIONS17th EditionJohn A Kromkowski, Catholic University of America2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812762-5Available: February 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127629.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.[Details unavailable at press time]TAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN RACE ANDETHNICITY7th EditionRaymond D’Angelo, Saint Joseph’s CollegeHerbert Douglas, Rowan University2009 / Softcover / 456 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351537-3Available: October 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007351537x.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN RACE AND ETHNICITY,7/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, anissue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available online for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our studentwebsite, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSPart 1 Race, Ethnicity and American IdentityIssue 1. Do Americans Need a Common Identity?Issue 2. Does Immigration Contribute to a Better America?Issue 3. Do Recent Immigration Trends Challenge Existing Ideas ofAmerica’s White Identity?Issue 4. Is Today’s Immigration Debate Racist?Part 2 Race Still Matters: Prejudice, Discrimination, and RacialMinoritiesIssue 5. Is Race Prejudice a Product of Group Position?Issue 6. Do Minorities and Whites Engage in Self-segregation?Issue 7. Is the Emphasis on a Color-Blind Society an Answer toRacism?Issue 8. Is the Claim of White Skin Privilege a Myth? ?Part 3 Persistence of DiscriminationIssue 9. Is Racism a Permanent Feature of American Society?Issue 10. Is Racial Profiling Defensible Public Policy?Issue 11. Did Hurricane Katrina Expose Racism in New Orleans?Issue 12. Is the Reservation the Only Source of Community for NativeAmericans?Part 4 Persistent Conflicts: Dynamics of a Changing PopulationIssue 13. Are America’s Public Schools Resegregating?Issue 14. Is There Room for Bilingual Education in AmericanSchools?Issue 15. Is It Time to De-emphasize Diversity?Issue 16. Are Asian Americans a Model Minority?Part 5 Policy Issues for the Twenty-First CenturyIssue 17. Does Latino Immigration Threaten African AmericanWorkers?Issue 18. Should Race Be Included Among the Many FactorsConsidered for Admission to Selective Colleges?Issue 19. Is Affirmative Action Necessary to Achieve Racial Equalityin the United States Today?Issue 20. Is Now the Time for Reparations for African Americans?132

SociologyANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE AND ETHNICRELATIONS16th EditionJohn A Kromkowski, Catholic University of America2008 / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339745-0Available: April 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 458.mhtmlThis Sixteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE AND ETHNICRELATIONS provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide forinstructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our studentwebsite, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Local Experiences of Racial and Ethnic Identity,Communities, and Diversity in AmericaNew! 1. Ethnic Goes Exurban2. It’s Blarney Meets Chutzpah, over Red Wine and Green BeerNew! 3. A Shift in the Income Divide in Queens Puts Blacks Aheadof Whites4. `New Brooklyns’ Replace White Suburbs5. Parishes in Transition: Holding on While Letting Go6. In New York, Gospel Resounds in African TonguesNew! 7. In Brooklyn, an Evolving EthnicityNew! 8. Mélange Cities9. Greektown’s Rise No MythUnit 2. Echoes from the Past and Pieces of Our AmbiguousLegacies10. The Slave History You Don’t Know11. Paying for Jefferson’s SinsNew! 12. How the GOP Conquered the SouthUnit 3. Demography and Diversity13. Racial Restrictions in the Law of CitizenshipNew! 14. Ancestry 2000: Census 2000 BriefNew! 15. Forces That Shape Ethnic Opinion in What Ethnic AmericansReally Think16. Zooming in on DiversityNew! 17. Intermarriage in the Second Generation: Choosing BetweenNewcomers and NativesUnit 4. Immigration and the American Tradition18. New Americans Fresh Off the Presses19. The Diversity Visa Lottery—A Cycle of Unintended Consequencesin, Anna O. LawNew! 20. Immigration and America’s Future: A New ChapterNew! 21. More Muslims are Coming to U.S. after a Decline in Wakeof 9/11New! 22. A True Believer in ImmigrantsNew! 23. The Hotel AfricaUnit 5. Indigenous Ethnic GroupsNew! 24. Who Is a Native American?25. Guiding Spirit: American Indian Museum Curators Look Beyondthe Objects to the Power Within26. Playing Indian at HalftimeUnit 6. African AmericansNew! 27. Who Is an African American?New! 28. Cracking the Genomics CodeNew! 29. Why I Gave Up on Hip-HopUnit 7. Hispanic/Latina/o AmericansNew! 30. The GOP’s Brownout31. Inventing Hispanics: A Diverse Minority Resists Being Labeled32. The Changing Face of ArlanadriaNew! 33. 15 Years on the Bottom RungUnit 8. Asian AmericansNew! 34. To Be Asian in AmericaNew! 35. Lands of Opportunity: Chinese ImmigrationNew! 36. Incarceration, Redress, Reconsiderations: Reviewing theStory of the Japanese-AmericansNew! 37. Thirty Years Later: Reviewing the Vietnamese-AmericanExperienceNew! 38. Our Lady of La Vang Parish Turns 25Unit 9. Eastern European and Mediterranean EthnicsNew! 39. Miracle: American Polonia, Karol Wojtyla and the Electionof Pope John Paul II40. Our Polish American Self Image: Responding to Its DetractorsNew! 41. ‘Bursting with Pride’ in Little ItalyNew! 42. Where We Stand on Issues43. American Jewish History: A Chance to ReflectNew! 44. Young U.S. Muslims Strive for HarmonyNew! 45. For ‘Borat’ Audience, First Come the Gasps, then theLaughsUnit 10. Understanding Race and Ethnic Relations: ExploringChallengesNew! 46. The Trouble with Tolerance47. American Self-Interest and the Response to Genocide48. Ethnic, Religious Fissures Deepen in Iraqi Society49. Never Underestimate the Power of Ethnicity in Iraq50. Correlated Conflicts: The Independent Nature of Ethnic Strife51. The Geometer of RaceNew! 52. Trading Left JabsNew! 53. Colorblind to the Reality of Race in AmericaNEWPolitical SociologyWHO RULES AMERICA? POWER, POLITICS,AND SOCIAL CHANGE6th EditionG William Domhoff, University of California-Santa Cruz2010 / Softcover / 288 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-811156-3Available: June 2009[Details unavailable at press time]133

SociologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DEVELOPING WORLD09/1019th EditionRobert J Grif ths, University of NC – Greensboro2009 / Softcover / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339782-5Available: October 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397822.mhtmlThis Ninteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DEVELOPINGWORLD provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articlesselected from the best of the public press. Organizational featuresinclude: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anannotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction;brief overviews for each section; and an online instructor’s resourceguide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THECLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.32. Africa: How We Killed Our Dreams of Freedom33. Lula’s Brazil34. An Empty RevolutionUnit 5: Population, Resources, Environment, and Health35. Booms, Busts, and Echoes36. Forest Loss in Sumatra Becomes a Global Issue37. Water Warriors38. Why We Owe So Much to Victims of Disaster39. Population, Human Resources, Health, and the Environment40. A Lifelong Struggle for a Generation41. Reversal of FortuneUnit 6: Women and Development42. Ten Years’ Hard Labour43. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development44. Getting All Girls into School45. Women and WarlordsSocial Inequality /Social StraticationNEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_Developing_World_0910.pdf This convenient guide matches the units in Annual Editions:Developing World 09/10 with the corresponding chapters in two ofour best-selling McGraw-Hill Political Science textbooks by Boyerand Rourke.CONTENTSUnit 1: Understanding the Developing World1. The New Face of Development2. The Ideology of Development3. Africa’s Village of Dreams4. Today’s Golden Age of Poverty Reduction5. Devising a Shared Global Strategy for the MDGs,6. Development as Poison7. Why God Is WinningUnit 2: Political Economy and the Developing World8. Industrial Revolution 2.0,9. Governing Global Trade10. Social Justice and Global Trade11. Cotton: The Huge Moral Issue12. Ranking the Rich13. Foreign Aid II14. The Debt Frenzy15. Across Globe, Empty Bellies Bring Rising Anger16. The Micromagic of Microcredit17. The Coming Revolution in AfricaUnit 3: Conflict and Instability18. The End of War?19. The Shiite “Threat” Revisited20. Letter from Afghanistan21. Again22. Will the Kenyan Settlement Hold?23. Zimbabwe Goes to the Brink24. The Somali Catastrophe25. Dangerous Liaisons26. Call in the Blue HelmetsUnit 4: Political Change in the Developing World27. The Democratic Rollback28. Turkey Face West29. The Practice—and the Theory30. South Africa After the Age of Heroes31. Congo’s PeaceNEW2009 / Softcover / 744 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338007-0Available: March 2008http://www.mhhe.com/kerbo7eSOCIAL STRATIFICATIONAND INEQUALITY7th EditionHarold R Kerbo, California Polytechnic StateUniversityPraised for its thorough research and scholarship, Social Straticationand Inequality provides a comprehensive, up-to-date exploration ofthe global economic and social divisions in human societies. Whilethe book is grounded in the nature of social stratication in the UnitedStates, this edition maintains a commitment to keeping a globalperspective. Comparative information on the United States and othercountries and an overview of changes in social strati cation, givesreaders a global perspective on class con ict.NEW TO THIS EDITION Extensive new material on income mobility as opposed to the oldstudies of occupational mobility (or the lack of it in the United Statescompared to other industrial societies) Additional material and data on the changing occupationalstructure and shrinking middle class New material on the reasons for continued increase in inequalityin the United States compared to other industrial nations New material on world poverty and how nations in Asia areachieving economic development with poverty reductions comparedto Latin America and Africa.New data on comparative and global wealth inequality134

SociologyCONTENTSPart One: IntroductionChapter 1: Perspectives and Concepts in the Study of SocialStratificationChapter 2: Dimensions of Inequality in the United StatesChapter 3: Social Stratification in Human Societies: The History ofInequalityPart Two: Explanations of Social Stratification: StratificationTheoriesChapter 4: Social Stratification Theory: Early StatementsChapter 5: Modern Theories of Social StratificationPart Three: The American Class StructureChapter 6: The Upper ClassChapter 7: The Corporate ClassChapter 8: The Middle and Working ClassesChapter 9: Poverty and the Political Economy of WelfareChapter 10: Gender Stratification and Inequalities: The Persistenceof AscriptionChapter 11: Inequalities of Race and Ethnicity:The Persistence ofAscriptionPart Four: The Process of Social StratificationChapter 12: Social Mobility: Class Ascription and AchievementChapter 13: The Process of LegitimationPart Five: Social Stratification Beyond the United StatesChapter 14: The World Stratification System:Dominance andCompetition Among Core NationsChapter 15: Social Stratification in JapanChapter 16: Social Stratification in GermanyChapter 17: World Stratification and Globalization: The Poor of ThisEarthNEWTHE SOCIALCONSTRUCTION OFDIFFERENCE ANDINEQUALITY: RACE, CLASS,GENDER AND SEXUALITY4th EditionTracy E Ore, St Cloud State University2009 / Softcover / 816 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338008-7Available: February 2008Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4This anthology examines the social construction of race, class, gender,and sexuality and the institutional bases for these relations. Whileother texts discuss various forms of strati cation and the impact ofthese on members of marginalized groups, Ore provides a thoroughdiscussion of how such systems of strati cation are formed andperpetuated and how forms of stratication are interconnected. Criticalthinking questions at the end of each reading and part opening essaysaid students in understanding how the material relates to their livesand how their own attitudes, actions, and perspectives may serve toperpetuate a strati ed system. 13 new readings have been addedfocusing on the experiences of immigrants, contemporary issues insocial institutions, current examples of how the media portrays eventsand much more.NEW TO THIS EDITION 13 new readings have been added focusing on the experiencesof immigrants, contemporary issues in social institutions, currentexamples of how the media portrays events and much more Updated statistical information from the latest US Census reportdata regarding inequality Additional readings focusing on contemporary issues in socialinstitutions including “Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality”,“Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces”, and much more Updated statistical information to support assertions utilizing themost recent studies of race, class, gender and sexuality available. New reading that provides a current example of how the mediaportrays events: “Metaphors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames,and Their Consequences in Hurricane Katrina” Systematically examines how and why the categories of race,class, gender, and sexuality are constructed, maintained, experienced,and transformed.CONTENTS* An asterisk indicates a new reading.PrefacePart I: Constructing DifferencesRace & Ethnicity1. Racial Formations- Michael Omi and Howard Winant2. Optional Ethnicities: For Whites Only?- Mary C. Waters*3. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from ImmigrantCommunities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen4. How Jews Became White Folks and What that Says about Racein America- Karen BrodkinSocial Class5. Race, Wealth, and Equality- Melvin L. Oliver and Thomas M.Shapiro6. Media Magic: Making Class Invisible- Gregory Mantsios*7. Doubly Divided: The Racial Wealth Gap- Meizhu Lui*8. Getting Corporations off the Public Dole- Janice ShieldsSex & Gender9. The Social Construction of Gender- Judith Lorber*10. The Five Sexes, Revisited- Anne Fausto-Sterling11. The Transgender Paradigm Shift toward Free Expression- HollyBoswell12. Masculinity as Homophobia: Fear, Shame, and Silence in theConstruction of Gender Identity- Michael S. KimmelSexuality13. The Invention of Heterosexuality- Jonathan Ned Katz*14. Sexuality and Gender in Children’s Daily Worlds- Barrie Thorneand Zella Luria15. Sexual Identity and Bisexual Identities: The Struggle for Self-Description in a Changing Sexual Landscape- Paula C. Rust16. Naming All the Parts- Kate BornsteinPart II: Maintaining Inequalities: Systems of Oppression &PrivilegeSocial InstitutionsFamily17. Our Mothers’ Grief: Racial Ethnic Women and the Maintenanceof Families- Bonnie Thornton Dill18. Families on the Fault Line: America’s Working Class Speaks Aboutthe Family, the Economy, Race, and Ethnicity- Lillian B. Rubin19. Stability and Change in Chicano Men’s Family Lives- ScottColtrane*20. Gay and Lesbian Families Are Here- Judith StaceyEducation21. Savage Inequalities: Children in America’s Schools- JonathanKozol22. Preparing for Power: Cultural Capital and Curricula in America’sElite Boarding Schools- Peter W. Cookson, Jr and Caroline HodgesPersell23. Civilize Them with a Stick- Mary Crow Dog and Richard Erdoes24. Missing in Interaction- Myra Sadker and David Sadker135

Sociology*25. Schools and the Social Control of Sexuality- Melinda MiceliWork & the Economy26. Jobless Ghettos: The Social Implications of the Disappearanceof Work in Segregated Neighborhoods- William J. Wilson27. “We’d Love to Hire Them But?”: The Meaning of Race forEmployers- Joleen Kirschenman and Kathryn M. Neckerman28. The Glass Escalator: Hidden Advantages for Men in the ‘Female’Professions- Christine L. Williams29. Cause of Death: Inequality- Alejandro ReussThe State & Public Policy*30. Welfare Reform, Family Hardship, and Women of Color- LindaBurnham*31. Beyond Crime and Punishment- Bruce Western and BeckyPetit32. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TelevisionDomestic Sitcoms- Richard Butsch33. The Effects of Affirmative Action on Other Stakeholders- BarbaraReskin34. The Possessive Investment in Whiteness: Racialized SocialDemocracy and the “White” Problem in American Studies- GeorgeLipsitzMedia35. A Half Century of Class and Gender in American TV DomesticSitcoms- Richard Butsch36. Distorted Reality: Hispanic Characters in TV Entertainment-Robert*37. Gay Characters in Conventional Spaces: Will and Grace andthe Situation Comedy Genre- Kathleen Battles and Wendy Hilton-Morrow*38. Metahors Matter: Disaster Myths, Media Frames, and TheirConsequences in Hurricane Katrina- Kathleen Tierney, ChristineBevc, and Erica KuligowskiLanguage & Culture39. Racism in the English Language- Robert B. Moore40. Self, Identity & the Naming Question: Reflections on the Languageof Disability- Irving Kenneth Zola41. How to Tame a Wild Tongue- Gloria Anzaldúa42. The Dark Side of Sports Symbols- Stanley D. Eitzen and MaxineBaca ZinnViolence & Social Control43. Where Race and Gender Meet: Racism, Hate Crimes, andPornography- Helen Zia44. Fraternities and Collegiate Rape Culture: Why are SomeFraternities More Dangerous Places for Women?- A. Ayres Boswell& Joan Z. Spade45. The Construction of Masculinity and the Triad of Men’s Violence-Michael Kaufman46. Homophobia as a Weapon of Sexism- Suzanne PharrPart III: Experiencing Difference & Inequality in Everyday Life47. Making Systems of Privilege Visible- Stephanie M. Wildman withAdrienne D. Davis.48. “Yes, I Follow Islam, But I’m Not a Terrorist”- Nada El Sawy49. A Dozen Demons- Ellis Cose*50. Always Running- La Vida Loca, Gang Days in L.A.- LuisRodriguez51. The Story of My Body- Judith Ortiz Cofer*52. We are All Suspects Now: Untold Stories from ImmigrantCommunities after 9/11- Tram Nguyen53. “Gee, You Don’t Seem Like An Indian From the Reservation”-Barbara Cameron*54. Living Fearlessly With and Within Differences: My Search forIdentity Beyond Categories and Contradictions- Shefali Milczarek-Desai55. Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting by in America- BarbaraEhrenreich56. I Am Your Welfare Reform- Annie Downey57. Learning to Fight- Geoffrey Canada58. Bisexuality, Feminism, Men, and Me- Robyn OchsPart IV: Resistance & Social Change59. Toward a New Vision: Race, Class, and Gender as Categories ofAnalysis and Connection- Patricia Hill Collins60. Cultural Resistance: Reconstructing Our Own Images- Yen LeEspritu*61.Good for the Hood?- Anmol Chaddha62. Seeing More Than Black & White: Latinos, Racism, and theCultural Divides- Elizabeth Martinez*63. How White People Can Serve as Allies to People of Color in theStruggle to End Racism- Paul Kivel64. Dismantling Noah’s Ark: Gender and Equality- Judith Lorber*65. Voices of a New Movimiento- Roberto LovatoIndex* An asterisk indicates a new reading.NEWTHE MEANING OFDIFFERENCE: AMERICANCONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE,SEX AND GENDER, SOCIALCLASS, AND SEXUALORIENTATION5th EditionKaren E Rosenblum, George Mason UniversityToni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University2009 / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338005-6Available: January 2008Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5The Meaning of Difference focuses on the social construction ofdifference as it operates in American formulations of race and ethnicity,sex and gender, social class, sexual orientation, and disability. Theconceptual structure of this text-reader comes from four frameworkessays addressing the construction of difference, the experienceof difference, the social meaning of difference, and social actionthat might bridge differences. Each framework essay is followedby a set of readings selected for readability, conceptual depth, andapplicability to a variety of statuses. Boxed inserts throughout offer rst-person accounts from real people, many of them students.This edition features an expanded focus on disability and 29 newreadings, including articles on how immigration is transforming thenature of American race and ethnic categories, the changing shapeof higher education, and the experience of Americans of Middle-Eastern descent.NEW TO THIS EDITION 29 new readings covering topics such as intersectionality,disability, social class, language, and much more Systematic incorporation of disability as a master statusfunctioning in ways comparable to race and ethnicity, sex and gender,sexual orientation, and social class New section focused on intersectionality of identities includingselections that involve discussions about gender, race, and the nation;disability and gender; white privilege; and much more 4 new personal accounts including “My Strategies” by EricJackson; “How I Learned to Appreciate Printers” by Sandra PamelaMaida; “A Time I Didn’t Feel Normal” by Heather Calendar; and “MySecret” by Sarah Herschler New readings about the impact of immigration on America’s raceand ethnic categories and experience of those of Middle Easterndescent136

Sociology A selection on the experience of transracial adoption: “Adoptedin China, Seeking Identity in America,” by Lynette Clemetson (NewYork Times) New material focusing on the effects of Hurricane Katrina onAmerican racial stereotypes found in a reading titled “Loot or Find:Fact of Fame?” By Cheryl L. Harris and Devon W. Carbado New readings directly addressing the circumstances of collegestudents including the topics of disability, transgenderism, interracialinteractions, preferential treatment of the children of alumni in collegeadmissions, and access to higher education based on social classCONTENTSSection I - Framework Essay: Constructing Categories ofDifferenceWhat is Race?What Is Sex? What Is Gender?What Is Social Class?What Is Sexual Orientation?What is Disability?Section II - Framework Essay: Experiencing DifferenceRace and EthnicitySex and GenderSexual OrientationSocial ClassDisabilitySection III - Framework Essay: The Meaning of DifferenceIntersectionalityLaw, Politics, and PolicyLanguageSection IV - Framework Essay: Bridging DifferencesSociological TheoryCLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY5th EditionGeorge Ritzer, University of Maryland—College Park2008 / 552 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352817-5Available: June 2007The fth edition of Classical Sociological Theory by George Ritzer,one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readers acomprehensive overview of the major classical theorists and schoolsof sociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographicalsketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical andintellectual context. This helps students to better understand theoriginal works of classical authors as well as to compare and contrastclassical theories.CONTENTSBiographical and Autobiographical SketchesPrefacePart I. Introduction To Sociological TheoryChapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The EarlyYearsChapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The LaterYearsPart II: Classical Sociological TheoryChapter 3. Alexis de TocquevilleChapter 4. August ComteChapter 5. Herbert SpencerChapter 6. Karl MarxChapter 7. Emile DurkheimChapter 8. Max WeberChapter 9. Georg SimmelChapter 10. Early Women Sociologists and Classical SociologicalTheory, 1830-1930Chapter 11. W.E.B. DuBoisChapter 12. Thorstein VeblenChapter 13. Karl MannheimChapter 14. George Herbert MeadChapter 15. Alfred SchutzChapter 16. Talcott ParsonsReferencesPermissions AcknowlegmentsIndexInternational EditionMODERN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY7th EditionGeorge Ritzer, University of Maryland---College Park2008 / Softcover / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340410-3ISBN: 978-0-07-110177-6 [IE]Available: May 2007The seventh edition of Modern Sociological Theory by George Ritzer,one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readersa comprehensive overview of the major contemporary schools ofsociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographicalsketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical andintellectual context. This helps students to better understand the originalworks and helps them appreciate the diversity of contemporary theory.CONTENTSPart I: IntroductionChapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The EarlyYearsChapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The LaterYears

SociologyInternational EditionInternational EditionSOCIOLOGICAL THEORY7th EditionGeorge Ritzer, University of Maryland-College Park2008 / 816 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352818-2ISBN: 978-0-07-128406-6 [IE]Available: June 2007The seventh edition of Sociological Theory by George Ritzer, oneof the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives readersa comprehensive overview of the major theorists and schools ofsociological thought. Key theories are integrated with biographicalsketches of theorists, and theories are placed in their historical andintellectual context. This helps students to better understand theoriginal works of classical and modern theorists as well as to compareand contrast the latest substantive theories.CONTENTSPart I: Classical Sociological TheoryChapter 1: A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early YearsChapter 2: Karl MarxChapter 3: Emile DurkheimChapter 4: Max WeberChapter 5: Georg SimmelPart II: Modern Sociological Theory: The Major SchoolsChapter 6: A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The LaterYearsChapter 7: Structural Functionalism, Neofunctionalism, and ConflictTheoryChapter 8: Varieties of Neo-Marxian TheoryChapter 9: Systems TheoryChapter 10: Symbolic InteractionismChapter 11: EthnomethodologyChapter 12: Exchange, Network, and Rational Choice TheoriesChapter 13: Contemporary Feminist TheoryPart III: Recent Integrative Developments in SociologicalTheoryChapter 14: Micro-Macro Integration and Agency-StructureIntegrationPart IV: From Modern to Postmodern Social Theory (andBeyond)Chapter 15: Contemporary Theories of ModernityChapter 16: Globalization TheoryChapter 17: Structuralism, Poststructuralism, and the Emergence ofPostmodern Social TheoryAppendix: Sociological Metatheorizing and a Metatheoretical Schemafor Analyzing Sociological TheoryCONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORYAND ITS CLASSICAL ROOTS: THE BASICS2nd EditionGeorge Ritzer, University of Maryland—College Park2007 / 320 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-299759-0 (No Selling Rights)ISBN: 978-0-07-110732-7 [IE]Available: March 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ritzer2This text is the teaching solution for instructors who need a brief,accessible text for sociological theory. An affordable alternative toa standard text, this volume still includes a range of pedagogicalfeatures; it is concise yet comprehensive, informative, and engagingfor a wide range of students.CONTENTSChapter 1. IntroductionChapter 2. Classical Theories-IChapter 3. Classical Theories-IIChapter 4. Contemporary Grand Theories-IChapter 5. Contemporary Grand Theories-IIChapter 6. Contemporary Theories of Everyday LifeChapter 7. Contemporary Integrative TheoriesChapter 8. Contemporary Feminist Theories (by Patricia MadooLengermann and Jill Niebrugge)Chapter 9. Postmodern Grand TheoriesChapter 10. Globalization Theory138

SociologySociological Theory- ReadersSociology of WomenNEWTHE DISCOVERY OF SOCIETY8th EditionRandell Collins, University of PennsylvaniaMichael Makowsky, Musart Company2010 / Softcover / 320 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340419-6Available: April 2009[Details unavailable at press time]READINGS IN SOCIAL THEORY5th EditionJames Farganis, Vassar College2008 / 448 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352813-7Available: March 2007This highly regarded anthology of primary readings in sociologicaltheory covers the major theorists and schools from classic tocontemporary, modernist, and postmodernist, in a chronologicalorganization. Its comprehensive coverage and excellent introductionsmake this book appealing as a main text for professors who want toencourage students to read and interpret original sources, or as asupplement for those who use a traditional main text.CONTENTSIntroduction: The Classic Tradition To Post-Modernism: AnOverviewPart One: The Classic Tradition1. Karl Marx: Alienation, Class Struggle, and Class Consciousness2. Émile Durkheim: Anomie and Social Integration Introduction3. Max Weber: The Iron Cage4. Georg Simmel: Dialectic of Individual and Society6. W.E.B. Du Bois: Double Consciousness and The Public IntellectualPart Two: Contemporary Sociological Theory7. Functionalism8. Conflict Theory9. Exchange Theory and Rational Choice10. Phenomenological Sociology and Ethnomethodology11. Symbolic Interaction12. Feminist TheoryPart Three: Modernity and Post-Modernity13: Critical Theory14. Post-ModernismNEWWOMEN’S VOICES,FEMINIST VISIONS:CLASSIC ANDCONTEMPORARYREADINGS4th EditionSusan Shaw and Janet Lee of Oregon StateUniversity2009 / Softcover / 800 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351228-0Available: September 2008Women’s Voices is an introductory women’s studies reader crafted toinclude a balance of recent contemporary readings with historical andclassic pieces. This student-friendly text provides short, accessiblereadings re ecting the diversity of women’s experiences. Chapterintroductions provide background information on each chapter’s topic,including explanations of key concepts and ideas and references tothe subsequent reading selections. This new edition includes revisedchapter framework essays that re ect the most up-to-date researchand theory in the eld.NEW TO THIS EDITION Updated all chapter introductions with new statistics anddiscussions over contemporary themes and issues including enhancedcoverage of what women’s studies is—with expanded coverage ofthird wave feminism; analysis of the intersections of gender, race, andclass; and current statistics on health and reproductive rights. Reworked sidebars now include the most recent informationavailable including diverse areas such as global employment trendsfor women and women in prison. Updated the collection of readings to include cutting edge articles,essays and poems that reflect a diversity of voices (especially ofyoung, third wave feminists) on multiple issues and current debatesin women’s studies. Some of these new readings include “TheMovement that Has No Name,” by Deborah Siegel, “RethinkingGender,” by Debra Rosenberg, “Women and Leadership,” by Alice N.Eagly and Linda L. Carli, “Too Many Women in College?” by PhyllisRosser, and “The Women’s Movement Against Sexual Harassment,”by Carrie N. Baker.CONTENTSPreface1 Women’s Studies: Perspectives and Practices2 Systems of Privilege and Inequality in Women’s Lives3 Learning Gender in a Diverse Society4 Sex, Power, and Intimacy5 Inscribing Gender on the Body6 Health and Reproductive Rights7 Family Systems, Family Lives8 Women’s Work Inside and Outside the Home9 Women Confronting and Creating Culture10 Resisting Violence Against Women11 State, Law, and Social Policy12 Religion and Spirituality in Women’s Lives13 Activism, Change, and Feminist FuturesSuggestions for Further ReadingCredits C-Index I-139

SociologyNEWPart Four: Social ChangeSection Ten: Global Politics and the StateSection Eleven: Social Protest and the Feminist MovementFEMINIST FRONTIERS8th EditionVerta Taylor and Leila J Rupp of University ofCalifornia-Santa BarbarNancy Whittier, Smith College2009 / Softcover / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340430-1Available: September 2008The most widely used anthology of feminist writings and the rst toincorporate issues of sexual identity and sexual diversity, FeministFrontiers has stood the test of time. With both classic and contemporaryreadings on cutting-edge topics that cut across disciplinary andgenerational lines, this text presents the full diversity of women’slives, exploring commonalities as well as interconnected differences.Feminist Frontiers offers analyses of the causes and consequencesof gender inequality in interaction with class, race, ethnicity, sexuality,ability, and nationality. This anthology also introduces students tofeminist theory and methodology. This edition maintains consistentcoverage of diverse ethnicities and a global perspective, with greaterattention to transgender issues and disability.NEW TO THIS EDITION Greater coverage of transgender issues through readings suchas “Transgender Feminism: Queering the Woman Question”, bySusan Stryker and others Incorporation of more coverage in disability and other body issuesthrough boxed inserts and readings such as a Rosemarie Garland-Thomson boxed insert, The Blind Man’s Harley: White Canes andGender Identity in America by: Catherine Kudlick (reading #5), andFeminist Consumerism and Fat Activists: Grassroots Activism and theDove ‘Real Beauty’ Campaign by: Judy Taylor (reading #13) More explicit attention to heterosexuality in readings from GustYep and Ariana Ochoa Camacho; “Trading on Heterosexuality:College Women’s Gender Strategies and Homophobia”, by: LauraHamilton, and much more Inclusion of very current issues including interracial families,college women’s sexuality, sex tourism and global sex work, the warin Iraq, and the marriage promotion movement Editing of some longer articles to be more readable and appealingto today’s students (although the commitment to presenting full-lengtharticles rather than short excerpts remains)CONTENTSPrefacePart One: IntroductionSection One: Diversity and DifferenceSection Two: Theoretical PerspectivesPart Two: Gender, Culture, and SocializationSection Three: Representation, Language, and CultureSection Four: SocializationPart Three: Social Organization of GenderSection Five: WorkSection Six: FamiliesSection Seven: SexualitiesSection Eight: BodiesSection Nine: Violence against WomenSociology of GenderNEWRECONSTRUCTINGGENDER: AMULTICULTURALANTHOLOGY5th EditionEstelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston2009 / Softcover / 720 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338006-3Available: January 2008Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5Reconstructing Gender is an anthology that addresses thecontemporary experiences from a variety of women and men.Drawing from a wide range of sources including research articles,critical essays, and personal narratives, Disch has chosen accessible,engaging, and provocative readings that represent many perspectivesand experiences. Eleven part-opening introductions identify importantissues in the general eld of study, describe the readings, remind thereader about some of the central themes emerging throughout thebook, and raise questions for students to consider.NEW TO THIS EDITION 23 of the 74 articles are new to this edition addressing welfarereform and immigration; beauty rituals; environmental toxicity;disability; sexual orientation; gender bias in science from theperspective of a transgendered man; young feminists of color; anupdate on the women’s peace movement in Israel; bullying; theperspective of an Black American Muslim feminist; homophobia inprofessional sports; and anti-violence activism by men. A dozen of the readings address international issues such asglobal feminism, immigration, and war More coverage of recent hot topics such as the effects of war onmen and women, sexism in hip-hop, homophobia in the Army, andsame-sex marriage in Massachusetts just to name a few Includes a name index and a subject index at the end of theanthology providing an easy reference for students and instructors.CONTENTS* indicates new readingGeneral IntroductionPart I: It’s not just about Gender1. The Puerto Rican Dummy and the Merciful Son, Martín Espada2. From Nothing, A Consciousness, Helen Zia3. The Past is Ever Present: Recognizing the New Racism, PatriciaHill Collins4. Angry Women Are Building: Issues and Struggles Facing AmericanIndian Women Today, Paula Gunn Allen140

Sociology5. “J.A.P.”-Slapping: The Politics of Scapegoating, Ruth Atkin andAdrienne Rich*6. Latinas in the Fault Lines of Citizenship, Alejandra Marchevskyand Jeanne Theoharis7. White Privilege: Unpacking the Invisible Knapsack, PeggyMcIntosh8. Controlled or Autonomous: Identity and the Experience of theNetwork, Women Living Under Muslim Laws, Farida Shaheed*9. Under and (Inside) Western Eyes: At the Turn of the Century,Chandra Talpade Mohanty10. Patriarchy, the System: An It, Not a He, a Them or an Us, AllanJohnsonPart II: Gender Socialization11. The Social Construction of Gender, Judith Lorber12. Boyhood, Organized Sports, and the Construction of Masculinities,Michael A. Messner13. Who’s the Fairest of Them All?, Jill Nelson14. He Defies You Still: The Memoirs of a Sissy, Tommi Avicolli15. Growing Up Hidden, Linnea Due*16. Masculinity as Homophobia, Michael KimmelPart III: Embodiment*17. Making Up Is Hard To Do, Sheila Jeffreys18. “A Way Outa No Way”: Eating Problems among African American,Latina, and White Women, Becky W. Thompson19. Yellow Woman and a Beauty of the Spirit, Leslie Marmon Silko20. Just Walk on By: A Black Man Ponders His Power to Alter PublicSpace, Brent Staples21. Taking It, Leonard Kriegel22. I’m Not Fat, I’m Latina, Christy Haubegger23. The Tyranny of the Esthetic: Surgery’s Most Intimate Violation,Martha A. CoventryPart IV: Communication24. For the White Person Who Wants to Know How to Be My Friend,Pat Parker*25. Men and Women are from Earth, Rosalind Barnett and CarylRivers26. Real Men Don’t Cry . . . and Other “Uncool” Myths, Phil W.Petrie27. The New Momism, Susan J. Douglas and Meredith W.Michaels28. Claiming Jezebel: Black Female Subjectivity and SexualExpressions in Hip-Hop, Ayana Byrd29. Where are the women? The strange case of the missing feminists.When was the last time you saw one on TV?, Laura ZimmermanPart V: Sexuality*30. A Pornographic World [What is normal?], Robert Jensen31. The Myth of the Sexual Athlete, Don Sabo*32. Passing Last Summer, Domenika Bednarska33. The Impact of Multiple Marginalization, Paula C. RustPart VI: Families*34. Contemporary Challenges to Black Women’s ReproductiveRights, Jeanne Flavin35. Bloodmothers, Othermothers, and Women-Centered Networks,Patricia Hill Collins36. Dilemmas of Involved Fatherhood, Kathleen Gerson37. Man Child: A Black Lesbian Feminist’s Response, Audre Lorde38. I Am a Man, Raul E. Ybarra39. What is marriage for?, E.J. Graff*40. Free to Marry, At Last—May 17, 2004, Pat Gozemba and KarenKahnPart VII: Education41. Missing in Interaction, Myra and David Sadker42. “What About the Boys?” What the Current Debates Tell Us--andDon’t Tell Us--About Boys in Schools, Michael S. Kimmel43. Does Gender Matter?, Ben A. Barres44. Black and Female: Reflections on Graduate School, bell hooks*45. Mentors in Violence Program, Jackson KatzPart VIII: Paid Work and Unemployment*46. The End of Welfare as We Know It: An Overview of the PRWORA,Alejandra Marchevsky and Jeanne Theoharis47. Sixty Cents to a Man’s Dollar, Ann Crittenden48. “Global Woman” by Barbara Ehrenreich and Arlie RussellHochschild49. America’s Dirty Work: Migrant Maids and Modern-Day Slavery,Joy M. Zarembka50. The Globetrotting Sneaker, Cynthia Enloe*51. The Center of Masculine Production: Gay Athletes in ProfessionalSports, Eric Anderson*52. Men at War: Vietnam and Agent Orange, Cynthia R. Daniels*53. Fort Bragg: Command, Jeffrey McGowanPart IX: Violence54. Women, Violence, and Resistance, Melanie Kaye/Kantrowitz*55. Eminem’s Popularity is a Major Setback for Girls and Women,Jackson Katz*56. Pictures of Boyhood, Richard Hoffman*57. Injury, Gender, and Trouble, Laurie Schaffner58. Homophobia in Straight Men, Terry A. Kupers59. The Ultimate Growth Industry: Trafficking in Women and Girls,Jan Goodwin60. How Safe Is America?, Desiree Taylor61. Wielding Masculinity Inside Abu Ghraib: Making Feminist Senseof an American Military Scandal, Cynthia Enloe*62. The Private War of Women Soldiers, Helen BenedictPart X: Health and Illness63. Masculinities and Men’s Health: Moving toward Post—SupermanEra Prevention, Don Sabo*64. Health Care Reform – A Woman’s Issue, Catherine DeLowry,Dr.PH65. Reproductive Issues Are Essential Survival Issues for the Asian-American Communities, Connie S. Chan66. Why the Precautionary Principle? A Meditation on PolyvinylChloride (PVC) and the Breasts of Mothers, Sandra Steingraber67. Does Silencio = Muerte? Notes on Translating the AIDS Epidemic,Rafael Campo68. To Be Poor and Transgender, Kai WrightPart XI: A World That Is Truly Human69. Statement of Principles, National Organization for Men AgainstSexism*70. New Black Man, Mark Anthony Neal*71. Feminism’s Future: Young Feminists of Color Take the Mic, DaisyHernández and Pandora L. Leong*72. Tapping Our Strength, Eisa Nefertari Ulen*73. The Women’s Peace Movement in Israel, Gila Svirsky*74. Women and Human Rights, Rita Arditti141

SociologyNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN GENDER4th EditionJacquelyn W White, University of NC-GreensboroIssue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society?Unit 5 From 9 to 5: Gender in the World of WorkIssue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) ImproveWomen’s Lives?Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in theWorkplace?Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due toSocietal Obstacles?Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards?Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong?Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messageto Teens?Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional GenderConstraints?2009 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351529-8Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtmlThis debate-style reader is designed to introduce students tocontroversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent thearguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators,reect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their livelinessand substance and because of their value in a debate framework.Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally andpolitically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKINGSIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts,presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and publicdiscourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills byanalyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments.The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what isgender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover thatwhat might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is somuch more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only)accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have beenprovided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teachingsuggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teachinghints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion aroundthe themes raised by the clashing essays.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Gender_4e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Gender, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Hyde/DeLamater and Lips.CONTENTSUnit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving TargetIssue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny?Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate?Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and SciencesHave a Biological Basis?Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of DifferenceIssue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different?Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and MenInnately Determined?Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responsesto Stress Gender-Based?Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and MenIssue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender?Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levelsof Violence Against Intimate Partners?Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender inChildhoodIssue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry?Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parentsfor Children?Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being?NEWSocial PsychologyInternational EditionSOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY5th EditionStephen L Franzoi, Marquette University2009 / Hardcover / 648 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337059-0ISBN: 978-0-07-128543-8 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/franzoi5Readable research. This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self”as a theme to give students a meaningful context for exploring thekey concepts of social psychology. “Applications” sections have beenincorporated into most chapters, and “Featured Study” sections at theend of every chapter summarize the purpose, method, and resultsof recently published scienti c articles. Retaining the emphasis onmethodology, the text also continues the tradition of strong gendercoverage, while expanding the coverage of social cognition andsocial neuroscience.NEW TO THIS EDITION Streamlined organization. The text has been reduced from 14chapters to 12 for the 5th edition. The formerly separate chapters onAttitudes and Persuasion have been condensed to a single chapter.In addition, the material in the Self, Self-Presentation and PersonPerception, and Thinking About Our Social World chapters has beencombined into a new Self chapter and a new Social Cognition andPerson Perception chapter. Each chapter contains new neuroscience research on socialbehavior. As a sub-theme to The Self, Franzoi explores automaticthinking versus deliberate thinking by integrating the neuroscientificapproach (the “hardware” of thinking) toward social behavior with thesocial-cognitive approach (the “software” of thinking). Expanded applications to students’ everyday lives. Morethan twenty Self/Social Connection Exercises contain self-reportquestionnaires currently being used by researchers, and the results ofstudies employing them are part of the text material. The online versionof these exercises also contains numerous personal reflectionsby students who have used an advance version of this edition intheir social psychology course. These students describe how their142

Sociologyknowledge of social psychology has provided them with insights intotheir own lives and the world in which they live.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introducing Social PsychologyChapter 2 Conducting Research in Social PsychologyChapter 3 The SelfChapter 4 Social Cognition and Person PerceptionChapter 5 Attitudes and PersuasionChapter 6 Stereotyping, Prejudice, and DiscriminationChapter 7 Social InfluenceChapter 8--Group BehaviorChapter 9 Interpersonal AttractionChapter 10 Intimate RelationshipsChapter 11 AggressionChapter 12 Prosocial Behavior: Helping OthersNEWInternational EditionEXPLORING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY5th EditionDavid Myers, Hope College2009 / Softcover / 528 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337064-4ISBN: 978-0-07-128042-6 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/myersesp5This brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers streamlinedfocus on issues such as belief and illusion, prejudice and diversity,and love and hate. The brevity of each of the book’s 31 stand-alonemodules makes this the perfect text for covering the core conceptsin the eld. By introducing social psychology in an essay format andby writing in a voice that is both solidly scienti c and warmly human,Exploring Social Psychology is able to reveal social psychology asan investigative reporter might, by providing a current summary ofimportant social phenomena, by showing how social psychologistsuncover and explain such phenomena, and by re ecting on theirhuman signi cance. The new edition includes discussion of theHurricane Katrina aftermath as an illustration of hindsight bias andavailability heuristic, the Iraq War and belief perseverance, andterrorism and group polarization.NEW TO THIS EDITION Rich support package for instructors and students. Instructorscan incorporate instructor’s manual suggestions, PowerPoints, andvideos efficiently with McGraw-Hill’s award-winning PrepCenter.For students, icons throughout the text guide the student to theOnline Learning Center to gather more information on each moduleby viewing excerpts from the Social Connection video modules,participating in interactive exercises, and taking module quizzes totest their knowledge.CONTENTSPart One Introducing Social PsychologyModule 1 Doing Social PsychologyModule 2 Did You Know It All Along?Part Two Social ThinkingModule 3 Self-Concept: Who Am I?Module 4 Self-Serving BiasModule 5 The Power of Positive ThinkingModule 6 The Fundamental Attribution ErrorModule 7 The Powers and Perils of IntuitionModule 8 Reasons for UnreasonModule 9 Behavior and BeliefModule 10 Clinical IntuitionModule 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social CognitionPart Three Social InfluenceModule 12 Human Nature and Cultural DiversityModule 13 Gender, Genes, and CultureModule 14 How Nice People Get CorruptedModule 15 Two Routes to PersuasionModule 16 Indoctrination and InoculationModule 17 The Mere Presence of OthersModule 18 Many Hands Make Diminished ResponsibilityModule 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do AloneModule 20 How Groups Intensify DecisionsModule 21 Power to the PersonPart Four Social RelationsModule 22 The Challenge of DiversityModule 23 The Roots of PrejudiceModule 24 The Nature and Nurture of AggressionModule 25 Does the Media Influence Social Behavior?Module 26 Who Likes Whom?Module 27 The Ups and Downs of LoveModule 28 Causes of ConflictModule 29 Blessed Are the PeacemakersModule 30 When Do People Help?Module 31 Social Psychology and the Sustainable FutureReferencesArt CreditsName IndexSubject IndexInternational EditionSOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY9th EditionDavid Myers, Hope College2008 / Hardcover / 864 pgsISBN: 978-0-07-331026-8(with Social Sense Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128670-1 [IE with CD]Available: December 2006Website: http://www.mhhe.com/myers9David Myers’ Social Psychology continues to set the standardby which other Social Psychology texts are judged. Its renownedauthor’s engaging writing style and unique, intimate voice make thetext compelling without being simplistic. The organization logicallymoves the student through the study of how people think about,in uence, and relate to one another, with an appropriate balanceof basic research and application. This edition features additionalcontemporary research, supplemented by video clips and vignettesthat demonstrate social psychology’s relevance.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introducing Social PsychologyPart 1: Social ThinkingChapter 2: The Self in a Social WorldChapter 3: Social Beliefs and JudgmentsChapter 4: Behavior and AttitudesPart 2: Social InfluenceChapter 5: Genes, Culture, and GenderChapter 6: ConformityChapter 7: PersuasionChapter 8: Group Influence143

SociologyPart 3: Social RelationsChapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking OthersChapter 10: Aggression: Hurting OthersChapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving OthersChapter 12: HelpingChapter 13: Conflict and PeacemakingPart 4: Applying Social PsychologyChapter 14: Social Psychology in the ClinicChapter 15: Social Psychology in CourtChapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable FutureEpilogueGlossaryReferencesAcknowledgmentsName IndexSubject IndexSocial Psychology –ReadersANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY7th EditionKaren G Duffy, State University College – GeneseoGary Krolikowski, Empire State College – Saratoga Spg2008 / 208 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339739-9Available: January 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 393.mhtmlThis Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGYprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated tableof contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOMis offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titlesare supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.15. Abu Ghraib Brings A Cruel Reawakening16. Persuasion: What Will It Take to Convince You?Unit 6. Social RelationshipsPart A. Interpersonal RelationshipsNew! 17. Contagious BehaviorNew! 18. Competent Jerks, Lovable Fools, and the Formation ofSocial NetworksPart B. Intimate Relationships19. Isn’t She Lovely?20. If It’s Easy Access That Really Makes You Click, Log On HereNew! 21. Brokeback Mountain: A Gay and a Universal Love StoryUnit 7. Social BiasesPart A. Prejudice22. The Self-Protective Properties of Stigma: Evolution of a ModernClassicNew! 23. Leaving Race BehindPart B. StereotypingNew! 24. Lowered Expectations25. Change of Heart26. Thin Ice: “Stereotype Threat” and Black College StudentsUnit 8. Violence and AggressionNew! 27. A Bicultural Perspective on WorldviewsNew! 28. Anger on the Road29. Bullying: It Isn’t What It Used To Be30. Influencing, Negotiating Skills, and Conflict-Handling: SomeAdditional Research and ReflectionsUnit 9. Altruism, Helping and CooperationNew! 31. The Compassionate InstinctNew! 32. Gift Giving’s Hidden Strings33. Trends in the Social Psychological Study of JusticeUnit 10. Group ProcessesPart A. LeadershipNew! 34. Seven Transformations of Leadership35. When Followers Become ToxicPart B. GroupsNew! 36. To Err Is Human37. Senate Intelligence Report: Groupthink Viewed as Culprit inMove to WarNew! 38. Sports Complex: The Science Behind Fanatic BehaviorCONTENTSUnit 1. Research IssuesNew! 1. How to Be a Wise Consumer of Psychological ResearchNew! 2. Ethnic and Racial Health Disparities Research: Issues andProblemsUnit 2. The SelfNew! 3. Self-Esteem Development Across the Lifespan4. Self-Concordance and Subjective Well-Being in Four CulturesNew! 5. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See YouUnit 3. Social Cognition and Social PerceptionPart A. Social Cognition6. How Social Perception Can Automatically Influence BehaviorNew! 7. Flashbulb Memories: How Psychological Research ShowsThat Our Most Powerful Memories May Be UntrustworthyNew! 8. Culture Affects Reasoning, CategorizationPart B. Social PerceptionNew! 9. The Social Nature of Perception and ActionNew! 10. Perception of Faces and BodiesUnit 4. AttitudesNew! 11. Implicit Discrimination12. The Science and Practice of PersuasionNew! 13. In Search of Pro-AmericanismUnit 5. Social InfluenceNew! 14. “Thin Slices” of Life144

SociologyResearch MethodsInternational EditionInternational EditionNEED TO KNOW: SOCIAL SCIENCERESEARCH METHODSLisa J. McIntyre, Washington State University — Pullman2005 / 400 pages / SoftcoverISBN: 978-0-7674-1317-6ISBN: 978-0-07-123258-6 [IE]CONTENTSChapter One: Why You Need to KnowChapter Two: The Nature of the Scientific EnterpriseChapter Three: The Logic of InquiryChapter Four The Vocabulary of ScienceChapter Five: Doing the Right Thing Ethics in Social ResearchChapter Six: SamplingChapter Seven: Elements of Research DesignChapter Eight: ExperimentsChapter Nine: Survey Research: Part 1: The Art of Asking QuestionsChapter Ten: Survey Research: Part 2: Design and ImplementationChapter Eleven: Unobtrusive MethodsChapter Twelve: Qualitative Research MethodsAppendix A: Using the InternetAppendix B: American Sociological Association, Ethical PrnciplesAppendix C: Tables and FiguresAppendix D: StatisticsAppendix E: Writing Research ReportsIndex/GlossaryBibliographyQUALITATIVE METHODS IN SOCIALRESEARCHKristin Esterberg, University of Massachusetts-Lowell2002 / Softcover / 300 pagesISBN: 978-0-7674-1560-6ISBN: 978-0-07-113129-2 [IE]CONTENTS1. What Is Social Research? Some Practical and TheoreticalConcerns2. Strategies for Beginning Research3. Ethical Issues4. Observation: Participant and Otherwise5. Interviews6. Unobtrusive Measures: Analyzing Texts And Material Artifacts7. Action Research8. Making Sense of Data / Making Sense of Qualitative Data: AProcess of Making Meaning9. Narrative Analysis10. WritingNEWStatisticsSTATISTICS FOR CRIMINOLOGY ANDCRIMINAL JUSTICE3rd EditionRonet Bachman, University of DelawareRaymond Paternoster, University of Maryland-College Park2009 / Hardcover / 720 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312924-2Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/bachman3eStatistical Methods for Criminology and Criminal Justice discussesthe basic statistical procedures comprehensively while keepingit approachable and readable for students. Useful at both theintroductory and intermediate levels, this text contains in-depthcoverage of descriptive statistics, including graphical displaysof data and exploratory data analysis, along with bivariate andmultivariate analyses. Emphasis is placed equally on calculation andinterpretation. The newly revised third edition offers new up-to-datecrime data information and new research examples including specicsrelating to youth crime, youth violence, hate crime and much more.NEW TO THIS EDITION Links discussions of “how to calculate statistics” with contemporaryresearch examples from the field with real data and researchexamples. Third edition updates all crime data and includes many newresearch examples involving crime rate, hate crimes, youth violence,and much more145

Sociology Updated end of chapter SPSS exercises are now found on thetext specific websiteCONTENTSChapter 1: The Purpose of Statistics in the Criminological SciencesChapter 2: Levels of Measurement and AggregationChapter 3: Understanding Data DistributionsChapter 4: Measures of Central TendencyChapter 5: Measures of DispersionChapter 6: Probability Theory and Probability DistributionsChapter 7: Point Estimation and Confidence IntervalsChapter 8: From Estimation to Statistical Test: Hypothesis Testingfor OneChapter 9: Data Analysis With Teo Categorical Variables: The Chi-Square Test and Measures of AssociationChapter 10: Hypothesis Tests Involving Two Population Means orProportionsChapter 11: Hypothesis Tests Involving Three or More PopulationMeans: Analysis of VarianceChapter 12: Bivariate Correlation and RegressionChapter 13: Multivariate Methods: Partial Tables and MultipleRegressionChapter 14: Regression Analysis with a Dichotomous DependentVariable: Logit and Probit ModelsAppendix A: A Review of Basic Mathematical OperationsAppendix B: Statistical TablesAppendix C: ReferencesTHE STATISTICAL IMAGINATION2nd EditionFerris J. Ritchey, University of Alabama At Birmingham2008 / Hardcover / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-333160-7(w/SPSS 14.0)Available: January 2007This basic social science statistics text uses illustrations and exercisesfor sociology, social work, political science, and criminal justice.Praised for a writing style that takes the anxiety out of statisticscourses, the author explains basic statistical principles through avariety of engaging exercises, each designed to illuminate the uniquetheme of examining society both creatively and logically. In an effortto make the study of statistics relevant to students of the socialsciences, the author encourages readers to interpret the results ofcalculations in the context of more substantive social issues, whilecontinuing to value precise and accurate research. The text includescomputer-based assignments with over 10 data sets for use with thefree Student Version SPSS 14.0 CD-ROM that accompanies eachnew copy of the book.CONTENTS1. The Statistical Imagination2. Statistical Analysis: Error Management and Control3. Charts and Graphs: A Picture Says A Thousand Words4. Measuring Averages5 Measuring Dispersion or Spread in a Distribution of Scores6. Probability Theory and the Normal Probability Distribution7. Using Probability Theory to Produce Sampling Distributions8. Parameter Estimation Using Confidence Intervals9. Hypothesis Testing10. Single Sample Hypothesis Tests: Establishing the Representativenessof Samples11. Bivariate Relationships: T-Test for Comparing the Means of TwoGroups12. Analysis of Variance: Differences Among Means of Three orMore Groups13. Nominal Variables: The Chi-Square and Binomial Distributions14. Correlation and Regression Part 1: Concepts and Calculations15. Correlation and Regression Part 2: Hypothesis Testing andAspects of a Relationship16. Rank Order Correlation Between Two Ordinal VariablesAppendices:Appendix A--Review of Basic Mathematical OperationsAppendix B--Statistical Probability TablesAppendix C--Answers to Selected Chapter ExercisesAppendix D--Guide to SPSS for WindowsSPSS / SASInternational EditionREADY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TOSPSS ® 13.0 AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS ®2nd EditionThomas Pavkov, Purdue Univ-Calumet-Hammond2007 / 96 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312665-4ISBN: 978-0-07-125297-3 [IE - without CD]Available: February 2006This guide features concise instructions for accessing and usingSPSS for Windows. Ready, Set, Go! is more than a reference bookfor versions 13.0 and 14.0; through ten guided assignments, studentslearn about statistical analysis of data while also learning the steps inthe research process. The students are guided through assignmentssuch as using frequency distributions, performing the t test, using theone-way ANOVA procedure, computing a correlation, and computingchi-square function.CONTENTSPrefaceAssignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSSAssignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and DescriptiveStatisticsAssignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic FormAssignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two IndependentSamplesAssignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two RelatedSampledAssignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-WayANOVAAssignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way ANOVAAssignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between TwoVariablesAssignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between TwoVariablesAssignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two CategoricalVariables AppendixEntering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS146

SociologyJuvenile DelinquencyDrugs & SocietyDELINQUENCY IN SOCIETY7th EditionRobert M Regoli, University of Colorado-BoulderJohn D Hewitt, Grand Valley State University2008 / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340154-6Available: September 2007Website: http://www.mhhe.com/regoli7This conversational text makes delinquency interesting to read about.Delinquency in Society provides a critical look at a very seriousproblem through a clear and thorough presentation of the theoriesof delinquency. In accessible, student-friendly language the authorsprepare their readers to understand all facets of delinquency, includingthe history, institutional context, and societal reactions to delinquentbehavior, the major biological, psychological, and sociological theoriesof behavior, and the variety of policy implications derived from thosetheories.CONTENTSPrefaceIntroductionChapter 1. Defining DelinquencyChapter 2. Measuring DelinquencyChapter 3. Violent Youth CrimeChapter 4. Illegal Drug Use and DelinquencyChapter 5. Individual Theories of Delinquency: Choice and TraitExplanationsChapter 6. Sociological Theory: Cultural Deviance, Strain, and SocialControlChapter 7. Sociological Theory: Labeling and Conflict ExplanationsChapter 8. Developmental TheoriesChapter 9. Female Delinquency TheoriesChapter 10. The Family and DelinquencyChapter 11. Schools and DelinquencyChapter 12. Peer Group and Gang DelinquencyChapter 13. Police and DelinquencyChapter 14. The Juvenile CourtChapter 15. Juvenile CorrectionsAppendixConstitutional Due Process: Selected Amendments to the UnitedStates ConstitutionReferencesGlossaryIndexesName IndexSubject IndexPhoto CreditsNEWDRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE7th EditionRichard Fields, Private Counseling Practice Tuscon AZ and RedmondWashington2010 / Softcover / 434 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338075-9Available: March 2009NEW TO THIS EDITION Updated and Reorganized: Chapters 1 and 2 have been updatedand reorganized to reflect current information on etiology and trendsin substance abuse and dependence. Treatment and Relapse Prevention: Chapter 11 has beenreorganized and updated to help students to understand both recoveryand relapse prevention. This chapter lays a nice foundation for thosewho will explore careers in the counseling fields. Updated Chapter Pedagogy: This new 6th edition has addedmany teaching and learning aids to each chapter including a chapterin review, chapter learning objectives and discussion questions. New Information on Recovery: Chapter 9 (Change & Interventionfor Substance Abuse Problems) has been revised and updated tofocus on the issues of change and motivation and the ways to helpsubstance abusers to focus on recovery. The chapter outlines ways toovercome denial and defensive rationalizations, and to avoid enablingbehavior while maintaining healthy boundaries.CONTENTSSection I: Understanding Substance Abuse1 Putting Drugs in Perspective2 Why Do People Abuse Drugs?3 Drug-Specific Information4 Definitions of Substance Abuse, Dependence, and AddictionSection II: Family5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems6 Parenting7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family SystemSection III: Prevention, Intervention, and Treatment8 Prevention of Substance-Abuse Problems9 Change, Motivation & Intervention for Substance-AbuseProblems10 Disorders Co-Occurring with Substance Abuse11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment and Relapse PreventionAppendix A: Trends in Annual Prevalence of Use of Various Drugsfor Eight, Tenth, and Twelfth GradersAppendix B: Alcohol/Drug Screening InventoriesAppendix C: Medication ExamplesAppendix D: At-Risk Factors For Substance Abuse147

SociologyNEWInternational EditionDRUGS, SOCIETY, AND HUMAN BEHAVIOR13th EditionCarl L Hart, Columbia UniversityCharles J Ksir, University of Wyoming-LaramieOakley S Ray (deceased)2009 / Softcover / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338079-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128559-9 [IE]Available: October 2008http://www.mhhe.com/hart13eDesigned for the introduction to drugs and substance abuse courseas taught in departments of health education, psychology, biology,sociology, and criminal justice, this full-color market-leading textprovides the latest information on drugs and their effects on societyand human behavior. For over thirty years, instructors and studentshave relied on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral,pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical perspectives.NEW TO THIS EDITION Fully updated. Includes current statistics and trends for druguse and effects, costs of drug control, and the prison population. Keytopics and controversies are also timely including current researchfindings on popular recreational drugs, medical marijuana, drug usein sports, and dietary supplement regulation.CONTENTSSection One: Drug Use in Modern Society1: Drug Use: An Overview2: Drug Use as a Social Problem3: Drug Products and Their RegulationSection Two: How Drugs Work4: The Nervous System5: The Actions of DrugsSection Three: Uppers and Downers6: Stimulants7: Depressants and Inhalants8: Medication for Mental DisordersSection Four: Alcohol9: AlcoholSection Five: Familiar Drugs10: Tobacco11: Caffeine12: Dietary Supplements and Over-the-Counter DrugsSection Six: Restricted Drugs13: Opioids14: Hallucinogens15: Marijuana16: Performance-Enhancing DrugsSection Seven: Prevention and Treatment17: Preventing Substance Abuse18: Treating Substance Abuse and DependenceAppendix A Drug NamesAppendix B Resources for Information and AssistanceGlossaryDRUGS IN AMERICAN SOCIETY7th EditionErich Goode, University of Maryland—College Park2008 / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340149-2Available: May 2007Website: www.mhhe.com/goode7Goode’s Drugs in American Society 7/e is a well-respected, briefinvestigation of the full range of psychoactive drug use; from legal,medical and perscription use to criminal, recreational use and fromcasual use to addiction. Objective pro and con accounts on importantissues like treatment, education, rehabilitation, and legalization givestudents a thorough understanding of the topics. The new seventhedition continues to provide the most balanced and up-to-datecoverage in an accessible, engaging style.CONTENTSPrefacePart 1: IntroductionChapter 1: Drugs: A Sociological PerspectiveChapter 2: Drugs: A Pharmacological PerspectiveChapter 3: Theories of Drug UseChapter 4: Controlling Drugs: The Historical ContextChapter 5: Drugs In The NewsPart 2: Drug Use: Methods and DataChapter 6: How Do We Know It’s True: Methods of ResearchChapter 7: Historical Trends In Drug Consumption: From Past ToCurrent UsePart 3: Drugs and their UseChapter 8: Legal Drugs: Alcohol, Tobacco, and PsychotherapeuticDrugsChapter 9: Marijuana, LSD, and Club DrugsChapter 10: Stimulants: Amphetamine, Methamphetamine, Cocaine,and CrackChapter 11: Heroin and The NarcoticsPart 4: Drugs, Crime, and Drug ControlChapter 12: Drugs and Crime: What’s The Connection?Chapter 13: The Illicit Drug IndustryChapter 14: Drug Control: Law Enforcement, Drug Courts, DrugTreatmentChapter 15: Legalization, Decriminalization, and Harm ReductionSummaryKey TermsReferencesAppendix: Drug-Related WebsitesAuthor IndexSubject Index148

SociologyDrugs & Society –ReadersNEWNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, ANDBEHAVIOR 09/1024th EditionHugh T Wilson, CA State University Sacramento2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-812763-2Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0078127637.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR08/0923rd EditionHugh T Wilson, California State University—Sacramento2009 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339773-3Available: January 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 733.mhtmlThis Twenty-Third Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY,AND BEHAVIOR provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM (ISBN-13:9780073301907/ISBN-10:0073301906)is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/AE_ Drugs_Society_and_Behavior _0809_CorrGuide.pdf This convenient guide matches units in Annual Editions: Drugs,Society, and Behavior 08/09 with corresponding chapters in one of ourbest-selling McGraw-Hill Criminal Justice textbooks by Goode.CONTENTSUnit 1. Living with DrugsNew! 1. Over the LimitNew! 2. Smoking, Drugs, Obesity Top Health Concerns for Kids3. Living the High Life4. Methamphetamine Abuse: A Perfect Storm of ComplicationsNew! 5. HIV ApathyNew! 6. Not Invented Here7. Did Prohibition Really Work?New! 8. Vice Vaccines9. Pass the WeedUnit 2. Understanding How Drugs Work—Use, Dependency,and AddictionNew! 10. Reducing the Risk of Addiction to Prescribed Medications11. Predicting AddictionNew! 12. Better Ways to Target Pain13. The Effects of Alcohol on Physiological Processes and BiologicalDevelopmentNew! 14. A Small Part of the Brain, and Its Profound EffectsNew! 15. The Changing Science of Pain16. The Toxicity of Recreational DrugsNew! 17. Stress and Drug Abuse18. Does Cannabis Cause Psychosis or Schizophrenia?Unit 3. The Major Drugs of Use and AbuseNew! 19. Methamphetamine AbuseNew! 20. Mexico Drug Cartels Reap Big Profits from MethNew! 21. The Taliban’s Opium WarNew! 22. The Opposite ResultNew! 23. The Teen Drinking DilemmaNew! 24. An Update on the Effects of Marijuana and Its PotentialMedical Use149

SociologyUnit 4. Other Trends in Drug UseNew! 25. Fentanyl-Laced Street Drugs “Kill Hundreds”New! 26. A Nation Without Drunk Driving27. Some Cold Medicines Move Behind the CounterNew! 28. Drug AddictionNew! 29. The Right to a Trial,30. New Study Shows 1.8 Million Youth Use InhalantsNew! 31. Teens and Prescription Drugs32. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of PrescriptionDrugs by College StudentsUnit 5. Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs33. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systemsand PopulationsNew! 34. Sobering ThoughtsNew! 35. Students with Fetal Alcohol SyndromeNew! 36. Keep Your Older Patients Out of Medication Trouble37. My Spirit Lives,Roxanne Chinook38. The Problem With Drinking39. High on the JobUnit 6. Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control PolicyNew! 40. Reorienting U.S. Drug Policy41. Is Drug Testing of Athletes Necessary?42. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate Use, and Public PolicyNew! 43. Researchers Explore New Visions for Hallucinogens44. State’s EvidenceNew! 45. Durbin46. How to Stand Up to Big TobaccoUnit 7. Prevention, Treatment, and EducationNew! 47. Keeping Drug Prevention for Kids ‘Real’New! 48. An Update on Adolescent Drug Use49. Combination Treatment for One Year Doubles Smokers’ QuitRate50. Parent PowerNew! 51. Nonconventional and Integrative Treatments of Alcohol andSubstance Abuse52. Exercise and Drug DetoxificationNew! 53. Rehab Reality Check54. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That WorkTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INDRUGS AND SOCIETY8th EditionRaymond Goldberg, State University of NY – Cortland2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351511-3Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 116.mhtmlThis Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: DRUGS AND SOCIETYpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary,an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDESIN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in theclassroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listingof selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our studentwebsite, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSPart 1 Drugs and Public PolicyIssue 1. Should Laws Against Drug Use Remain Restrictive?Issue 2. Should the United States Put More Emphasis on Stoppingthe Importation of Drugs?Issue 3. Are Drinking Age Laws Effective?Issue 4. Are the Dangers of Ecstasy (MDMA) Overstated?Issue 5. Should Pregnant Drug Users Be Prosecuted?Issue 6. Should Drug Addiction Be Considered a Disease?Issue 7. Should the Federal Government Play a Larger Role inRegulating Steroid Use?Part 2 Drugs and Social PolicyIssue 8. Are the Adverse Effects of Smoking Exaggerated?Issue 9. Should Laws Prohibiting Marijuana Use Be Relaxed?Issue 10. Are Psychotherapeutic Drugs Over-Prescribed for TreatingMental Illness?Issue 11. Do the Consequences of Caffeine Outweigh Its Benefits?Issue 12. Should School-age Children with Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) Be Treated with Ritalin and OtherStimulants?Issue 13. Do Consumers Benefit When Prescription Drugs AreAdvertised?Part 3 Drug Prevention and TreatmentIssue 14. Does Secondhand Smoke Endanger the Health ofNonsmokers?Issue 15. Is Alcoholism Hereditary?Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Approved for Medical Use?Issue 17. Should Schools Drug Test Students?Issue 18. Does Drug Abuse Treatment Work?Issue 19. Is Abstinence an Effective Strategy for Drug Education?150

SociologyCriminology – ReadersSociology of Law –ReadersTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INCRIME AND CRIMINOLOGY8th EditionThomas J Hickey, University of Tampa2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339721-4Available: August 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 210.mhtmlThis Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN CRIMEAND CRIMINOLOGY presents current controversial issues in adebate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and developcritical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issuesummary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’smanual with testing material is available for each volume. USINGTAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 Definitions and Explanations of CrimeIssue 1. Is Crime Beneficial to Society?Issue 2. Is Criminal Behavior Determined Biologically?Issue 3. Does IQ Contribute Significantly to Crime?Unit 2 Justice Issues and Contemporary Public PolicyIssue 4. Does the United States Have a Right to Torture SuspectedTerrorists?Issue 5. Is Racial Profiling an Acceptable Law EnforcementStrategy?Issue 6. Should Serious Sex Offenders be Castrated?Issue 7. Should Juvenile Courts Be Abolished?Issue 8. Are the Dangers of Internet Child Pornography Exaggerated?Unit 3 Prison Programs and AlternativesIssue 9. Is it Ethical to Segregate HIV-Positive Inmates?Issue 10. Are Supermax (Control Unit) Prisons an Appropriate Wayto Punish Hardened Criminals?Issue 11. Should Serial Killers and Violent Sexual Predators beQuarantined for Life?Issue 12. Should Private “For-Profit” Corporations Be Allowed to RunU.S. Prisons?Unit 4 Criminal Justice Research, Evaluation, and Policy AnalysisIssue 13. Is Capital Punishment a Bad Public Policy?Issue 14. Will Strict Gun Control Laws Reduce the Number ofHomicides in the United States?Issue 15. Should the Police Enforce Zero-Tolerance Laws?Unit 5 Future Trends in Criminology and Criminal JusticeIssue 16. Should Marijuana be Legalized?Issue 17. Do Three Strikes Sentencing Laws and Other “Get Tough”Approaches Really Work?Issue 18. Should Juries Be Able to Disregard the Law and Free “Guilty”Persons in Racially Charged Cases?Issue 19. Should Behavior Modification Techniques Be Used toBrainwash Criminals?TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONLEGAL ISSUES13th EditionM Ethan Katsh, University of Mass—AmherstWilliam Rose, Albion College2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351509-0Available: September 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515 094.mhtmlThis Thirteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONLEGAL ISSUES presents current controversial issues in a debatestyleformat designed to stimulate student interest and developcritical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issuesummary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’smanual with testing material is available for each volume. USINGTAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 Law and TerrorismIssue 1. Should Persons Who Are Declared to Be “Enemy Combatants”Be Able to Contest Their Detention Before a Judge?Issue 2. Does the President Possess Constitutional Authority to OrderWiretaps on U.S. Citizens?Issue 3. Is the Geneva Convention Irrelevant to Members of al QaedaWho Are Held Prisoner at Guantanamo Bay?Issue 4. Should Someone Held by the CIA and Interrogated in aForeign Country Be Allowed to Sue the U.S. Government?Unit 2 Law and the IndividualIssue 5. Is It Constitutional to Ban Partial-Birth Abortions WithoutProviding for an Exception to Protect the Health of the Mother?Issue 6. Are Restrictions on Physician-Assisted SuicideConstitutional?Issue 7. Does the Sharing of Music Files Through the Internet ViolateCopyright Law?Issue 8. Can the Police Require Individuals to IdentifyThemselves?Unit 3 Law and the StateIssue 9. Do Religious Groups Have a Right to Use Public SchoolFacilities After Hours?Issue 10. Does the Use of High-Technology Thermal Imaging DevicesViolate the Fourth Amendment Search and Seizure Guarantee?Issue 11. Are Laws Requiring Schools and Public Libraries to FilterInternet Access Constitutional?Issue 12. Does the “Cruel and Unusual Punishment “Clause ofthe Eighth Amendment Bar the Imposition of the Death Penalty onJuveniles?Issue 13. Is a Sentence of Life in Prison for Stealing $150 Worth ofVideotapes Constitutional?Issue 14. Is Drug Use Testing of Students Who Participate inExtracurricular Activities Permitted Under the Fourth Amendment?Unit 4 Law and the CommunityIssue 15. Should the United States Require a Secure IdentificationSystem for Citizens?Issue 16. Are Blanket Prohibitions on Cross Burnings Unconstitutional?Issue 17. Should Same-Sex Couples Receive ConstitutionalProtection?151

SociologyIssue 18. Should Children With Disabilities Be Provided WithExtraordinary Care in Order to Attend Regular Classes in PublicSchools?Issue 19. Do Race-Conscious Programs in Public UniversityAdmissions Policies Violate the Fourteenth Amendment’s Guaranteeof Equal Protection Under the Law?Sociology of Sport12: Sports and the Media: Could They Survive Without EachOther?13: Sports and Politics: How Do Governments and GlobalizationInfluence Sports?14: Sports in High School and College: Do Varsity Sport ProgramsContribute to Education?15: Sports and Religion: Is It a Promising Combination?16: Sports in the Future: What Can We Expect?ReferencesName IndexSubject IndexNEWInternational EditionSociology of Education –ReadersSPORTS IN SOCIETY: ISSUES ANDCONTROVERSIES10th EditionJay Coakley, University of Colorado2009 / Softcover / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337654-7ISBN: 978-0-07-128528-5 [IE]Available: November 2008http://www.mhhe.com/coakley10eSports in Society is the de nitive text for the sport sociology course.Taking a global, issues-oriented approach to the study of the roleof sport in society, this text encourages the discussion of currentsports-related controversies and helps students develop criticalthinking skills.NEW TO THIS EDITION Fully updated. Includes how research and theory are used tostudy sports in society, expanded global coverage widens the researchbase with studies and examples from countries around the globe,video games and virtual sports, serious problems such as substanceuse and behaviors dangerous to athletes and spectators, and changesin the definitions of gender ideology. Thought-provoking quotationsfrom athletes, sociologists, journalists, and other experts give voiceto different viewpoints throughout the chapters. New photos and references. Each chapter has been streamlinedand updated to include 40 new photos and over 200 new references,including recent studies exploring the connections between healthand sports, violence and sports, ethnicity and sports, social classand the economics of sports; and ideology and hegemony as relatedto sports.NEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONEDUCATIONAL ISSUES, EXPANDED15th EditionJames Wm Noll, University of Maryland-College Park2010 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-354565-3Available: February 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073545651.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: EDUCATIONAL ISSUES, 15/e EXPANDED presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designed tostimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Eachissue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issueintroduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES INTHE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource withpractical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach inthe classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotatedlisting of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a bookwebsite. Visit www.mhcls.com.CONTENTS1: The Sociology of Sport: What is it and why study it?2: Producing Knowledge About Sports in Society: What is the Roleof Research and Theory?3: Studying the Past: Does It Help us Understand Sports Today?4: Sports and Socialization: Who Plays and What Happens toThem?5: Sports and Children: Are Organized Programs Worth the Effort?6: Deviance in Sports: Is It Out of Control?7: Violence in Sports: How Does It Affect Our Lives?8: Gender and Sports: Does Equity Require Ideological Changes?9: Race and Ethnicity: Are They Important in Sports?10: Social Class: Do Money and Power Matter in Sports?11: Sports and the Economy: What Are the Characteristics ofCommercial Sports?152

SociologyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS:EDUCATION 09/1036th EditionRebecca B Evers, Winthrop University2009 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351638-7Available: October 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516384.mhtmlThis THIRTY-SIXTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational features include: anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotatedtable of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviewsfor each section; a topical index; and an online instructor’s resourceguide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THECLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.29. Books That Portray Characters with Disabilities30. Facing High Stakes in High SchoolUnit 7 Cornerstone to Learning: Reading Is Fundamental31. Drop Everything and Read—But How?32. “You Should Read This Book!”33. Getting Children in 2 Books34. Using Literature Circles with English Language Learners35. Losing the Fear of Sharing Control: Starting a ReadingWorkshop36. When Mama Can’t ReadUnit 8 Rethinking Discipline: Getting the Behavior You Want andNeed to Teach Effectively37. Discipline, Doris Walker-Dalhouse38. Dealing with Rumors, Secrets, and Lies39. Tackling a Problematic Behavior Management Issue40. Developing Effective Behavior Intervention Plans41. Self-Regulation42. School Resource Officer ProgramsUnit 9 Creating Caring Communities of Learners43. Character and Academics44. Promoting Altruism in the Classroom45. Becoming Citizens of the World46. Democracy and Education47. Thinking about PatriotismCONTENTSUnit 1 Assessment and Research: Do They Inform Our TeachingPractices?1. Where Have All the Strong Poets Gone?2. Proficiency for All?3. Bridging the Gap Between Research and Practice4. Learning to Love Assessment5. The Case for and Against HomeworkUnit 2 Reformatting Our Schools6. George’s Complaint7. Assessing Applied Skills8. From the Mouths of Middle Schoolers: Important Changes for HighSchool and College9. Charting a New Course for Schools10. A Choice That Works11. Five Trends for SchoolsUnit 3 The Challenges of Diversity and Poverty12. As Diversity Grows, So Must We13. Mélange Cities14. What Families Want15. African American Parents: Improving Connections with TheirChild’s Educational Environment16. Becoming Adept at Code-Switching17. Nine Powerful PracticesUnit 4 Education That is Relevant to the Real World18. The Essential Cognitive Backpack19. High Schools Have Got It Bad for Higher Ed—And That Ain’tGood20. All of Our Students Thinking21. Industrial Arts: Call It What You Will, the Need Still ExistsUnit 5 Preparing Teachers to Teach All Students in All Schools22. Teacher Dispositions as Predictors of Good Teaching23. “Not Writing It Out But Writing It Off”24. Why Teacher Networks (Can) Work25. Letters to a Young TeacherUnit 6 Issues in the Inclusive Classroom27. Overcoming Lethargy in Gifted and Talented Education withContract Activity Packages28. Confronting Ableism153

SociologyNEWNEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS ON EDUCATIONALISSUES15th EditionJames Wm Noll, University of Maryland-College Park2009 / Softcover / 408 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351520-5Available: January 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515205.mhtmlThis Fifteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: EDUCATIONAL ISSUESpresents current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, anissue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THECLASSROOM, ISBN 0073343900 is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Educational_Issues_15e.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Educational Issues, 15/e with the corresponding chapters in one ofour best-selling McGraw-Hill Education textbooks by Spring.CONTENTSUnit 1 Basic Theoretical IssuesIssue 1. Should Schooling Be Based on Social Experiences?Issue 2. Should the Curriculum Be Standardized for All?Issue 3. Should Behaviorism Shape Educational Practices?Issue 4. Is Constructivism the Best Philosophy of Education?Issue 5. Should Global Competition Steer School Reform?Unit 2 Current Fundamental IssuesIssue 6. Can the Public Schools Produce Good Citizens?Issue 7. Has Resegregation Diminished the Impact of Brown?Issue 8. Can Federal Initiatives Rescue Failing Schools?Issue 9. Do High-Stakes Assessments Improve Learning?Issue 10. Should “Public Schooling” Be Redefined?Unit 3 Current Specific IssuesIssue 11. Has the Supreme Court Reconfigured American Education?Issue 12. Do Charter Schools Merit Public Support?Issue 13. Is Privatization the Hope of the Future?Issue 14. Is Full Inclusion of Disabled Students Desirable?Issue 15. Can Current High School Reform Curtail Dropouts?Issue 16. Is “Intelligent Design” a Threat to the Curriculum?Issue 17. Is There a Crisis in the Education of Boys?Issue 18. Should Homework Be Abolished?Issue 19. Do Computers Negatively Affect Student Growth?Issue 20. Should Alternative Teacher Training Be Encouraged?Issue 21. Can Merit Pay Accelerate School Improvement?CLASSIC EDITIONSOURCES: EDUCATION4th EditionCraig Kridel, University of South Carolina2009 / 352 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337974-6Available: October 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 743.mhtmlThis volume brings together over 40 selections of enduring intellectualvalue--classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--that haveshaped the study of education and our contemporary understandingof it.This title is supported by www.mhclsdushkin.com, a student Website that provides study support tools and links to links to relatedWeb sites.CONTENTSChapter 1 Postmodernism, Liberation Pedagogy, and the Conservative/Moderate Traditions in Educational Thought: An IntroductoryComparisonChapter 2 The Conservative Tradition in Educational ThoughtChapter 3 Student Experience-Centered “Progressive” EducationChapter 4 Critical Perspectives in Educational ThoughtChapter 5 SchoolingChapter 6 Curriculum Theory and PracticeChapter 7 Curriculum Development and the Language of EducationalDebateChapter 8 The Struggle for Freedom in EducationChapter 9 Perspectives on the Struggle for Freedom in EducationChapter 10 Women and EducationChapter 11 The Political Economy of American EducationChapter 12 The Struggle for Civil Liberty in the SchoolsChapter 13 Testing and the Critical Response to ItChapter 14 The Cognitive Revolution in LearningChapter 15 Social ChangeChapter 16 Culture and EducationChapter 17 Renewed Alternative Visions for the Future of Education:Rudolph Steiner and Maria Montessori Revisited (A Plan for EducationWhich Can Fit Any Ideological Model)154

SociologyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INEARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION2nd EditionKaren Menke Paciorek, Eastern Michigan University2008 / 312 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351530-4http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515302.mhtmlThis Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: EARLY CHILDHOODEDUCATION presents current controversial issues in a debate-styleformat designed to stimulate student interest and develop criticalthinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issuesummary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’smanual with testing material is available online for each volume.USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellentinstructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating thiseffective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES readerfeatures an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites andis supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 Children in Families and SocietyIssue 1. Should Brain Science Guide Educational Practice?Issue 2. Should Young Children Use Computers?Issue 3. Is Time-Out an Effective Guidance Technique?Issue 4. Does Nightly Homework Improve Academic Performance?Unit 2 Children in Educational ProgramsIssue 5. Should Superhero or Violent Play Be Discouraged?Issue 6. Should Transition Grades Be Abolished?Issue 7. Is Being Older Better When Entering Kindergarten?Issue 8. Is Grade Retention Harmful to Children?Issue 9. Should Educators Address Students’ Unhealthy LifestyleChoices?Issue 10. Are English Learners Best Served in an ImmersionLanguage Model?Issue 11. Does Learning to Read Involve More Than Phonics?Issue 12. Should Recess Be Included in a School Day?Issue 13. Are Looping Classrooms Effective Learning Settings?Unit 3 Educational PoliciesIssue 14. Should Public Money Be Spent on Universal Preschool?Issue 15. Is Regular Testing the Best Way to Improve AcademicPerformance?Issue 16. Will School Improvement Efforts Alone Narrow the Racial/Ethnic Achievement Gap?Issue 17. Should Corporal Punishment in Schools Be Outlawed?Issue 18. Are Boys in Crisis in Our Schools?Sociology of Health –ReadersNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: HEALTH 09/1030th EditionEileen L Daniel, SUNY- Brockport2009 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351632-5Available: October 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516325.mhtmlThis Thirtieth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HEALTH providesconvenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected from thebest of the public press. Organizational features include: an annotatedlisting of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table ofcontents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews foreach section; and an online instructor’s resource guide with testingmaterials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN0073301906, is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1: Promoting Healthy Behavior Change1. The Perils of Higher Education2. Is Health Promotion Relevant Across Cultures and theSocioeconomic Spectrum?3. We Can Do Better: Improving the Health of the American People4. Health: The New Sex Symbol5. On the Road to WellnessUnit 2: Stress and Mental Health6. Unhappy? Self-Critical? Maybe You’re Just a Perfectionist7. Stressed Out Nation8. Seasonal Affective Disorder9. Dealing with the Stressed10. Attacking the MythsUnit 3: Nutritional Health11. Fat City12. When It Pays to Buy Organic13. This Package May Say Healthy, But This Grocer Begs to Differ14. Suck on This15. An Oldie Vies for Nutrient of the DecadeUnit 4: Exercise and Weight Management16. A Big-Time Injury Striking Little Players’ Knees17. The Skinny Sweep-Stake18. How Sleep Affects Your Weight19. The World is FatUnit 5: Drugs and Health20. Great Drug, but Does It Prolong Life?21. Some Cold Medicines Moved Behind the Counter22. Drinking Too Much, Too Young23. The Changing Face of Teenage Drug Abuse—The Trend towardPrescription Drugs24. Helping Workers Kick the HabitUnit 6: Sexuality and Relationships25. You, Me and Porn Make Three26. Scents and Sensibility27. Love at the Margins28. Girl or Boy? As Fertility Technology Advances, So Does anEthical DebateUnit 7: Preventing and Fighting Disease29. ‘Diabesity,’ a Crisis in an Expanding Country155

Sociology30. Sex, Drugs, Prisons, and HIV31. The Battle Within32. Keep Your Heart Healthy33. How AIDS Changed America34. A Mandate in TexasUnit 8: Health Care and the Health Care System35. Pharmacist Refusals: A Threat to Women’s Health36. Curbing Medical Costs: The ‘unpopular problem’37. Thanks, But No Thanks38. The Silent Epidemic—The Health Effects of IlliteracyUnit 9: Consumer Health39. Dentists Frown at Overuse of Whiteners40. Gynos Removing Wrinkles?41. Medical Tourism: What You Should Know42. Deep into Sleep43. Caution: Killing Germs May Be Hazardous to Your HealthUnit 10: Contemporary Health Hazards44. From Smoking Boom45. In Katrina’s Wake46. Facing an Uncertain Future47. HIV Apathy48. Fear and Allergies in the Lunchroom49. Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus Aureus: The Latest HealthScare50. The Noisy Epidemic: Physical and Mental Stress in a High-Decibel WorldUnit 3 Mind/Body RelationshipIssue 10. Should Addiction to Drugs Be Labeled a Brain Disease?Issue 11. Do Religion and Prayer Benefit Health?Unit 4 Sexuality and Gender IssuesIssue 12. Is it Necessary for Pregnant Women to Completely Abstainfrom All Alcoholic Beverages?Issue 13. Should Pro-Life Health Providers Be Allowed to DenyPrescriptions on the Basis of Conscience?Unit 5 Public Health IssuesIssue 14. Should Parents Be Allowed to Opt Out of Vaccinating TheirChildren?Issue 15. Does Anabolic Steroid Use Cause Serious Health Problemsfor Athletes?Issue 16. Will Global Warming Negatively Impact Human Health?Unit 6 Consumer HealthIssue 17. Is it Safe to Consume Genetically Engineered Foods?Issue 18. Does Obesity Cause a Decline in Life Expectancy?Sociology of SexualityInternational EditionTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INHEALTH AND SOCIETY8th EditionEileen L Daniel, SUNY – Brockport2008 / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339723-8Available: September 2007Website: http://www.mchls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 237.mhtmlThis Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN HEALTHAND SOCIETY presents current controversial issues in a debatestyleformat designed to stimulate student interest and developcritical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issuesummary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’smanual with testing material is available for each volume. USINGTAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1 The Health Care IndustryIssue 1. Should Purchasing Health Insurance Be Mandatory?Issue 2. Should Life Sustaining Medical Care Be Rationed Basedon Age?Issue 3. Is Medical Debt a Major Contributor to PersonalBankruptcy?Issue 4. Is the Pharmaceutical Industry Responsible for the High Costof Prescription Drugs?Unit 2 Health and SocietyIssue 5. Is Drug Testing Vital to the Workplace?Issue 6. Should Doctors Ever Help Terminally Ill Patients to CommitSuicide?Issue 7. Should the Government Regulate the Sale, Advertisement,and Distribution of Junk Food?Issue 8. Should Race Play a Role in the Treatment and Study ofDisease?Issue 9. Should Embryonic Stem Cell Research Be Permitted?HUMAN SEXUALITY: DIVERSITY INCONTEMPORARY AMERICA WITHSEXSOURCE CD-ROM AND POWERWEB5th EditionBryan Strong, University of California—Santa Cruz, Christine DeVault,Cabrillo College, Barbara Sayad, University of California, Monterey Bayand William Yarber, Indiana University—Bloomington2005 / Softcover with CDROM / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-297490-4 (No selling rights)(Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-111425-7 [IE With CD and Powerweb]Browse: http://www.mhhe.com/strong5CONTENTS1. Perspectives on Human Sexuality2. Studying Human Sexuality3. Female Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response4. Male Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response5. Gender and Gender Roles6. Sexuality Over the Life Span7. Love, Intimacy, and Sexuality8. Communicating about Sex9. Sexual Expression10. Variations in Sexual Behavior11. Contraception and Birth Control12. Conception, Pregnancy, and Childbirth13. The Sexual Body in Health and Illness14. Sexual Difficulties, Dissatisfaction, Enhancement and Therapy15. Sexually Transmitted Infections16. HIV and AIDS17. Sexual Coercion: Harassment, Aggression, and Abuse18. Sexually Explicit Materials, Prostitution, and Sex Laws156

SociologySociology of Sexuality –ReadersNEWNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN SEXUALITY31st EditionBobby Hutchison, Modesto Jr College2010 / Softcover / 224 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351634-9Available: February 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073516341.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.NEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INHUMAN SEXUALITY11th EditionWilliam J Taverner, Fairleigh Dickinson University2010 / Softcover / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-354563-9Available: March 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073545635.mhtmlTAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY, 11/e presents currentcontroversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulatestudent interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue isthoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, anda postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is availablefor each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM isalso an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKINGSIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.TAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN GENDER4th EditionJacquelyn W White, University of NC-Greensboro2009 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351529-8Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtmlThis debate-style reader is designed to introduce students tocontroversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent thearguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators,reect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their livelinessand substance and because of their value in a debate framework.Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally andpolitically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKINGSIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts,presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and publicdiscourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills byanalyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments.The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what isgender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover thatwhat might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is somuch more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only)accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have beenprovided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teachingsuggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teachinghints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion aroundthe themes raised by the clashing essays.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Gender_4e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Gender, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Hyde/DeLamater and Lips.CONTENTSUnit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving TargetIssue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny?Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate?Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and SciencesHave a Biological Basis?Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of DifferenceIssue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different?Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and MenInnately Determined?Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responsesto Stress Gender-Based?Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and MenIssue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender?Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levelsof Violence Against Intimate Partners?Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?Unit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender inChildhoodIssue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry?Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parentsfor Children?157

SociologyIssue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being?Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society?Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of WorkIssue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) ImproveWomen’s Lives?Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in theWorkplace?Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due toSocietal Obstacles?Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards?Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong?Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messageto Teens?Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional GenderConstraints?NEWSex RolesTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN GENDER4th EditionJacquelyn W White, University of NC-GreensboroTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INHUMAN SEXUALITY10th EditionWilliam J Taverner, Fairleigh Dickinson University2008 / 368 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-339719-1Available: March 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397 199.mhtmlThis Tenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designed tostimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Eachissue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issueintroduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THECLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practicalsuggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom.Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selectedWorld Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. The Nature of SexIssue 1. Can Sex Be Addictive?Issue 2. Is Oral Sex Really Sex?Issue 3. Is Masters and Johnson’s Model an Accurate Description ofSexual Response?Issue 4. Is the G Spot a Myth?Issue 5. Is the Testosterone Patch the Right Cure for Low Libido inWomen?Unit 2. Sex and SchoolsIssue 6. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make SomeCollege Campuses Healthier than Others?Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach About Abstinence?Issue 8. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination Before theyEnroll in School?a Gender Bias?Unit 3. Reproduction TechnologyIssue 10. Should Parents be Allowed to Select the Sex of TheirBaby?Issue 11. Should Emergency Contraception be Available Over theCounter?Issue 12. Should Federal Funding of Stem Cell be Restricted?Unit 4. Sex and SocietyIssue 13. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?Issue 14. Should Society Support Cohabitation Before Marriage?Issue 15. Is Pedophilia Always Harmful?Issue 16. Should Female Circumcision be Banned?Issue 17. Shold the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”?Issue 18. Should Sexual Content on the Internet be Restricted?2009 / Softcover / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351529-8Available: March 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515299.mhtmlThis debate-style reader is designed to introduce students tocontroversies in gender studies. The readings, which represent thearguments of leading psychologists and other social commentators,reect a variety of viewpoints and have been selected for their livelinessand substance and because of their value in a debate framework.Students will be exposed to a rich, exciting, and emotionally andpolitically charged body of theory, research, and practice. TAKINGSIDES: GENDER, containing 20 issues organized into six parts,presents hotly debated issues in contemporary scholarly and publicdiscourse. Students will actively develop critical thinking skills byanalyzing opposing viewpoints and reach considered judgments.The issues will challenge students to consider what is sex, what isgender, and when is either relevant, and why. They will discover thatwhat might appear to be binary, biologically based distinction is somuch more. An Instructor’s Resource Guide (available online only)accompanies the book. For each issue, the following have beenprovided: a synopsis of each author’s position on the issue, teachingsuggestions, and multiple-choice and essay questions. The teachinghints consist of suggestions for generating class discussion aroundthe themes raised by the clashing essays.NEW TO THIS EDITION Correlation Guide: www.mhhe.com/mhcp/CorrelationGuides/TS_Gender_4e_Corrguide.pdf This convenient guide matches the issues in Taking Sides:Gender, 4/e with the corresponding chapters in one of our best-sellingMcGraw-Hill Psychology textbooks by Hyde/DeLamater and Lips.CONTENTSUnit 1 Definitions and Cultural Boundaries: A Moving TargetIssue 1. Is Anatomy Destiny?Issue 2. Is Gender Identity Innate?Issue 3. Do Sex Differences in Careers in Mathematics and SciencesHave a Biological Basis?Unit 2 Different Strokes: The Question of DifferenceIssue 4. Are Women and Men More Similar Than Different?Issue 5. Are Different Patterns of Communication in Women and MenInnately Determined?Issue 6. Are the Fight-or-Flight and Tend-and-Befriend Responsesto Stress Gender-Based?Unit 3 Violence in the Daily Lives of Women and MenIssue 7. Are Expressions of Aggression Related to Gender?Issue 8. Gender Symmetry: Do Women and Men Commit Equal Levelsof Violence Against Intimate Partners?Issue 9. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?158

SociologyUnit 4 From Ozzie and Harriet to My Two Dads: Gender inChildhoodIssue 10. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Able to Marry?Issue 11. Can Lesbian and Gay Couples Be Appropriate Parentsfor Children?Issue 12. Are Fathers Essential for Children’s Well-Being?Issue 13. Is Fetal Sex Selection Harmful to Society?Unit 5 From 9 To 5: Gender in the World of WorkIssue 14. Does the “Mommy Track” (Part-Time Work) ImproveWomen’s Lives?Issue 15. Can Social Policies Improve Gender Inequalities in theWorkplace?Issue 16. Is the Gender Wage Gap Justified?Issue 17. Are Barriers to Women’s Success as Leaders Due toSocietal Obstacles?Unit 6 Gender and Sexuality: Double Standards?Issue 18. Is Female Circumcision Universally Wrong?Issue 19. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Messageto Teens?Issue 20. Can Women’s Sexuality Be Free from Traditional GenderConstraints?Technology & SocietyNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS INSOCIETY 09/1015th EditionPaul De Palma, Gonzaga University2010 / Softcover / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352854-0Available: February 2009http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528544.mhtmlAnnual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed toprovide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of currentarticles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers,and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on aregular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodicalsources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars,researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. TheAnnual Editions volumes have a number of common organizationalfeatures designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom:a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topicguide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anda brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an onlineInstructor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using AnnualEditions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for ourpopular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906)or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.NEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN SCIENCE,TECHNOLOGY, ANDSOCIETY, EXPANDED8th EditionThomas A Easton, Thomas College2009 / Softcover / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351535-9Available: August 2008http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073515353.mhtmlThis EXPANDED Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHINGVIEWS IN SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY presents TWOADDITIONAL current controversial issues in a debate-style formatdesigned to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinkingskills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, anissue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testingmaterial is available online for each TAKING SIDES volume. USINGTAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructorresource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features anannotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supportedby our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.ContentsUnit 1 The Place of Science and Technology in SocietyIssue 1. Does Politics Come Before Science in Current GovernmentDecision Making?Issue 2. Should Government Restrict the Publication of Unclassifiedbut “Sensitive” Research?Issue 3. Should the Internet Be Neutral?Unit 2 The EnvironmentIssue 4. Should Society Act Now to Halt Global Warming?Issue 5. Is It Time to Revive Nuclear Power?Issue 6. Will Hydrogen Replace Fossil Fuels for Cars?Unit 3 Human Health and WelfareIssue 7. Do Falling Birth Rates Pose a Threat to Human Welfare?Issue 8. Is There Sufficient Scientific Research to Conclude That CellPhones Cause Cancer?Issue 9. Should DDT Be Banned Worldwide?Issue 10. Should Potential Risks Slow the Development ofNanotechnology?Issue 11. Are Genetically Modified Foods Safe to Eat?Unit 4 SpaceIssue 12. Should We Expand Efforts to Find Near-Earth Objects?Issue 13. Will the Search for Extraterrestrial Life Ever Succeed?Issue 14. Is “Manned Space Travel” a Delusion?Unit 5 The Computer RevolutionIssue 15. Does the Internet Strengthen Social Connections?Issue 16. Does the Spread of Surveillance Technology Threaten Privacy?Issue 17. Should the World’s Libraries Be Digitized?Unit 6 EthicsIssue 18. Is the Use of Animals in Research Justified?Issue 19. Is It Ethically Permissible to Clone Human Cells?Issue 20. Is Wind Power Green?Issue 21. Are “Space Sunshades” a Possible Answer to GlobalWarming?159

SociologyANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS INSOCIETY 08/0914th EditionPaul De Palma, Gonzaga University2008 / 240 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352848-9Available: October 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528 48x.mhtmlThis Fourteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS INSOCIETY provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articlesselected from the best of the public press. Organizational featuresinclude: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; anannotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction;brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and an instructor’sresource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONSIN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors.ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website,www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1. Introduction1. Five Things We Need to Know About Technological ChangeNew! 2. Slouching Toward the Ordinary3. On the Nature of ComputingUnit 2. The EconomyNew! 4. The Subprime Loan MachineNew! 5. Click Fraud6. The Big Band Era7. The Beauty of Simplicity8. The Software WarsNew! 9. Scan This Book!Unit 3. Work and the WorkplaceNew! 10. National ID11. Brain Circulation12. The New Face of the Silicon AgeNew! 13. Computer Software Engineers14. The Computer Evolution15. Making Yourself UnderstoodNew! 16. E-Monitoring in the WorkplaceUnit 4. Computers, People, and Social Participation17. New Technologies and Our Feelings: Romance on the Internet18. How Do I Love Thee?New! 19. The Perfect Mark20. Back-to-School BloggingNew! 21. E-Mail Is for Old PeopleUnit 5. Societal Institutions: Law, Politics, Education, and theMilitary22. The Copyright ParadoxNew! 23. Piracy, Computer Crime, and IS Misuse at the University24. Facing Down the E-MaelstronNew! 25. Can Blogs Revolutionize Progressive Politics?New! 26. Center StageNew! 27. The Coming Robot ArmyUnit 6. Risk28. Why Spyware Poses Multiple Threats to Security29. Terror’s Server30. The Virus UndergroundNew! 31. Secrets of the Digital DetectivesNew! 32. Data on the Elderly, Marketed to Thieves33. The Fading Memory of the State34. False Reporting on the Internet and the Spread of RumorsUnit 7. International Perspectives and IssuesNew! 35. China’s Tech Generation Finds a New Chairman toVenerateNew! 36. Is the Crouching Tiger a Threat?37. Restoring the Popularity of Computer Science38. China’s Computer WastelandNew! 39. Cat and Mouse, on the WebNew! 40. In Search of a PC for the PeopleNew! 41. A Nascent Robotics CultureNew! 42. March of the RobolawyersNew! 43. Best-Kept SecretsNew! 44. Toward Nature-Inspired Computing45. The Intelligent Internet46. Mind ControlComparative SocietiesNEWGLOBAL SOCIOLOGY: INTRODUCING FIVECONTEMPORARY SOCIETIES5th EditionLinda Schneider & Arnold Silverman, Nassau County Community College2010 / Softcover / 352 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340418-9Available: January 2009[Details unavailable at press time]JAPAN AND SINGAPOREBy Yun Hui Tsu2006 / 324 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-125623-0Available: June 2006[An Asian Publication]Japan and Singapore have a common history going back onehundred and fty years. This shared experience is both complex andcontradictory and has many aspects: marriages, friendships, culturalexchanges, business relations, and mutual learning interlaced witheconomic competition, communal rivalry, and war. The strong bilateralrelations between the two countries are likely to continue and remainvital to both countries’ economic, social and political development. Thisvolume offers, for the rst time, a multidisciplinary survey of Japan-Singapore relations. Examining a wide range of topics on prewarhistory, economic cooperation, cultural and social trends, and bilateraltrade and diplomacy, this book will be of interest to both specialistsand members of the public concerned about regional affairs.CONTENTS1. When “Advancing South” Meets “Looking East”2. A Social History of the Japanese in Singapore to 19453. Indians and Chinese in Japan’s Trade with Singapore before theAsian-Pacific War4. The Chinese and the Japanese in Colonial Singapore, 1870s to19415. Japanese Direct Investment in Singapore: Pokka and Kikkoman6. Japan-Singapore Economic Partnership Agreement: Origins andImplications7. Japanese Women Working in Singapore8. The Culture of Japanese Businessmen in Singapore9. The Japanese Kindergarten of Singapore: “Internalization” and“Internationalization”10. The Learn from Japan Campaign in Singapore11. Teaching and Learning Japanese in SingaporeContributors160

SociologySpecial TopicsSpecial Topics – ReadersNEWTERRORISM ANDCOUNTERTERRORISMUNDERSTANDING THE NEWSECURITY ENVIRONMENT,READINGS ANDINTERPRETATIONS3rd EditionRussell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer of USMilitary AcademyNatasha E Bajema2009 / 696 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337979-1Available: February 2008Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 794.mhtmlIn this new edition of TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM:UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY ENVIRONMENT,READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS, Brigadier General (Retired)Russell Howard, Major Reid Sawyer and Natasha Bajema havecollected original and previously published seminal articles andessays by political scientists, government of cials, and members ofthe nation’s armed forces. The editors and several of the authors writefrom practical eld experience in the nation’s war on terrorism. Othershave had signi cant responsibility for planning government policyand responses. The contributors include a majority of the signi cantnames in the eld including John Arquilla, Richard Betts, MarthaCrenshaw, Rohan Gunaratna, Bruce Hoffman and Paul Pillar. PartOne of the book analyzes the philosophical, political, and religiousroots of terrorist activities around the world and discusses the national,regional, and global effects of historical and recent acts of terrorism.In addition to material on the threats from suicide bombers, as wellas chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear weapons, thereare also important contributions analyzing new and growing threatssuch as genomic terrorism. Part Two deals with past, present, andfuture national and international responses to--and defenses against--terrorism. Essays and articles in this section analyze and debatethe practical, political, ethical, and moral questions raised by militaryand non-military responses (and pre-emptive actions) outside of thecontext of declared war. This section has expanded on the previousedition to include three timely chapters on terrorism and the media,the role of the private sector, and winning the war on terrorism.CONTENTSUnit I Defining the ThreatChapter 1 Defining Terrorism: Means, Ends, and MotivesChapter 2 Understanding the Facilitators of Modern TerrorismChapter 3 The New TerrorismChapter 4 Religion and the Intersection with TerrorismChapter 5 Modern Methods and Modes of AttackUnit II Countering the Terrorist ThreatChapter 6 Terrorism and the MediaChapter 7 The Challenges of Terrorism to a Free SocietyChapter 8 Strategies and Approaches for Combating TerrorismChapter 9 Leveraging the Role of the Private SectorChapter 10 Winning the War on TerrorismWEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION ANDTERRORISMRussell D Howard, US Military AcademyJames J F Forest, US Military Academy2008 / 624 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337970-8Available: March 2007Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379 700.mhtml)In TERRORISM AND WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION ANDDISRUPTION, Brigadier General (Retired) Russell Howard and Dr.James Forest have collected original and previously published seminalarticles and essays by scientists, academics, government of cials,and members of the nation’s security and intelligence communities.The editors and several of the authors write from practical eldexperience in nonproliferation and counterterrorism efforts. Othershave had signicant responsibility for developing government policiesto address the threat of weapons of mass destruction and terrorism.The contributors include a majority of the signicant names in the eldincluding Bruce Hoffman, Brian Jenkins, Jonathan Tucker, RohanGunaratna, David Franz, Richard Betts, William Rosenau, and DavidAlbright. Unit One of the book introduces key terms and addressesimportant strategic and policy debates. Authors explain how the newforms of terrorism affect the post-9/11 security environment andintroduce the notion that weapons of mass destruction could giveterrorists short-term, asymmetric attack advantages over conventionalmilitary forces. Unit Two offers detailed accounts of the characteristics,availability, and dangers of specic types of WMD, along with four casestudies that associate theory with practice—an important feature ofthis volume. Unit Three deals with past, present, and future nationaland international responses to—and defenses against—the threat ofWMD terrorism. and in the nal section of the volume, authors predictfuture WMD threats and seek to draw on past events and mistakesin order to identify lessons and strategies for the future.Appendices include a primer on bioterrorism and fact sheets onchemical, biological, nuclear and radiological terrorism.CONTENTSPart I. IntroductionChapter 1.1 Definitions, Trends, and the Concept of “NewTerrorism”Chapter 1.2 The Nature of the Post-9/11 WMD Terrorism ThreatChapter 1.3 The WMD Terrorism HypeChapter 1.4 The Terrorist WMD of ChoicePart II. Understanding the ThreatChapter 2.1 Different “Faces” of Nuclear TerrorismChapter 2.2 Radiological Dispersal DevicesChapter 2.3 Sabotage of Nuclear Facilities and other CriticalInfrastructureChapter 2.4 BioterrorismChapter 2.5 Chemical TerrorismChapter 2.6 Food Security and Agricultural and TerrorismChapter 2.7 CyberterrorismChapter 2.8 Case Study #1: Ricin Plot in London 2003Chapter 2.9 Case Study #2: Jemaah IslamiyahChapter 2.10 Case Study #3: Aum ShinrikyoChapter 2.11 Case Study #4: al QaedaChapter 2.12 Case Study #5: A.Q. Khan NetworkChapter 2.13 Case Study #6: Iraq as an Example of State-DirectedWMD TerrorismPart III. Responding to the ThreatChapter 3.1 Deterrence and PreemptionChapter 3.2 Intelligence and WMDChapter 3.3 WMD Detection TechnologyChapter 3.4 Nonproliferation RegimesChapter 3.5 Interdiction and Law Enforcement161

SociologyChapter 3.6 Case Study #1: The Public Health Response to the 2001Anthrax AttacksChapter 3.7 Case Study #2: Hurricane Katrina and EmergencyResponseChapter 3.8 Case Study #3: The Response to the 1995 Attack inTokyo, JapanPart IV. Lessons Learned and Future ThreatsChapter 4.1 The Need for a Comprehensive, MultidimensionalStrategyChapter 4.2 Gaps in the International Framework for CombatingTerrorismChapter 4.3 Future ThreatsChapter 4.4 ConclusionAppendix162

TITLE INDEXAAbnormal Psychology Media and Research Update with Mindmap, 4e Nolen-Hoeksema 65Abnormal Psychology: Media and Research with Mindmap II CD, Updated 5e Halgin 65Abnormal Psychology with Mindmap Plus CD-ROM and Powerweb, 9e Alloy 66Adolescence, 12e Santrock 30Adolescence, 8e Steinberg 31Adolescence: Continuity, Change, and Diversity, 6e Cobb 31Adult Development and Aging, 3e Papalia 34Adult Development and Aging, 6e Hoyer 33American Ethnicity: The Dynamics and Consequences of Discrimination, 6e Aguirre 130Annual Editions: Adolescent Psychology, 6e Stickle 33Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21e Cox 35, 127Annual Editions: Aging 09/10, 22e Cox 34, 126Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 08/09, 6e Jubilan 80Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 09/10, 7e Jubilan 80Annual Editions: Child Growth And Development 09/10, 16e Junn 28Annual Editions: Computers in Society 08/09, 14e De Palma 160Annual Editions: Computers in Society 09/10, 15e De Palma 159Annual Editions: Developing World 09/10, 19e Griffiths 134Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 08/09, 23e Wilson 70, 149Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10, 24e Wilson 69, 149Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 08/09, 10e Dickinson 35, 49, 129Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e Dickinson 34, 48, 128Annual Editions: Education 09/10, 36e Evers 153Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 09/10, 24e Cauley 44Annual Editions: Educational Psychology, 23e Cauley 45Annual Editions: Health 09/10, 30e Daniel 155Annual Editions: Homeland Security, 2e Badey 113Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update), 38e Freiberg 20Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10, 37e Freiberg 21Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e Hutchison 95, 157Annual Editions: Personal Growth and Behavior 07/08, 26e Duffy 14, 67Annual Editions: Psychology 08/09, 2009 Update, 39e Duffy 13Annual Editions: Psychology 09/10, 40e Buskist 12Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 16e Kromkowski 133Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 17e Kromkowski 132Annual Editions: Social Problems 08/09, 36e Finsterbusch 111Annual Editions: Social Psychology, 7e Duffy 54, 144Annual Editions: Sociology 08/09, 37e Finsterbusch 106Annual Editions: Sociology 09/10, 38e Finsterbusch 106Annual Editions: The Family 09/10, 35e Gilbert 115, 120Annual Editions: Urban Society, 13e Siegel 130163

TITLE INDEXA (con’t)Annual Editions: Urban Society, 14e Levine 129Annual Editions: Violence and Terrorism 08/09, 11e Badey 111Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak Performance, 6e Williams 85BBehavioral Statistics in Action, 3e Vernoy 78CCases in Child and Adolescent Development for Teachers Defrates-Densch 28, 32Child and Adolescent Development for Educators, 3e Meece 26, 30Child Development Patterson 24Child Development: A Topical Approach and Making the Grade CD ROM Papalia 27Child Development: An Introduction, 12e Santrock 26Child Psychology: A Contemporary View Point, 7e Parke 25Child Psychopathology Haugaard 36, 71Child’s World, A, 11e Papalia 23Children, 10e Santrock 25Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4e Kridel 154Classic Edition Sources: Human Development, 3e Diessner 22Classic Edition Sources: Sociology, 4e Finsterbusch 107Classical Sociological Theory, 5e Ritzer 137Conceptual History of Psychology, A Greenwood 89Contemporary Sociological Theory and Its Classical Roots: The Basics, 2e Ritzer 138Counseling and Psychotherapy Today Austad 68Counselling in Schools: Theories, Processes and Techniques Tan 43DDelinquency in Society, 7e Regoli 147Developmental Psychopathology, 5e Wenar 37Dimensions of Human Sexuality, 6e Byer 94Discovery of Society, The, 8e Collins 105, 139Diversity in Early Care and Education Honoring Differences, 5e Gonzalez-Mena 47Drugs in American Society, 7e Goode 148Drugs in Perspective, 7e Fields 68, 147Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 13e Hart 69, 148164

TITLE INDEXEEdPsych: Modules Bohlin 41Educational Psychology, 4e Santrock 41Enhancing Cognitive Funtions Applications Across Contexts Tan 42Essentials of Behavioral Research: Methods and Data Analysis, 3e Rosenthal 76Essentials of Life-Span Development Santrock 19Essentials of Psychology with Making the Grade CD-ROM Lahey 12Essentials of Understanding Psychology, 8e Feldman 8Experiencing Race, Class, and Gender in The United States, 5e Fiske-Rusciano 123Exploring Social Psychology, 5e Myers 53, 143FFamilies: A Sociological Perspective Newman 117Feminist Frontiers, 8e Taylor 140Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology, 7e Hunt 79GGlobal Sociology: Introducing Five Contemporary Societies, 5e Schneider 105, 160Guiding Your Children, 4e Reynolds 29HHealth Psychology, 7e Taylor 61History of Psychology, 4e Hothersall 89Human Development, 9e Candell 17Human Development, 11e Papalia 18Human Development Across the Lifespan, 7e Dacey 17Human Factors in Engineering and Design, 7e Sanders 85Human Sexuality: Diversity in Contemporary America with Sexsource CD-ROM and Powerweb, 5e Strong 94, 156IInfancy & Childhood Patterson 24Intimate Relationships, 5e Miller 58, 93Intimate Relationships, Marriages and Families, 7e Degenova 114Introduction to Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice Compas 67165

TITLE INDEXJJapan and Singapore Tsu 160LLast Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, The, 8e Despelder 48, 127Lectures on the Psychology of Women, 4e Chrisler 58Life-Span Development, 12e Santrock 18MMapping the Social Landscape: Readings in Sociology, 5e Ferguson 102Marriage and Families: Intimacy, Diversity and Strengths, 6e Olson 115, 119Marriage and Family: The Quest for Intimacy, 7e Lauer 113, 117Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, Rosenblum 125, 136and Sexual Orientation, The, 5eMethods in Behavioral Research, 10e Cozby 75Modern Sociological Theory, 7e Ritzer 137Multicultural Psychology, 2e Mio 55, 61NNeed to Know: Social Science Research Methods Mcintyre 145PPerception, 5e Blake 80Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature, 3e Larsen 56Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts in Sociology, The, 4e Mcintyre 103Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology, The, 4e Mcintyre 103Praxis Series Official Guide, The Educational Testing Service 46Principles of Research in Behavioral Science, 2e Whitley 77Pscyhological Testing and Assessment, 7e Cohen 79Psychological Testing and Assessment: An Introduction to Tests and Measurement, 6e Cohen 79Psychology and Your Life Feldman 7Psychology of Success, 10e Waitley 62Psychology with In-Psych Plus Student CD-ROM and Powerweb, Updated 7e Santrock 12Psychology: An Introduction, 10e Lahey 10Psychology: Making Connections Feist 7Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior, 4e Passer 11Public and Private Families: A Reader, 5e Cherlin 114, 118Public and Private Families: An Introduction, 5e Cherlin 118166

TITLE INDEXQQualitative Methods in Social Research Esterberg 145RReadings in Social Theory, 5e Farganis 139Ready, Set, Go! A Student Guide to SPSS ® 13.0 and 14.0 for Windows ® , 2e Pavkov 78, 146Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology, 5e Disch 121, 140Research Design and Methods: A Process Approach, 7e Bordens 76Research Methods in Psychology, 8e Shaughnessy 75Research Methods in Psychology: Ideas, Techniques and Reports Spatz 77Rethinking the Color Line: Readings in Race and Ethnicity, 4e Gallagher 131Revisiting Sociology (In Chinese) Ho 105SScience of Psychology: An Appreciative View, The King 11Sex & Gender, 6e Lips 37, 59Sexuality Today, 9e Kelly 93Social Cognition, from Brains to Culture Fiske 57Social Construction of Difference and Inequality: Race, Class, Gender and Sexuality, The, 4e Ore 123, 135Social Problems and the Quality of Life, 11e Lauer 110Social Psychology, 5e Franzoi 53, 142Social Psychology, 9e Myers 54, 143Social Stratification and Inequality, 7e Kerbo 134Sociological Theory, 7e Ritzer 138Sociologically Examined Life: Pieces of the Conversation, The, 4e Schwalbe 104Sociology Matters, 4e Schaefer 102Sociology, 11e Schaefer 104Sociology: A Brief Introduction, 8e Schaefer 101Sociology: Diversity, Conflict, and Change Neubeck 105Sociology: The Core, 9e Hughes 101Sport Psychology, 6e Cox 86Sports in Society: Issues and Controversies, 10e Coakley 152Statistical Imagination, The, 2e Ritchey 146Statistics for Criminology and Criminal Justice, 3e Bachman 145167

TITLE INDEXTTaking Sides: Clashing Views in Abnormal Psychology, 5e Halgin 66Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Adolescence, 2e Rue 32Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Childhood And Society, 7e Del Campo 29, 47Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Crime and Criminology, 8e Hickey 151Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Drugs and Society, 8e Goldberg 71, 150Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Early Childhood Education, 2e Paciorek 155Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychology, 5e Abbeduto 46Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 8e Schroeder 115, 119Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 7e Schroeder 116, 121Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 4e White 38, 60, 142, 157, 158Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Health and Society, 8e Daniel 156Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 10e Taverner 95, 158Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 11e Taverner 95, 157Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Lifespan Development, 2e Guest 22Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Race and Ethnicity, 7e D’angelo 132Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Science, Technology, and Society, Expanded, 8e Easton 159Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 12e Levine 126Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 13e Levine 125Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, 15e Noll 152, 154Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Legal Issues, 13e Katsh 151Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Psychological Issues, 15e Slife 14Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, 15e Finsterbusch 108, 112Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, Expanded, 15e Finsterbusch 106, 110Terrorism and Counterterrorism Understanding the New Security Environment, Howard 109, 161Readings and Interpretations, 3eTheories of Personality, 7e Feist 56Thinking About Thinking What Educators Need to Know Ee 43To Empower, Be Empowered Yeap 42Topical Approach to Lifespan Development, A, 4e Santrock 20UUnderstanding Children: An Interview and Observation Guide for Educators, 2e Daniels 27, 44Understanding Psychology, 9e Feldman 9WWeapons of Mass Destruction and Terrorism Howard 109, 161Who Rules America? Power, Politics, and Social Change, 6e Domhoff 133Women and Gender: A Feminist Psychology, 4e Crawford 59Women’s Voices, Feminist Visions: Classic and Contemporary Readings, 4e Shaw 139168

AUTHOR INDEXAAbbeduto Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychology, 5e 46Aguirre American Ethnicity: The Dynamics and Consequences of Discrimination, 6e 130Alloy Abnormal Psychology with Mindmap Plus CD-ROM and Powerweb, 9e 66Austad Counseling and Psychotherapy Today 68BBachman Statistics for Criminology and Criminal Justice, 3e 145Badey Annual Editions: Homeland Security, 2e 113Badey Annual Editions: Violence and Terrorism 08/09, 11e 111Blake Perception, 5e 80Bohlin EdPsych: Modules 41Bordens Research Design and Methods: A Process Approach, 7e 76Buskist Annual Editions: Psychology 09/10, 40e 12Byer Dimensions of Human Sexuality, 6e 94CCandell Human Development, 9e 17Cauley Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 09/10, 24e 44Cauley Annual Editions: Educational Psychology, 23e 45Cherlin Public and Private Families: A Reader, 5e 114, 118Cherlin Public and Private Families: An Introduction, 5e 118Chrisler Lectures on the Psychology of Women, 4e 58Coakley Sports in Society: Issues and Controversies, 10e 152Cobb Adolescence: Continuity, Change, and Diversity, 6e 31Cohen Pscyhological Testing and Assessment, 7e 79Cohen Psychological Testing and Assessment: An Introduction to Tests and Measurement, 6e 79Collins Discovery of Society, The, 8e 105, 139Compas Introduction to Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice 67Cox Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21e 35, 127Cox Annual Editions: Aging 09/10, 22e 34, 126Cox Sport Psychology, 6e 86Cozby Methods in Behavioral Research, 10e 75Crawford Women and Gender: A Feminist Psychology, 4e 59169

AUTHOR INDEXDD’angelo Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Race and Ethnicity, 7e 132Dacey Human Development Across the Lifespan, 7e 17Daniel Annual Editions: Health 09/10, 30e 155Daniel Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Health and Society, 8e 156Daniels Understanding Children: An Interview and Observation Guide for Educators, 2e 27, 44Defrates-Densch Cases in Child and Adolescent Development for Teachers 28, 32Degenova Intimate Relationships, Marriages and Families, 7e 114Del Campo Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Childhood And Society, 7e 29, 47De Palma Annual Editions: Computers in Society 08/09, 14e 160De Palma Annual Editions: Computers in Society 09/10, 15e 159Despelder Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, The, 8e 48, 127Dickinson Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 08/09, 10e 35, 49, 129Dickinson Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 09/10, 11e 34, 48, 128Diessner Classic Edition Sources: Human Development, 3e 22Disch Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology, 5e 121, 140Domhoff Who Rules America? Power, Politics, and Social Change, 6e 133Duffy Annual Editions: Personal Growth and Behavior 07/08, 26e 14, 67Duffy Annual Editions: Psychology 08/09, 2009 Update, 39e 13Duffy Annual Editions: Social Psychology, 7e 54, 144EEaston Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Science, Technology, and Society, Expanded, 8e 159Educational Testing Service Praxis Series Official Guide, The 46Ee Thinking About Thinking What Educators Need to Know 43Esterberg Qualitative Methods in Social Research 145Evers Annual Editions: Education 09/10, 36e 153170

AUTHOR INDEXFFarganis Readings in Social Theory, 5e 139Feist Psychology: Making Connections 7Feist Theories of Personality, 7e 56Feldman Essentials of Understanding Psychology, 8e 8Feldman Psychology and Your Life 7Feldman Understanding Psychology, 9e 9Ferguson Mapping the Social Landscape: Readings in Sociology, 5e 102Fields Drugs in Perspective, 7e 68, 147Finsterbusch Annual Editions: Social Problems 08/09, 36e 111Finsterbusch Annual Editions: Sociology 08/09, 37e 106Finsterbusch Annual Editions: Sociology 09/10, 38e 106Finsterbusch Classic Edition Sources: Sociology, 4e 107Finsterbusch Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, 15e 108, 112Finsterbusch Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues, Expanded, 15e 106, 110Fiske Social Cognition, from Brains to Culture 57Fiske-Rusciano Experiencing Race, Class, and Gender in The United States, 5e 123Franzoi Social Psychology, 5e 53, 142Freiberg Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10 (2010 Update), 38e 20Freiberg Annual Editions: Human Development 09/10, 37e 21GGallagher Rethinking the Color Line: Readings in Race and Ethnicity, 4e 131Gilbert Annual Editions: The Family 09/10, 35e 115, 120Goldberg Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Drugs and Society, 8e 71, 150Gonzalez-Mena Diversity in Early Care and Education Honoring Differences, 5e 47Goode Drugs in American Society, 7e 148Greenwood Conceptual History of Psychology, A 89Griffiths Annual Editions: Developing World 09/10, 19e 134Guest Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Lifespan Development, 2e 22171

AUTHOR INDEXHHalgin Abnormal Psychology: Media and Research with Mindmap II CD, Updated 5e 65Halgin Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Abnormal Psychology, 5e 66Hart Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 13e 69, 148Haugaard Child Psychopathology 36, 71Hickey Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Crime and Criminology, 8e 151Ho Revisiting Sociology (In Chinese) 105Hothersall History of Psychology, 4e 89Howard Terrorism and Counterterrorism Understanding the New Security Environment, 109, 161Readings and Interpretations, 3eHoward Weapons of Mass Destruction and Terrorism 109, 161Hoyer Adult Development and Aging, 6e 33Hughes Sociology: The Core, 9e 101Hunt Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology, 7e 79Hutchison Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 31e 95, 157JJubilan Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 08/09, 6e 80Jubilan Annual Editions: Biological Psychology 09/10, 7e 80Junn Annual Editions: Child Growth And Development 09/10, 16e 28KKatsh Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Legal Issues, 13e 151Kelly Sexuality Today, 9e 93Kerbo Social Stratification and Inequality, 7e 134King Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View, The 11Kridel Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4e 154Kromkowski Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 16e 133Kromkowski Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 17e 132172

AUTHOR INDEXLLahey Essentials of Psychology with Making the Grade CD-ROM 12Lahey Psychology: An Introduction, 10e 10Larsen Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature, 3e 56Lauer Marriage and Family: The Quest for Intimacy, 7e 113, 117Lauer Social Problems and the Quality of Life, 11e 110Levine Annual Editions: Urban Society, 14e 129Levine Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 12e 126Levine Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues, 13e 125Lips Sex & Gender, 6e 37, 59MMcintyre Need to Know: Social Science Research Methods 145Mcintyre Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts in Sociology, The, 4e 103Mcintyre Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology, The, 4e 103Meece Child and Adolescent Development for Educators, 3e 26, 30Miller Intimate Relationships, 5e 58, 93Mio Multicultural Psychology, 2e 55, 61Myers Exploring Social Psychology, 5e 53, 143Myers Social Psychology, 9e 54, 143NNeubeck Sociology: Diversity, Conflict, and Change 105Newman Families: A Sociological Perspective 117Nolen-Hoeksema Abnormal Psychology Media and Research Update with Mindmap, 4e 65Noll Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues, 15e 152, 154OOlson Marriage and Families: Intimacy, Diversity and Strengths, 6e 115, 119Ore Social Construction of Difference and Inequality: Race, Class, Gender and Sexuality, The, 4e 123, 135173

AUTHOR INDEXPPaciorek Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Early Childhood Education, 2e 155Papalia Adult Development and Aging, 3e 34Papalia Child Development: A Topical Approach and Making the Grade CD ROM 27Papalia Child’s World, A, 11e 23Papalia Human Development, 11e 18Parke Child Psychology: A Contemporary View Point, 7e 25Passer Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior, 4e 11Patterson Child Development 24Patterson Infancy & Childhood 24Pavkov Ready, Set, Go! A Student Guide to SPSS® 13.0 and 14.0 for Windows®, 2e 78, 146RRegoli Delinquency in Society, 7e 147Reynolds Guiding Your Children, 4e 29Ritchey Statistical Imagination, The, 2e 146Ritzer Classical Sociological Theory, 5e 137Ritzer Contemporary Sociological Theory and Its Classical Roots: The Basics, 2e 138Ritzer Modern Sociological Theory, 7e 137Ritzer Sociological Theory, 7e 138Rosenblum Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, 125, 136and Sexual Orientation, The, 5eRosenthal Essentials of Behavioral Research: Methods and Data Analysis, 3e 76Rue Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Adolescence, 2e 32174

AUTHOR INDEXSSanders Human Factors in Engineering and Design, 7e 85Santrock Adolescence, 12e 30Santrock Child Development: An Introduction, 12e 26Santrock Children, 10e 25Santrock Educational Psychology, 4e 41Santrock Essentials of Life-Span Development 19Santrock Life-Span Development, 12e 18Santrock Psychology with In-Psych Plus Student CD-ROM and Powerweb, Updated 7e 12Santrock Topical Approach to Lifespan Development, A, 4e 20Schaefer Sociology, 11e 104Schaefer Sociology: A Brief Introduction, 8e 101Schaefer Sociology Matters, 4e 102Schneider Global Sociology: Introducing Five Contemporary Societies, 5e 105, 160Schroeder Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 8e 115, 119Schroeder Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and Personal Relationships, 7e 116, 121Schwalbe Sociologically Examined Life: Pieces of the Conversation, The, 4e 104Shaughnessy Research Methods in Psychology, 8e 75Shaw Women’s Voices, Feminist Visions: Classic and Contemporary Readings, 4e 139Siegel Annual Editions: Urban Society, 13e 130Slife Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Psychological Issues, 15e 14Spatz Research Methods in Psychology: Ideas, Techniques and Reports 77Steinberg Adolescence, 8e 31Stickle Annual Editions: Adolescent Psychology, 6e 33Strong Human Sexuality: Diversity in Contemporary America with Sexsource CD-ROM and Powerweb, 5e 94, 156TTan Counselling in Schools: Theories, Processes and Techniques 43Tan Enhancing Cognitive Funtions Applications Across Contexts 42Taverner Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 10e 95, 158Taverner Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 11e 95, 157Taylor Feminist Frontiers, 8e 140Taylor Health Psychology, 7e 61Tsu Japan and Singapore 160175

AUTHOR INDEXVVernoy Behavioral Statistics in Action, 3e 78WWaitley Psychology of Success, 10e 62Wenar Developmental Psychopathology, 5e 37White Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Gender, 4e 38, 60, 142, 157, 158Whitley Principles of Research in Behavioral Science, 2e 77Williams Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak Performance, 6e 85Wilson Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 08/09, 23e 70, 149Wilson Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 09/10, 24e 69, 149YYeap To Empower, Be Empowered 42176

EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST FORMMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354www.mheducation.asiau Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this catalogfor text adoption consideration, please complete this request form and faxto your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover for fax number) orto McGraw-Hill Singapore.u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hillreserve the right to refuse any requests which do not relate to teaching.u Please make copies of this form if necessary.REQUESTED BYName Room #DepartmentUniversityAddressTelFaxEmail addressCOMP REQUESTPlease indicate ISBN No, Author & Title1)2)3)4)5)Course NameSubjectEnrolmentCommencement DateDecision Date Individual Decision Group DecisionCurrent Text Used

McGRAW-HILL MAILING LISTMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354www.mheducation.asiaPlease include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hillbooks.Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email address atI am already on your mailing list but my address has changed.Please update my record to the following new address.Name(Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name)PositionDepartmentUniversityAddressPostal CodeTelFaxEmail addressSUBJECT OF INTERESToIndustrial & Plant EngineeringoHistoryoAccountingoMechanical EngineeringoLawoAdvertisingoMedical ScienceoLibrary ScienceoBusiness ManagementoDentistryoMass CommunicationoFinance & InvestmentoNursingoMusicoMarketingoAgricultureoPhilosophy & ReligionoEconomicsoBiologyoPhysical EducationoHuman Resource ManagementoChemistryoPolitical ScienceoInsurance & Real EstateoForestryoPsychologyoTrainingoGeography & GeologyoSociologyoooComputingAeronautical & Aerospace EngineeringArchitecture & Urban PlanningoooPhysics & AstronomyZoologyMathematics & StatisticsPlease return by fax at (65) 6862 3354to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Singapore office.ooooooChemical EngineeringCivil EngineeringConstructionElectronics & CommunicationsElectrical EngineeringGeneral EngineeringooooooArt & HumanitiesEducationEnglishEnglish as a 2nd Language/ELTForeign LanguageHealth & NutritionMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy. Ifyou do not wish to receive further marketing informationfrom McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), please send anemail to marketingsvc_mhea@mcgraw-hill.com or writeto McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin Link,Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill CompaniesCustomer Privacy Policy at http://www.mcgraw-hill.com/privacy.html. For questions or to learn more about howMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia) applies this policy, pleasecontact us at the above email or postal address.

EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST FORMMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354www.mheducation.asiau Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this catalogfor text adoption consideration, please complete this request form and faxto your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover for fax number) orto McGraw-Hill Singapore.u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hillreserve the right to refuse any requests which do not relate to teaching.u Please make copies of this form if necessary.REQUESTED BYName Room #DepartmentUniversityAddressTelFaxEmail addressCOMP REQUESTPlease indicate ISBN No, Author & Title1)2)3)4)5)Course NameSubjectEnrolmentCommencement DateDecision Date Individual Decision Group DecisionCurrent Text Used

McGRAW-HILL MAILING LISTMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354www.mheducation.asiaPlease include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hillbooks.Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email address atI am already on your mailing list but my address has changed.Please update my record to the following new address.Name(Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name)PositionDepartmentUniversityAddressPostal CodeTelFaxEmail addressSUBJECT OF INTERESToIndustrial & Plant EngineeringoHistoryoAccountingoMechanical EngineeringoLawoAdvertisingoMedical ScienceoLibrary ScienceoBusiness ManagementoDentistryoMass CommunicationoFinance & InvestmentoNursingoMusicoMarketingoAgricultureoPhilosophy & ReligionoEconomicsoBiologyoPhysical EducationoHuman Resource ManagementoChemistryoPolitical ScienceoInsurance & Real EstateoForestryoPsychologyoTrainingoGeography & GeologyoSociologyoooComputingAeronautical & Aerospace EngineeringArchitecture & Urban PlanningoooPhysics & AstronomyZoologyMathematics & StatisticsPlease return by fax at (65) 6862 3354to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Singapore office.ooooooChemical EngineeringCivil EngineeringConstructionElectronics & CommunicationsElectrical EngineeringGeneral EngineeringooooooArt & HumanitiesEducationEnglishEnglish as a 2nd Language/ELTForeign LanguageHealth & NutritionMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy. Ifyou do not wish to receive further marketing informationfrom McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), please send anemail to marketingsvc_mhea@mcgraw-hill.com or writeto McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin Link,Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill CompaniesCustomer Privacy Policy at http://www.mcgraw-hill.com/privacy.html. For questions or to learn more about howMcGraw-Hill Education (Asia) applies this policy, pleasecontact us at the above email or postal address.

McGRAW-HILL EDUCATION (ASIA)SINGAPORE(also servicing Mauritius)McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775Tel: (65) 6863 1580 • Customer Service Hotline: (65) 6868 8188Fax (65) 6862 3354eMail: mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.com • website: www.mheducation.asiaCHINA(Representative Office)McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncSuite 906, 9/F, SP Tower ATsinghua Science ParkNo. 1, Zhongguancun East RoadHaidian DistrictBeijing 100084, P R ChinaTel: (86-10) 6279 0299Fax: (86-10) 6279 0292eMail: instructorchina@mcgraw-hill.comHONG KONGMcGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncSuites 2906-10, Shell TowerTimes Square1, Matheson Street, Causeway BayHong KongTel: (85-2) 2730 6640Fax: (85-2) 2730 2085eMail: miehk_mhe@mcgraw-hill.comINDIA(also servicing Bangladesh, Pakistan,Nepal & Sri Lanka)McGraw-Hill Education (India) LimitedB-4, Sector 63Distt Gautam Budh NagarNoida, UP-201301, IndiaTel: (91-12) 438 3545Fax: (91-12) 438 3401 - 403eMail: saurabh_sharma@mcgraw-hill.comINDONESIA(Appointed Agent)P T Media Global EdukasiGrand Boutique Center, Blok D-65Jalan Mangga Dua RayaJakarta 14430IndonesiaTel: (62-21) 601 1963/601 1973Fax: (62-21) 625 7245eMail: info@mge.co.idJAPANMcGraw-Hill Education Japan1-12-3 Kandasuda-choChiyoda-kuTokyo 101-0041JapanTel: (81-3) 5298 7221Fax: (81-3) 5298 7224eMail: mhejpn@mcgraw-hill.co.jpKOREAMcGraw-Hill Korea Inc3F, Ji-Woo Bldg376-12 Seokyo-DongMapo-KuSeoul 121-210, KoreaTel: (82-2) 325 2351Fax: (82-2) 325 2371eMail: miekr_mhe@mcgraw-hill.comMALAYSIA/BRUNEIMcGraw-Hill Malaysia Sdn BhdNo. 40, Jalan Pengacara U1/48Temasya Industrial Park40150 Shah AlamSelangor Darul Ehsan, MalaysiaTel: (60-3) 7627 6888Fax: (60-3) 7627 6838eMail: msia_mhe@mcgraw-hill.comPHILIPPINES(also servicing Guam)(Representative Office)McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncUnit 1503, Jollibee Plaza CondominiumEmerald Avenue Corner Ruby StreetOrtigas Center, Pasig City 1600PhilippinesTel: (63-2) 638 5177 / 638 5178Fax: (63-2) 638 5181eMail: mghphils@mcgraw-hill.com.phTAIWANMcGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc7/F, No: 53 Bo-Ai RoadTaipei 100TaiwanTel: (886-2) 2311 3000Fax: (886-2) 2388 8822eMail: mietw_mhe@mcgraw-hill.comTHAILAND(also servicing Cambodia & Laos)McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc40/27 Soi Inthamara 8Suthisarn Road, PhayathaiBangkok 10400, ThailandTel: (66-2) 615 6555Fax: (66-2) 615 6515eMail: mieth_mhe@mcgraw-hill.comVIETNAM(Representative Office)McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncUnit 701-6, Regus Business Center7th Floor, Me Linh Point Tower2 Ngo Duc Ke StreetDistrict 1, Ho Chi Minh City,VietnamTel: (84-8) 3520 2781Fax: (84-8) 3823 7840eMail: van_yen_quang@mcgraw-hill.com

We publish digital solutionsMcGraw-Hill Higher Education offers a wide variety of online products categorized by content,course management systems, and online assessment. Content products offer online McGraw-Hillcoursework that complements the textbook. Course management systems offer different waysto actually deliver that McGraw-Hill digital content. And online assessment products focus onhow well students are doing in class.No matter which product our customers choose, they count on unparalleled service that answersevery question through the life of the adoption.CONTENTOnline Learning CenterThese new and improved sites offerinstructors an instant online presencewith a ready-to-go Website that tiesdirectly to their book. Students can visitthe site for key terms, quizzes, exercises,and more. Instructors can have this bookspecificcontent delivered in PageOut ofother course management systems likeBlackboard or WebCT.PrepCenterPrepCenter is McGraw-Hill’s uniquelibrary of teaching assets that putsthe power in your hands. On one easynavigate screen you can search an entirepackage of learning material.EZ TestEasy-to-use desktop test generator usedfor creating paper tests. Create papertests from book specific test banks orwrite your own algorithmic questionsusing simple question templates. Youcan also create multiple versions of thesame test.www.mhhe.com/eztestCOURSEMANAGEMENTSYSTEMSPageOutPageOut offers instructors an easy wayto create a course Website. Studentscan follow their syllabus for coursework,readings, quizzes, or daily assignments.With simple development and powerfulfeatures, it’s little wonder why PageOutcontinues to be the tool instructorscount on most for creating courseWebsites.asia.pageout.netThird Party Delivery SystemsCourse Management Systems likeBlackboard and WebCT offer instructorsanother way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into their class. Should theychoose one of these Course ManagementSystems, they can be confident inknowing that delivering McGraw-Hilldigital content will be simple to use.Psych 2.0MULTIMEDIAPsych 2.0 is a collection of onlinebasedconcept reinforcements, such asinteractivities and videos for Introductionto Psychology courses. It is organized bylearning concept, so it can be used withany Intro Psych text. It is perfect forany professor who thinks their courseand/or students would benefit fromalternative presentations of key IntroPsych concepts.McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354email: mghasia_sg@mcgraw-hill.comwebsite: www.mheducation.asiaC08-000616-X